Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
32C-057 HAMPTON CT
DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 39 3 .10 SERVICE A. Pad mount transformer will be furnished and installed by Mass. Electric Co. The General Contractor will furnish and install the concrete mat for the transformer and the handhole to comply with Mass . Electric Co. ' s requirements. B. Furnish and install all transformer grounding in accordance with Mass . Electric Co. ' s standards . C. Furnish and install -the underground conduit from the transformers to "the Utility Co. pole and terminate on the poles as directed by Mass . Electric. D. Mass . Electric Co. will furnish and install the 15 KV primary cable from the transformer through the handhole to the pole . They will furnish and install all stress cones and cable terminators . E. Mass Electric will make all final connections at the poles and transformers . F. Furnish and install all secondary conduit and cable including all lugs required for paralleling the secondary cables . G. Check with Mass . Electric Co. and pay all charges that they will assess for their work. 3 .11 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Conduit and sleeves shall be installed wherever required. Check with the Telephone Co. Provide raceways throughout , except in those areas where the Telephone Co . will provide prewiring. B. P.V. C. duct, heavy wall, style 40, shall be furnished and installed by Electrical Sub- Contractor as required by the Telephone Co. for the telephone services . C. The Telephone Co. will terminate their wiring in each apartment in an SNI box. All work beyond the SNI box will be the responsibility of the Electrical Sub-Contractor. END OF SECTION DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 38 E. Provide all wiring for the chiller. Check characteristics of equipment before proceeding and do all wiring as required. F. Provide all wiring for all washers and dryers . G. Provide all power wiring for Boiler Room equipment . H. All temperature control wiring will be by the HVAC Sub-Contractor. I. Provide all wiring for all circulating pumps . J. Provide all wiring for ranges and range hoods . 3.06 COMPACTOR A. All wiring for the Compactor equipment shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Sub- Contractor, as indicated on the Drawings . 3.07 EXTERIOR LIGHTING A. See Electrical Site Plan for extent of site lighting. B. Furnish and install the complete system of exterior lighitng including all building lighting and pole mounted units . Furnish and install all luminaires , lamps , mounting supports , poles , anchor bolts , conduit, wire and time clocks as required. 3 .08 ELEVATOR WIRING A. The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall furnish and install all wiring as indicated and as required for the Elevators . 3.09 GROUNDING A. Furnish and install a service ground to the incoming cold water service pipes at point of entrance to both buildings . All grounding shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code and local inspection requirements . DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 37 D. All exposed conduit shall be installed in a rigid manner and run straight lines either vertical, parallel, or perpendicular to ceiling walls . Insofar as practicable, the conduit shall be located in accordance with the drawings which show diagrammatically approximate locations . E. All conduit ends shall be plugged with metal plugs as soon as they are installed to prevent entrance or moisture, or plaster during construction. No conduit smaller than one-half (1/2") inch electrical trade size shall be used. F. No wire shall be pulled into any conduit, until the conduit system is complete in all details , in case of concealed work, in the case of exposed work, until the conduit has been complete in every detail. G. All conduit shall be kept at least six (611) inches away from flues , heating devices , and such other similar equipment where closer proximity might impair the service life of the wiring. All interference with other piping shall be avoided. Conduit shall be manufactured by Allied Tube & Conduit Co . , General Electric, or Republic. 3 .05 WIRING FOR HEATING, VENTILATING AND PLUMBING A. Check with the Heating, Ventilating and Plumbing Drawings and Specification. Obtain all pertinent information relating, to all equipment , and do all necessary power and control wiring as required. B. Exhaust fans will be furnished and installed by the Heating and Ventilating Sub-Contractor. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install switches with overload protection, do all wiring including final connections . C. Disposals and dishwashers where shown, will be furnished and installed by the Plumbing Sub- Contractor. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install all switches and make all final connections . D. Furnish and install fused and unfused safety switches for all mechanical equipment wherever required. DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 36 C. In the case of failure on the part of the Electrical Sub-Contractor to give proper information as noted above, he will be required to do his own cutting and patching or have same done by the General Contractor at his own expense. 3.03 CIRCUITS A. The lighting and power systems shall be complete from panelboards to all lighting fixtures , switches , convenience outlets , exhaust fans , motors , starters , and such other items of work. This shall include all conduit conductors , fittings , boxes , supports , and accessories to complete the system in every detail. B. Circuits are indicated on the drawings by single lines and are generally numbered for identification purposes only. However, no circuit shall be loaded more than shown on the drawings , in order to avoid excessive voltage drop, and overloading of circuit breakers . The various loads shall be balanced among the phases as evenly as possible. C. Lighting circuits shall be wired in such a manner that the grounded neutral wire shall not be broken at any point and switches shall be inserted only in the ungrounded wire of the circuit . 3.04 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. In general , the term conduit shall be interpreted as follows : Rigid steel conduit , zinc coated, shall be used for all underground conduit, and for concealed work in concrete slabs . Rigid steel conduit or electrical metallic tubing shall be used for exposed work. PVC 'style 40 may be used for underground work, if encased in concrete. B. BX or Romex shall be used for all branch circuit wiring as described in the National Electric Code and if approved by the Electrical Inspector. However, BX or Romex shall not be used in passing through floors . C. All grounding connections shall be made, so that the ground will be continuous for the entire Electrical System. All wiring shall be run '' concealed. DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 35 C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall consult all contract drawings which may affect the locations of any outlets , apparatus and equipment to avoid all possible interference and permit full coordination with all work. The :right to make any reasonable change in location of outlets , apparatus , or equipment up to the time of roughing-in is reserved to the Architect . Such changes shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. D. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Sub-Contractor to see that all electrical equipment , such as junction boxes , panelboards , pull boxes , switches , controls and such other apparatus as may require maintenance and operation from time to time is made accessible. E. The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall maintain at the site a set of drawings on which shall be accurately shown the actual installation of all work under this Division, indicating thereon any variations from the contract drawings . This shall include changes in locations and dimensions . The Owner will furnish two (2) sets of black or blue line on white drawings for that purpose. At the conclusion of the work, the Electrical Subcontractor shall deliver to the General Contractor a complete set of reproducible record drawings of photolitho reproductions showin the entire work as actually installed and two (2� sets of black or blue line on white prints thereof . These prints shall be submitted to the Architect. 3 .02 SLEEVES , OPENINGS , ETC. A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the shape, size and location of all openings required for his equipment and shall give full information to the General Contractor and other- sub-contractors sufficiently in advance of the work, so that all openings may be built in advance. B. He shall furnish all sleeves , supports, etc. , so that the General Contractor may build same in place. DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 34 2. Equipment to be supplied: a. Emergency call switch shall be Tektone, Model Sp117-4 with emergency locking lever action. The switch shall mount on a single gang stainless steel faceplate with the word EMERGENCY permanently engraved on it . Unit shall be supplied with a 6 ft. durable nylon cord. b. Bell shall be Wheelock Model 43-G6-24 volt AC vibrating bell. Bell shall have shockproof Zamek die cast housing and have dustproof fully enclosed mechanism. C. Dome light shall be Tektone 207W with wedge shaped translucent dome , two gang device mounted to single gang box. Lamp replacement shall be accomplished without the use of tools. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The Electrical drawings intend to show only the scope of the design; and the Electrical Sub- Contractor shall be responsible for the correct installation of his work in a manner satisfactory to the best practice of his trade, and to complete the scope of this sub-contract in all respects . All roughing to Electrical equipment and other equipment furnished under other Sections of this specification shall be accomplished in all details to specification of equipment manufacturer, and to approval of Architect; no roughing work shall be accomplished, until the pertinent manufacturer' s shop drawings are approved by the Architect. B. The Exact routing of conduit shall be determined by the structural conditions and other obstructions . This shall not be construed to mean that the design of the system may be changed, but refers only to the exact runs of conduits between given points . DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 33 b. Disconnecting emergency power from the control unit shall cause the control panel audible sound to steady, and common trouble indicator to light , and a separate battery trouble indicator to flash. When the panel audible acknowledge switch is activated, the control panel audible will silence and the battery trouble indicator shall go steady. G. TEST, GUARANTEE, AND DRAWINGS The contractor shall conduct tests of the system in the presence of the owner or his agent. All material and installation shall be guaranteed to be free of defects in material and workmanship for one (1) year. The contractor shall turn over to the owner system wiring diagrams and maintenance data. H. INSTALLATION Install in strict accordance with approved shop drawings and as required to meet all requirements of local authorities . Final installation shall be totally acceptable to all local authorities. I. MASTER BOX AND CONTRACT FOR SERVICES Both the Master Box and the contract for services shall be in strict accordance with the most recent Town of Northampton Alarm Regulation. The Master Box for this project shall be at the location indicated on the drawings . 2 . 20 EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM A. General Description: The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall furnish and install an Emergency Call System which shall function as follows : 1 . The operation of the emergency call switch located in the bedrooms and bathroom of each designated apartment shall cause the following to happen: a. Light dome light outside apartment entry. b. Sound bell . DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 32 b. Interconnect all detectors within a dwelling unit , so that all units will sound the alarm when any one unit is activated. c. Each unit shall have a solid state indicator lamp (LED) which glows when 120VAC power is being supplied. d. Each unit shall have a special switch to permit periodic checking for proper sensitivity and operation. The switch shall stimulate entry of smoke, creating an alarm. e. Detectors shall be universally mounted in standard 4" square junction boxes . f . Detectors shall be Mirtone type 73436MX. 7 . EXTERIOR BEACON a. Exterior rotating/beacon shall be mounted as shown on the drawings . The strobe shall operate at 24 VDC, incorporate a red lens , flash at 60 to 100 BPM, and 90,000 candle power. Mirtone type SL-IL. 8 . OPERATING POWER a. Operating power shall be 120VAC taken from a supply circuit having a continuous unfused conductor . Standby battery and charger shall be furnished to sound alarms for a period of ten (10) minutes after a sixty (60) hour interruption of 120 VAC. While on battery power, the control unit shall continue to supervise all installation wires as specified herein. While AC power is on, the control unit shall supervise the presence of battery power. DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 31 4 . AUTOMATIC DETECTORS a. Automatic heat detectors shall be fixed temperature type only . Units shall show visual evidence of operation and use replaceable elements . Heat detectors shall be Mirtone type "A" series 400. b. Sprinkler system flow and tamper switches will be furnished under another trade. C. Remote Relay - A remote damper control relay (Mirtone QST311) shall be installed on each floor. Relays shall be triple pull double throw (3PDT) with a minimum contact rating of 10 amps . at 120VAC, 60 hertz and 24 volt D. C. coil voltage. Relay shall be provided with terminal strips and enclosure for installation (i.e. fan damper, smoke hatch) . Fans which are controlled by building automation system shall require (2) QST311 relays for fire department override. d. Automatic photoelectronic smoke detectors shall be of the solid state photoelectronic type and shall be factory-set at a nominal 3.0% light obscuration per foot , regardless of the rate of combustion, the distance between the detector and the fire source, the combustible material, the temperature, or the open area. Detectors shall be designed to ignore invisible airborne particles or smoke densities that are below the factory-set point. A visual indication of an alarm shall be given when the normally-pulsed supervisory LED glows continuously . Automatic photoelectronic type smoke detectors shall be two-wire Mirtone type 73441 with 73641 base. S. DETECTORS WITHIN APARTMENT UNITS a. Detectors within each dwelling unit shall be ceiling mounted and located as shown on the drawings or on the approved shop drawings except units shall not be installed in front of airconditioning diffusers . DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 30 d. All alarm initiating circuits shall be class "B". Each initiating zone (circuit) shall include individual alarm and trouble indicators per zone. e. The system shall be capable of supplying up to nine (9) amps of auxilliary power for future use and as specified elsewhere in these specifications . Systems which by design do not have this capability shall require multiple power supplies . f . All interconnect wiring between modules and between cabinets shall be by the manufacturer , and be accomplished during factory assembled in order that the manufacturer' s Quality Control Department test the controls for this project in its entirety prior to shipment . The Fire Alarm Control Panel for this project shall be Mirtone Type '7800 flush mounted. 2 . ALARM SIGNALS a. Alarm indicating appliances used in conjunction with audible alarms shall be combination audio/visual horn/strobe units installed on supervised circuits . Visual portion shall flash on alarm condition. The horn strobe units shall be metal, re- entrant , semi-flush mounted, Mirtone type 74213 with 74219 backbox. b. Apartments : These units shall have mini- horns mounted on a stainless steel single gang plate. Mirtone type 74201 . 3 . MANUAL FIRE BOXES a. Manual fire boxes shall be non-coded and shall be semi-flush mounted. Stations shall be single action. When operated, fire boxes shall remain mechanically locked until manually reset . Manual fire boxes shall be Mirtone type 73502 . DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE f . Return the elevator to the ground floor. These controls shall be an integral component of the control panel, whether connected or riot . g. Control all fans and dampers as required by the specifications and the authority having jurisdiction. 4. Any system derangement such as the closing of a sprinkler valve supervisory switch, or other disarrangement in the electrical supervision of this system shall initiate a distinct audio/visual trouble indication at the system control panel and at the location of the common alarm annunciator .. 5 . The control panel shall incorporate 10 active and 2 spare zones .. Zone designations as indicated on drawings . F. EQUIPMENT 1. Controls : a. The control unit shall be modular , of dead front construction, using solid state construction , to operate the system. All input and output circuits shall be totally field programmable without modification to, or replacement of , the programmable read only memory (PROM' S) of the control panel . Any program change to these specifications must be by written authorization of the Fire and/or Building Departments . b. Separate amber trouble indicators shall be provided for each zone circuit , alarm circuit , ground detector circuit, etc. A second "common" indicator shall be provided for redundancy . THE SILENCING OF ANY ALARM OR TROUBLE CONDITION WILL NOT PREVENT THE RESOUNDING OF SUBSEQUENCE ALARM OR TROUBLE SIGNALS . c . All switches shall be "key" controlled to preclude unauthorized use. DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 28 D. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 . These specifications are intended as a performance guideline for manufacturers of Fire Alarm "Systems ." 2 . The "system" specified is manufactured by Mirtone Industries , Inc. , with local offices at the Dawson Industrial Park, 54 Brigham Street, Marlboro, MA 01752 , and is intended to indicate the specified level of quality and performance. 3. Other "system" manufacturers : a. Pyrotronics b. Simplex C. Edwards E. OPERATION "lk, 1. The contractor shall furnish and install a complete and operable system. 2 . It is the contractor' s responsibility to coordinate with other trades as required to ensure proper and adequate interface to the various sub-systems of this project . 3 . The initiation of any automatic or manual initiation device will simultaneously : a. Indicate the stricken zone on the system annunciator . b. Indicate a common audio/visual alarm at the Fire Command location specified and shown on the drawings . c. Actuate the municipal master box supervisory module. d. Sound all alarm horns and flash the alarm lamps of all audio/visual devices . e. Actuate the beacon on the outside of the building. DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 27 2 . All components shall be listed by Underwriter' s Laboratories for fire alarm signaling use. In addition, all automatic initiating devices , audio or visual indicating appliances and all components of the evacuation system shall be cross listed with UL by the manufacturer of the control panel. C. SUBMITTALS 1. Within 15 days or less at the award of the contract the system supplier shall provide eight sets of system shop drawings . The submittals shall be complete in all repects and as minimum shall include the following: a. A system operating description designed to verify the comprehension of the specifications , and to outline the proposed operation for the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) . b. Complete descriptive literature for each component of the system. c. Computations of all voltage drop, wattage (amplifier and/or power supplies) , standby battery calculations , zone descriptions of alarm and initiating zones . d. UL listing numbers . e. Complete system drawings for this specific system. The drawings shall include: floor plans showing each device with conduit runs. and interconnect wiring diagrams . In addition, the manufacturer of the control panel shall include a note on the drawings which verifies the fact that the type and quantity of devices shown on the drawings are compatible with the specific control panel for this project . f . It is the reponsibility of the system supplier to verify to all concerned that the submitted system is in strict accordance with all authorities . DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 26 (d) Battery Charge Rate (e) A. C. Volts (f) A.C. Amps (all legs) (g) Engine Air. Exhaust Temperature (h) Engine Oil Temperature 2 . A second test shall be made by utilizing available connected load. The supplier of this equipment shall also furnish and install lube oil in the engine and also drain and refill the engine with new lube oil after the engine-generator test has been completed. If the engine-generator unit should fail this initial test run, as determine by the representative of the Owner , after proper corrective measures have been implemented, replace engine lube oil again after the second test . If any additional tests are required to prove the performance of the engine-generator unit , lobe unit, :Cube oil shall be replaced after each such test run. 3. Prior to shipment of generator to the job site, conduct a 3 hour :Full load shop test utilizing resistive load to attain full rated load. A written report of this test shall be forwarded to the Engineer for approval prior to shipment . All expense for these tests shall be carried by the Electrical Sub-Contractor. Notify engineer one (1) week prior to shop test . Shop test may be witnessed. 2 . 19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. WORK INCLUDED 1 . Non-coded Fire Alarm System B. REQUIREMENT OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 1. The system shall be in total compliance with all Town of Northampton building and safety codes of the Fire Department and other agencies having jurisdiction. DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 25 5 . Engine starting contacts shall be provided to start the generating plant, if any phase of the normal source drops below 70% of rated voltage, after an adjustable time delay period of three (3) to thirty (30) seconds , to allow for momentary dips . The transfer switch shall transfer to emergency, as soon as the voltage and frequency have reached 90% of rated voltage. After restoration of normal power on all phase to 90% of rated voltage, an adjustable time delay period of 0-30 minutes shall delay re-transfer to normal power, until it has had time to stabilize. If the emergency power source should fail during the time period , the time delay shall be by- passed, and the switch shall return immediately to the normal source. After the switch has retransferred to normal, the engine generator shall be allowed to operate at no load for an adjustable period of time (0. 5 minutes) to allow it to cool before shut down . The transfer switch shall include a test switch to simulate normal power failure, pilot lights on the cabinet door to indicate the switch closed on normal or emergency and four (4) auxillary contacts on the main shaft ; two (2) closed on normal, the other two (2) closed on emergency , and an engine exercisor with load/no load selector switch. 6 . Load transfer switches shall be as manufactured by ASCO, Westinghouse, or Russelectric. L. Test: 1 . The supplier of the equipment shall provide with no additional charge any information or supervision required for the proper installation of the equipment . Upon completion of the installation of this unit a test run for four hours shall be conducted by the equipment manufacturer' s factory trained serviceman, utilizing load banks to attain full generator rating. At this time adjustments shall be made for correct operation of the equipment and the following readings taken at 15 minute intervals : (a) Engine Jacket, Water Temperature (b) Generator Temperature (c) Oil Pressure DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 24 -Alarm silenced (visual only) -Panel mounted alarm -Alarm on/off switch K. Automatic Load Transfer Switch: 1 . Automatic transfer switches shall be furnished, with full load current rating as shown on the drawings 120/208V, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 hertz , A.C. normal and emergency . The transfer switch shall be capable of switching all classes of load, and shall be rated for continuous duty when installed in a non- ventilated enclosure that is constructed in accordance with Underwriters ' Laboratories , Inc. , Standard UL-•1008 . 2 . The transfer switch shall be double throw, actuated by a single electrical operator momentarily energized; and connected to the transfer mechanism by a simple overcenter type linkage with a total transfer time not to exceed one-half (1/2) second. The transfer switch shall be capable of transferring successfully in either direction with 70% of rated voltage applied to' the switch terminals . 3. The normal and emergency contacts shall be positively interlocked mechanically and electrically to prevent simultaneous closing. Main contacts shall be mechanically locked in position in both the normal and emergency positions without the use of hooks , latches , magnets or springs ; and shall be silver- tungsten alloy protected by arcing contacts , with magnetic blowouts on each pole. 4. The transfer switch shall be equipped with a manual operator that is designed to prevent injury to the operating personnel, if the electrical operator should suddenly become energized during manual transfer . The manual operator shall provide the same contact-to- contact transfer speed as the electrical operator to prevent a flash-over from switching the main contacts slowly . DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 23 A.C. ammeter with current transformers , 3 1/2" diameter , 2% accuracy Combination VM-AM phase selector switch Frequency meter, 3 1/2" diameter Elapsed time meter , 3 1/2" diameter Automatic start-stop control with faulty indicating lights and corresponding safety switches for: -Low oil pressure Overcrank protection (manual reset) High water temperature Low water temperature -Overspeed - Overcrank Selector switch - "off , auto, manual" with light for "selector switch off" 1 Manual reset line circuit breakers , 3 pole, 120/208V 225 amp. , mounted in NEMA I enclosure with an interrupting capacity of 22 ,000 amps , sym. at 240 volts . (b) The control shall be designed to start the engine upon a closure of a remote contact , arm all safties , and shutdown the engine when the remote contact is re-opened. (c) The control must be manually reset following any fault condition. (d) Control power shall be from the engine start battery. I. Derangement Panel 1 . A flush remote mounted engine generator derangement panel shall be built , tested and supplied by the generator supplier. The derangement panel shall monitor, visually and audibly, the following: -Generating (visual only) -High water temperature -Low oil pressure -Overspeed -Overcrank DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 22 7 . Rotor - One (1) piece laminations welded and secured to shaft by a key and press fit. A mortisseur windings installed and connected between poles as an aid to paralled operation and improved wave form during unbalanced loads . Field coils machine wound on insulated pole body and securely braced . Rotor statically and dynamically balanced. 8. Stator - One (1) piece laminations welded together. Stator coils form wound and placed in insulation slots . Stator pressed and welded in a rigid steel frame . 9. Bearing - Double sealed ball bearing, lubricated for life.. 10. Insulation - NEMA Class F insulation. 11 . Varnish Three (3) coats modified polyester type, will not support fungus growth. 12. Cooling - Cast aluminum fan mounted on generator shaft . 13. Radio Suppression -• Radiated or conducted radio interference will riot affect normal commercial apparatus . 14. Controls : (a) (Unit Mounted) the engine generator set shall include a combination engine generator control panel shock mounted at the generator end of the unit . This unit mounted panel shall include (but not be limited to) the following: Water temperature gauge -Oil pressure gauge D.C. battery charge rate ammeter -A. C. voltage regulator Voltage adjusting rheostat -Start-stop switch A. C. voltmeter , 3 1/2" diameter, 2% accuracy "* DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 21 11 . Mounting: (a) The engine and generator shall be close coupled and mounted on a structural steel base designed to maintain proper alignment of the unit. (b) The unit shall be certified by the manufacturer to be free from any critical torsional vibrations within a range of plus or minus 10 percent of synchronous speed. (c) Vibration isolators of the rubber pad type shall be supplied with the unit . The number of isolators shall be as recommended by the generator set manufacturer . (d) Vibration isolators shall be Korfund MMB series or equal by Consolidated Kinetics or Vibration Eliminator. H. GENERATOR 1 . Rating - 37 KW, 46 KVA, 0. 8 P.F. , 3 phase, 60 cycle, 120/208 volts . 2 . Type - Revolving field, 4 pole, single bearing, drip-proof . 3. Exciter - brushless , direct connected, fully tropicalized, SCR rectifiers , static voltage regulator, rheostat , excellent motor starting capability. 4. Voltage Regulation - Plus or minus 1% of any preset value over the three (3) phase load range. Instantaneous voltage dip or rise when measured with an oscillioscope, will not exceed 20% upon full load application or rejection, and will return to preset value within 0. 5 seconds . 5. Waveform - Deviation factor of output voltage will not exceed 5% and the value of any individual harmonic will not exceed 2% of the fundamental when operating with an unbalanced load. 6 . Temperature Rise - Temperature rise of any component will not exceed the rise permitted by NEMA Standards . "* DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 20 (b) The cooling system shall be filled with a 50% solution of ethylene glycol and water . 8 . Safety Shutdowns : (a) The engine shall be equipped with safety contacts for : Low tube oil pressure- High jacket water temperature-Overspeed - Overcrank 9. Engine Instruments : (a) The following engine instruments shall be included either in an engine instrument panel or in the generator control panel: -Lube oil temperature -tube oil pressure -Water temperature -D.C. ammeter Any other instruments considered necessary by the manufacturer shall be included. 10. Exhaust System: a) A high degree exhaust silencer suitable for residential type silencing complete with condensate drains shall be supplied of the size recommended by the generator set manufacturer, but in no case less than 3 inches . Silencer shall be as manufactured by Kittell , Maxim or Burgess Manning. An octave band center frequently in Hertz data sheet shall accompany all muffler shop drawings . A section of seamless , flexible stainless steel exhaust connection of the size and type recommended by the generator set manufacturer , but in no case less than 3 in diameter and eighteen (18) inches long. If the engine is Vee type, a single exhaust outlet header shall be supplied. DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 19 (c) Float type battery charger shall be supplied to maintain the starting batteries at full charge. The charger shall be suitable for wall mounting (or may be mounted in the generator control panel) and shall have a cranking disconnect relay or current limiting feature. The charger shall be LaMarche. Battery charger shall be prewired to generator terminal strip prior to shipment . (d) There shall be a belt drive battery charging alternator with regulator and charge rate ammeter for charging the batteries while the engine is running or the float type battery charger may be arranged to charge the batteries from the normal source when the engine is shut down and from the generator output when the generator is operating. This shall be accomplished by a relay energized from the generator output. 6 . Jacket Water Heater: (a) A 1000 watt engine jacket water heater shall be provided to maintain the engine jacket water at a temperature high enough to assure starting the engine and attaining rated voltage and frequency within ten (10) seconds . The jacket heater shall be of the capacity recommended by the generator set manufacturer to meet the above conditions . Input voltage to the heater shall be 120-1-60. 7 . Engine Cooling System: (a) The engine shall be equipped with a unit mounted radiator cooling system complete with unit mounted radiator, circulating water pump, by-pass thermostat , and radiator belt guards . The radiator shall be supplied to operate in an ambient temperature of 110 F. DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 18 G. Engine: 1 . The engine shall 'be water-cooled, 4 cylinder, 4 cycle , industrial type, heavy duty diesel fueled, with a minimum displacement of 239 cubic inches , and a minimum rated output of 50 H.P. and a R.P.M. of 1800. Ratings shall be for standard conditions of 29.92 barometer and 60 degrees air temperature. 2 . Lubrication shall be a full pressure system using an engine driven gear-type lube oil pump with replaceable element full lube oil filter. Oil cooler shall 'be required. 3. Fuel S stem, Diesel: a� The engine fuel system shall include all equipment normally supplied and recommended by the generator set manufacturer for standby generator service . The engine fuel system AVW equipment shall include (but not be limited to) the following: -Fuel injection system -Fuel line solenoid valve -Flexible fuel connections 4. Governor: (a) The engine shall be equipped with a mechanical governor capable of maintaining the engine speed from no load to full load within 5 percent of the synchronous speed. 5 . Starting System: (a) The engine shall have a 12 V.D. C. starting motor and starter solenoid switch. (b) Batteries - One (1) set of starting batteries 'with cables and steel battery rack, shall be included: batteries shall be heavy duty lead acid type , rated 220 hours . DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 17 2 .18 EMERGENCY GENERATOR A. Furnish and install a complete and operating emergency power and lighting system as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings . B. The system shall be arranged to provide automatic and instantaneous emergency lighting upon failure of normal lighting in any of the supervised areas . This system shall meet all Code requirements for emergency lighting. C. Furnish complete, install and leave in good running condition a 37 KW diesel fueled engine driven generating set continuously rated for standby service. The unit shall be hereinafter described and as shown on the Drawings , complete with all controls , attachments , accessories , fuel and exhaust systems . Consolidated Power Ind. Model No . 60D6T D. The unit shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of this type of equipment as manufactured by Consolidated Power, Inc. , Catapillar, or Cummins or equal. E. The unit shall be capable of accepting the incoming loads of the Automatic Transfer Switch. F. Operation: 1 . The operation of this unit shall be automatic and upon the closing of a remote starting contact in Automatic Transfer Switch, the engine shall start and attain rated voltage and frequency within ten (10) seconds . 2 . All necessary accessories shall be provided to assure starting within the time described above under the ambient conditions described herein. 3 . Furnish and install all electrical work and equipment required for the proper operation of this system. The General Contractor will provide the necessary structured supports for the emergency generator. The Electrical Sub- Contractor shall provide weight information, as well as dimensional information of the generator to the General Contractor, prior to installing the supports . DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 16 B. Operation of any pushbutton on the vestibule panel by the caller sounds an electronic tone signal in the corresponding apartment . The tenant by depressing the "talk" or "listen" button on the room station, shall conduct a two-way conversation with the person originating the call. If satisfied with the callers identity, the tenant may press the button marked "door" which shall electrically operate the front entrance door opener, permitting caller entry to the building. C. The vestibule panel shall be provided with the following material and equipment for the proper operation of the system: 1 . Entrance panel shall be Mirtone type M3000 Series , nd shall contain as many pushbuttons as there are apartments or areas to be called. It shall also contain an alphabetical directory with provisions for all tenant names and numbers to be listed. The panel shall be finished in brushed natural extruded aluminum and shall be flush mounted. The vestibule speaker panel shall be available in aluminum, gold or black color for selection by the Architect . 2 . Amplifiers shall be Mirtone type MA-485 with all solid state circuitry . It shall be a rugged compact unit to mount behind the vestibule pushbutton panel . Power output shall be 2 .5 watts into a 4 ohm load. 3. The door release unit shall be Mirtone type M-9 . 4 . The system wiring shall consist of three common wires to all apartment intercoms from the amplifier and one individual wire from the vestibule pushbutton corresponding to the apartment intercom. Wiring size shall be as required by Manufacturer. 5 . The apartment suite intercom station shall be Mirtone type IS-485 , of molded plastic ivory in color, and equipped with "talk", "listen" and "door" push buttons with self wiping contact. The speaker microphone shall be a minimum of 4 inches . 6 . Equipment distributor shall maintain a complete parts inventory as well as ahving 24 hour emergency service technicians available. 7 . Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all wiring, conduit , etc . , required by Manufacturer . DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 15 C. Wherever outlets of any system are installed in brick, masonry or concrete construction, the Electrical Sub-Contractor shall furnish and install the necessary suitable type boxes and conduit in connection therewith so that the General Contractor may build them in as the work progresses . D. Lighting outlet boxes shall be four (4") octagonal with three-eighths (3/8") inch male fixture stud, minimum depth shall be two and one-half (2 1/1") inch. Concrete rings shall be installed as required. Bar hangers shall be installed for all outlet boxes in wood framed or furred ceilings . E. Raised covers shall be installed wherever required for wall outlets . 2 . 14 TIME CLOCKS A. Furnish and install all time clocks as indicated on the drawings . Time clocks shall be seven (7) day- 24 hour with battery back-up. Time Star Model 101 or approved equal . 2 .15 NAMEPLATES A. Furnish and install engraved nameplates for motor switches , motor starters , time clocks , feeders , etc. , to designate what they control. Nameplates shall be black mica with white core lettering. 2 . 16 JUNCTION BOXES A. Junction and pull boxes shall be installed at all necessary points , wherever required. Minimum dimensions shall not be less than code requirements . B. Boxes shall be constructed of galvanized sheet steel , code gauge, standard junction boxes and pull boxes . 2 .17 APARTMENT INTERCOM SYSTEM A. Furnish and install a. Mirtone Industries apartment house intercommunications communications system. System shall be supplied by an authorized representative of Mir-tone. *+. DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 14 D. Branch circuit wiring, except as noted otherwise, shall have Type THHN or Type R rubber insulation of code thickness for 600 Volts . BX cable, if used, may have Type R rubber. Insulation rated at 600 Volts . E. Fixture wiring shall be THHN for 600 Volt service. Conductors shall be no smaller than No. 14 AWG flexible stranding, 2--conductor cable. F. Wiring for low voltage systems shall have rubber insulation of code thickness for 600 Volt service, and shall be of coded colors . 2 .12 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS A. Furnish and install lighting fixtures , complete with lamps , as indicated on the plans and as described in the fixture schedule. B. The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the receiving, and safe handling of all tom'` lighting fixtures and lamps . He shall furnish all materials , equipment and labor required for the installation of all lighting fixtures and lamps . He shall provide all necessary fixture supports , toggle bolts , screws , etc. All fixtures shall be installed in a neat workmanlike manner. The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall assume all responsibility for all lighting fixtures , accessories and lamps , until the final inspection has been made by the :Engineer. 2 .13 OUTLETS A. At outlets for concealed work provide galvanized pressed steel outlet boxes of standard make. These boxes shall in all cases be suitable for particular condition. In general , outlet boxes shall be at least four (4") inches in diameter. Boxes shall be as manufactured by Raco, Appleton. B. The Electrical Sub-Contractor must see that all outlets are truly centered in panels and spaces provided therefore. DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 13 D. Rigid Steel Conduit , EMT and Flexible Armored Conduit shall be equal. to one of the following manufacturers : Allied Tube and Conduit Corp. , General Electric Co. , Youngstown Sheet and Tube Co . , Republic. E. Connectors for EMT and bushings for rigid steel conduit shall be cast ferrous alloy. F. Conduit and EMT shall be one-half (1/2") inch minimum, unless otherwise noted on the drawings . G. Connections to motors , adjustable or vibrating equipment shall be made with liquid tight flexible metal conduit finished grey . Flexible connections shall be made with No ., 12 green grounding conductor . H. Type NM cable (Romex) shall include separate insulated ground wire „ 2 . 11 WIRES AND CABLES A. All wire and cable work shall be copper or aluminum as indicated herein, 'in strict accordance with the requirements of the Massachusetts Electric Code and its latest revisions , both with respect to materials and workmanship. B. All branch circuit wiring shall be copper. The minimum size wiring for power and lighting branch circuits including apartment wiring shall be No . 14 AWG. Larger sizes of wiring shall be installed, so that the voltage drop between any lighting fixture and its lighting cabinet shall not exceed 1% where connected loads , as shown on the drawings and actual lengths of branch circuit runs as installed require its use. Minimum size for motor control wiring shall 'be No . 14 AWG. C. Feeder wiring shall be Type THW and are shown on the drawings as copper . Sizes No. 4 and larger may be aluminum, if equivalent ampere capacities required for copper are maintained. All terminations of aluminum wire shall be made in accordance with the cable manufacturer' s recommendations . Compression type fittings shall be used at all terminations . Compression tools shall be used for all terminations . Mac-Adapt type of fittings shall be used at all load center connections . DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 12 C. Three-way switches in apartments shall be Leviton 54503-I Slater, P & S . D. All devices shall be as specified or approved equal . E. Range receptacles shall be 50A, 250 Volt, Circle F- 3656 with 3552-D3 range cord, Leviton or approved equal. 2 .08 WIRING DEVICE PLATES A. All switch and receptacle plates shall be ivory plastic. 2 .09 SAFETY SWITCHES AND FUSES A. Furnish and install all safety switches wherever required. Switches shall be General Electric Type TH, Square D, I.T. E. Furnish and install all fuses as required throughout the job. They are to be of the time delay type, Fusetron, Chase Shawmut , General Electric. 2 . 10 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS A. Rigid steel Heavy Wall Conduit shall be of mild steel tube conforming to NEC, ASA, and UL specifications . The tubing shall be thoroughly cleaned, inside and outside, to remove all scale , rust and grease. A coating of zinc shall be applied to the exterior surface by an electro- galvanizing or equivalent process . A silicon base baked-on enamel shall be applied to the interior surface. Couplings and fittings shall be threaded and of the same manufacturer as the conduit . B. Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be of welded steel construction and manufactured of light weight cold rolled steel . Fittings for EMT shall be of the set screw type. Manufacturer shall be in accordance with the Underwriters ' Laboratories and shall bear their label . C. Flexible Armored Conduit shall be constructed of continuous interlocking bands of zinc coated steel and shall be complete with fittings approved for this type of conduit . DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 11 The exterior and interior steel surface of the switchboard shall be paintd with gray enamel over a primer coat . The switchboard shall be provided with adequate lifting means . C. Bussing - The bus shall be tin plated aluminum of sufficient cross section area to limit the temperature rise to 55 degrees . Bus arrangement shall be phase A-B-C left to right , top to bottom, and front to rear as -viewed from the front of the switchboard. Main horizontal busses shall be braced for short circuit stresses up to 50,000 rms amperes-front accessible. All connections shall be tightly bolted. A ground bus shall be furnished to extend the full length of the switchboard as indicated on the plans . D. Internal Components - The internal protective devices shall be front accessible and panel mounted. Main and branch protective devices shall meet the ampere ratings and interrupting capacities , as shown on the plans and be ew Underwriters ' Laboratories labeled where applicable . All load terminals of all rear connected devices shall be bussed out to the rear of the switchboard, so that connections can be made without reaching across a line bus . All terminals shall be suitable for the type conductor used and be of the anti-burn type. All control wires shall be provided with terminal blocks with suitable numbering strips . E. Switchboard shall be designed for 120/208 volts , 3 phase 4 wire . F. Switchboard shall be as manufactured by Square D, Westinghouse, General Electric, I.T.E. G. Minimum depth of switchboard shall be 36". 2 .07 WIRING DEVICES A. Duplex receptacles in apartments shall be Leviton 5014-I, Slater or P & S . Receptacles in Public Areas shall be Leviton 5252 . B. Switches shall be toggle type, Ivory color Leviton 54501-I, Slater , P &S . DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 10 Trims shall be equipped with spring latch and tumbler lock keyed alike. Each individual circuit shall be clearly numbered on the face of the panelboard and a directory for circuit identification provided. G. Panelboard Short Circuit Rating - The short circuit rating of the panelboard shall be established by short circuit testing in accordance with N.E.M.A. standards . Panelboards shall be Type NQOB as manufactured by Square D, Westinghouse, General Electric, I.T. E. 2 .05 APARTMENT LOAD CENTERS A. The apartment load centers shall include a ground bus . Each unit shall be equipped with plug-in type thermal-magnetic molded case, circuit breakers with trip ratings , as shown on the schedule. B. Two-pole breakers shall have a common trip. The load centers shall have sufficient wiring area to allow clear passage of the feeder conductors , so as not to interfere with the branch wiring. All load centers shall have flush trim and shall be as manufactured by Square D, Type Q0, General Electric, I .T.E. , or Westinghouse. 2 .06 DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD A. Furnish and install where indicated on the plans a dead front, metal enclosed, self-supporting switchboard of the required number of sections to form a complete structure incorporating (front connected) protective devices of the type, rating, and number shown on the plans with the necessary interconnections , instrumentation and control wiring. B. Enclosure Construction - The switchboard framework shall consist of pre-punched commercial channels and formed steel , for equipment , cover plates and doors . All vertical sections shall be of the depth necessary to accommodate and connect the internal components . The sides , rear and top shall be covered with removable code gauge steel plates . Front plates shall be sectionalized and removable. Ventilation openings shall be provided where required. Adequate conduit space shall be provided to meet Massachusetts Electric Code requirements . DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 9 B. The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall furnish and install the meter breaker centers , as called for on the drawings . The meter breaker centers shall be prefabricated assembly complete with all meter sockets , bussing, wiring, connectors and devices . The entire installation shall be in accordance with Massachusetts Electric Co. ' s standards . C. The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall furnish and install all individual meter sockets and associated equipment where so indicated. 2 .04 PANELBOARDS (HOUSE PANELS) A. Furnish and install panelboards , as shown on the plans and on the panelboard schedule. Panelboards shall be dead front equipped with thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers of frame, trip ratings ,and interrupting capacities , as shown on the panelboard schedule. B. Panelboards shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest N.E.M.A. standards and shall be listed by Underwriters ' Laboratories , Inc. C. Main Bus Assembly - Panelboard main bus and main lugs shall have current ratings , as shown on the panelboard schedule. Current density shall be in accordance with Underwriters ' Laboratories requirements . Bus bars for three (3) phase panelboards shall be sequence phased. Wiring lugs shall be suitable for the type conductor specified. D. Circuit Breakers - Bolt-on circuit breakers shall be quick-make and quick-break and be trip free on overload or short circuit . E. Circuit Breakers - Multi-pole breakers shall be common trip. The breakers shall be interchangeable in any combination of poles . Wiring terminals shall be suitable for the type conductor specified. Connections to the bus shall be bolt-on. F. Cabinets and Trim - The gauge of the steel box enclosing the panelboard assembly shall be as specified by Underwriters ' Laboratories Standards . End walls shall be removable. The size of wirin gutters shall be in accordance with Underwriters standards . Trims shall be code gauge steel with primer and durable AMA 61 gray enamel finish. DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 8 7 . Lighting fixtures . 8 . Apartment intercom system. 9 . Outlets and devices . 10. Time clocks . 11 . Any other drawings required or requested by the Engineer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 .01 MATERIALS A. Drawings and specifications are intended to supplement and explain each other. Materials not specifically mentioned in the specifications shall be as indicated on the drawings . Where conflicts occur between the drawings and/or specifications , or within either document itself , the item of arrangement of better quality, greater quantity of higher cost shall be included in the Sub- Contractor' s bid. Where no specific kind of quality of material is given, a first-class standard article, as approved in writing by the Architect , shall be furnished. B. All materials , equipment and fixtures shall be new, without imperfections and shall be furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail . Wherever possible, all trim, accessories and parts shall be of the same manufacturer as the related equipment and fixtures . 2 .02 SERVICE DISTRIBUTION CENTER A. Furnish and install the service distribution centers as indicated complete with the service entrance equipment , disconnects , meter sockets , wire troughs , fittings , conduit , wire and connectors . 2 .03 METERING A. The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall furnish and install all materials required and not furnished by Massachusetts Electric Co . for the meter installations . ROW DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE I. The General Contractor and all sub-contractors , individually , shall furnish all extension cords , lamps , sockets , motors and accessories required for their work. J. The General Contractor and all sub-contractors shall reimburse the Electrical Sub-Contractor for the following: 1 . Any temporary wiring of a special nature, other than that specified above, required for their work. 2 . Any temporary wiring of construction offices and buildings used by them, other than the office of the General Contractor and of the Project Representative. K. All temporary wiring, service equipment , and accessories shall be removed by the Electrical Subcontractor when directed by the General Contractor. L All lamps installed in permanent lighting fixtures and used as temporary lights during the construction period shall be removed and replaced shortly before the time of completion by the set of lamps required to be furnished and installed under contract . 1 . 12 PROTECTION A. The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall take proper precautions to protect his work and materials from loss or damage, until the complete installation is turned over to the Owner . Any loss or injury shall be made good without expense to the Owner . 1 . 13 SHOP DRAWINGS A. The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall submit for approval to the Engineer , before starting the installation, five (5) prints each of the following equipment. He shall also provide wiring diagrams as required (no standard wiring diagrams will be accepted) . 1 . Distribution switchboard. 2 . Safety switches . 3 . Panelboards and load. centers . 4 . Meter centers . 5 . Fire alarm systems . 6 . Emergency generator. DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 6 D. Provide a temporary service of sufficient size from Massachusetts Electric Co . to the building, as required to provide electric light and power while the building is under construction and until the permanent feeders have been installed and tested . Install and maintain a feeder or feeders of sufficient capacity for the requirements of each floor. E. The temporary electric service shall be based on the following: 1 . Rooms or spaces under 250 square feet - one 100 Watt lamp. 2 . Rooms or spaces over 250 square feet and under 500 square feet-two 100 Watt lamps . 3. Rooms or spaces over 500 square feet - one 200 Watt lamp per every 1 ,000 square feet or fraction thereof . 4 . Sufficient wiring, outlets and lamps shall be installed to insure proper lighting in stairwells , corridors and passage areas . 5 . Outlets shall be located at convenient points , so that extension cords of not over 50 feet in length will reach all work :requiring light or power. 6 . Temporary electric service shall be provided for the offices of the General Contractor and of the Project Representative, until such time as the removal of these offices is ordered by the Contractor. F. All necessary transformers , meters , cables , panelboards , switches and accessories required by the temporary light and power installation shall be provided by the Electrical Sub-Contractor. G. The General Contractor shall pay the costs of all energy consumed by himself and by all the sub- contractors , until the time of completion. H. The General Contractor shall furnish for installation by the Electrical Sub-Contractor all lamps , both initial and replacement, used for the temporary ,, lighting system. DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 5 1 . 10 MATERIALS AND SCHEDULES A. As soon as practicable and within thirty (30) days after date of award of contract and before any materials , fixtures or equipment are purchased, the Electrical Sub-Contractor shall submit in writing to the Engineer for approval, a complete list in triplicate, of materials , fixtures , and equipment to be incorporated in the work and as covered by the Specifications . The list shall include catalog numbers , cuts , diagrams, drawings , and other descriptive data as may be required by the Engineer . B. Approval of materials will be based on manufacturer' s published ratings . Any materials , fixtures , or equipment listed which are not in accordance with the specified requirements will be rejected. C. If prior to the expiration of the above specified period, or any authorized extension thereof , the Engineer fails to receive a list of materials , 00** fixtures and equipment as specified above the Engineer will select a complete line of materials , fixtures and equipment. This selection shall be final and binding and all items shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Sub-Contractor without change in contract price and time of completion . 1 . 11 TEMPORARY ELECTRIC SERVICES A. The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall furnish, install and pay for all labor and equipment required for the temporary electric service. B. The Electric Sub-Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with Massachusetts Electric Co . as to where the temporary electrical service can be obtained. C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall secure and pay for all required permits , certificates , back charges for work performed by others , and other expenses incidental to the installation of the temporary electric service. All work shall comply with the latest requirements of O. S .H.A. DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 4 1 .07 TESTS A. The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall furnish all equipment, personnel, and power for the testing of all work and equipment as directed by the Engineer or authorities having jurisdiction. B. The entire installation shall be tested for shorts , grounds , and open circuits . All defects shall be corrected before acceptance of the work. All work shall be demonstrated to be in proper operating condition to the complete satisfaction of the Architect and Owner. The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall instruct the Owner' s representative in the care and operation of all apparatus and equipment forming the installation. 1 .08 PERMITS AND CODES A. The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall obtain all permits , pay all fees , gave all proper authorities all requisite notices , and comply with all rules and regulations affecting his work. B. All conduit and electrical equipment shall be installed and grounded in accordance with the latest rules and regulations of the Massachusetts Electric Code, the requirements of the Massachusetts Electric Co . and the Town of Northampton Electrical Department. 1 .09 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS A. Reference to manufacturer' s catalog numbers , types , etc. , either in the specifications or on the drawings , are not intended to be restrictive, but they are intended to describe the type and quality required . Request for approval for substitution shall be accompanied by sufficient data, specifications and drawings to indicate compliance with the specified requirements . B. The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall assume the cost and the entire responsiblity for any changes which he may propose in the work as shown on the Contract Drawings which may be occasioned by approval of material or equipment other than that specified. DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 3 D. Telephone Company 1 . All telephone wiring from street lines . 2. All telephone outlets and all costs for work beyond SNI boxes shall be responsibility of Electrical Sub-Contractor. 1 .04 COOPERATION A. The work shall be carried on under the usual conditions affecting construction of the type involved and in conjunction with other operations at the site. The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall cooperate with the Architect and all contractors working on the site. He shall coordinate his work with theirs and shall proceed in such a manner as not to delay or hinder in any way the progress of the work. In case of dispute, the Architect shall render a decision which shall be final . B. The Electrical Sub-Contractor shall secure instructions from General Contractor as to space for storing materials and tools , and shall keep and remove all debris , unused materials , and equipment from the premises as promptly as possible. 1 .05 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. Materials and workmanship shall be of their respective kinds and in full accordance with the most modern construction methods . Electrical materials and equipment for which there are Underwriters ` Laboratories standard requirements , listing or labels shall conform to these requirements and be so labeled. 1 .06 GUARANTEE A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall guarantee his work for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. If any defects in materials or workmanship occur within this period, they shall be corrected by the Electrical Sub-Contractor at no cost to the Owner. DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 2 C. It is the intent of the specifications and accompanying drawings that the systems shall be furnished and installed complete. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install all conduit , wire, boxes , equipment , devices and materials usually furnished in connection with such work, whether specifically mentioned or not . 1 .03 RELATED WORK A. The following work in conjunction with the work done under this Division of the Specification shall be done under other Divisions of the Specifications . This work shall be done at no expense to the Electrical Sub-Contractor, except as indicated for the electric service. B. General Contractor 1 . Excavation and backfilling for all electric, fire alarm, telephone and site lighting 'low underground conduit . Furnish and install transformer mat . 2 . Cost for energy consumed by all trades including cost of lamp replacements for all temporary light and power. 3 . Caulking and patching of all holes for conduit sleeves . 4 . Installation of front entrance electric door openers . 5 . Installation of concrete bases for post lights . Concrete encasement for service conduit. 6 . Backboards for telephone equipment and meter centers . 7 . All finish painting. C. Massachusetts Electric 1 . Furnish and install 'transformer. 2 . Electrical Sub-Contractor to pay backcharges . 3. Furnish and install meters . DIVISION 16 HAMPTON COURT SECTION 16 ELECTRICAL PAGE 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The drawings , General and supplementary Conditions of the contract and Division 1 General Requirements apply to the work of this section 1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work to be performed under this Section includes the furnishing of all labor, material , and equipment to complete the Electrical work as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. B. The principle items of work are as follows : 1 . Primary service to transformer. 2 . Service from transformer to main distribution switchboard. 3. Main distribution switchboard, distribution � centers . ""', 4. Meter centers , panelboards , load centers . 5 . Feeders to panels and load centers. 6 . Conduit work. 7 . Wire and cable work. 8 . Safety switches and fuses . 9. Branch circuit wiring to all outlets and devices . 10. Outlets and devices . 11 . Lighting fixtures and lamps . 12 . Exterior lighting systems . 13 . Emergency generator. 14 . Telephone conduit and sleeve systems where required, wiring; from interface to outlets . 15 . Apartment intercom system. 16 . Fire alarm systems. 17 . Elevator wiring„ 18 . Wiring for Heating, Air Conditioning, Ventilating and other Plumbing Systems . 19 . Wiring for disposers , dishwashers , ranges , laundry equipment and range hoods . 20. Wiring for all other mechanical equipment not herein listed. 23. Temporary light and power. 24 . Time clocks . 25 . Wiring for exhaust fans . 26 . Emergency call system. DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL PART 3 ExECUTION 3 .1 MATERIALS A. Unless specifically noted or indicated otherwise all equipment and materials specified in this section or indicated on the drawings shall be installed under this contract, whether or not specifically itemized herein. This part of the specification covers particular installation methods and requirements peculiar to certain items and classes of material and equipment. 3 .2 STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER SYSTEM A. The system shall be constructed using materials as speci- fied and/or indicated on Drawings FP-1 thru FP-6. B. Piping shall be run parallel with the lines of the building; well supported from the structure; free from pockets or sag; and pitched to drain points . 3 .3 CUTTING AND PATCHING INFORMATION A. All cutting and patching of building structure shall be done and provided for by the General Contractor. B. This Sub-Contractor shall specifically inform the General Contractor and the various trades concerned of the size and loca- tion of all chases, holes and supports, etc . , in building structure which his work may require, and this Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the construction and location of same. C. This Sub-Contractor shall not cut away any steel, concrete, brickwork, floor construction or arches, or dig into any walls, or in any case allow the same to be done without the full knowledge and consent of the Architect, and this Sub-Contractor will be held responsible for any damage resulting from any such work. D. In case the work of two (2) trades shall interfere in such a manner as to necessitate a deviation from the design, work shall not be altered until the Architect has been notified and has rendered a decision as to the manner in which the difficulty shall be overcome. 3 .4 TESTING A. At completion of work the system shall be subject to a hydrostatic test of 250 p.s .i. Tests shall be in accordance with the requirements of Building Code, the National Board of Fire Underwriters ' and local Fire Department. 15500-10 FIRE PROTECTION B. Detectors shall be weatherproof dust tight construction and shall provide a one-half (1/2") inch conduit entrance and shall be finished in red baked enamel . Vane type water flow detec- tors shall be Underwriters ' Laboratories listed and F.M. approved. 2 .10 SUPERVISORY SWITCHES A. Furnish and install supervisory tamper switch on all valves on inlet side of flow switches and all valves . Switch shall be Notifier Series NGV for O.S .&Y . valves. Underwriters ' Labora- tories listed and Factory Mutual approved. 15500-9 FIRE PROTECTION 2 .4 SPRINKLER CABINET A. Provide enameled steel cabinet containing twelve (12) extra sprinkler heads of each type, including heads of each temperature rating used, and sprinkler head wrench. Locate in Fire Pump Room. 2 .5 WATER MOTOR GONG A. Gong shall be adjustable type Viking Model #D2, Grinnel, Automatic. Gong shall have aluminum hood and mounting bracket. 2 .6 ELECTRIC ALARM BELL A. Bell shall be eight (8" ) inches in diameter, 12 Volt, Weatherproof, Viking Model BH-1003-8; with transformer; Grinnel, or Automatic. 2 .7 FIRE DEPARTMENT VALVE A. Valves on fire lines, shall be the O.S .&Y. type. Two and one-half (2' 11 ) inch fire department valves shall be U.L. and F .M. approved angle valves with rough brass bodies and satin trim with 2-1/2" inlet and 2-1/2" outlet with 2-1/2 x 1-1/2" reducer with threads of type suitable for local fire department. Include 1-1/2" cap and chain. 2 .8 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION A. Siamese connections shall be Underwriters ' approved type and each connection shall be provided with check valve, automatic drip valve, back connection. Connections shall be equipped with threads to match the local fire department standard hose coupling. Indirect: piping shall run to floor drain or out thru exterior wall with chrome plated elbow. 2 .9 WATER FLOW INDICATOR A. Furnish and install Vane type water flow detector Notifier Series (WFD) T or approved equal. . Detector switch mechanisms shall incorporate an instantly recycling pneumatic retard element with an adjustable range of 0 to 70 seconds. B. Switches shall have a minimum rated capacity .25 amps. , 24 Volt D.C. and shall be actuated by a polyethylene Vane extending into the water way of the piping. OP* 15500-8 FIRE PROTECTION K. Grooved couplings and mechanical fittings shall be malleable iron, 500 P .S.I . working pressure, in accordance with A.S.T.M. A 47 . Couplings gasket material shall be butyl rubber. Grooved couplings and mechanical fittings shall be tested and listed by U.L. and/or F.M. L. All indirect waste piping shall be 40 Schedule P.V.C. M. Unions shall be three hundred pound malleable iron ground joint, screwed, with brass to iron seat. N. Valves shall be three hundred lb. test and outside screw and yoke type. O. Hangers and Supports. 1 . Properly support piping inside building by approved type hangers and supports , to secured piping in place, to maintain required pitch of lines , to prevent vibra- tion, and arranged to provide for expansion and contraction. Hangers and supports ; ample size and weight to carry pipe and its contents . 2. Support horizontal piping at least every ten (10 ' ) feet. Branches : Separate supports low and no branch thirty (30") inches or longer without support. 2. 2 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS A. Where pipes pass through masonry walls, floor or ceilings, steel pipe sleeves , two (2) sizes larger than the pipe passing through shall be used. Sleeves shall be furnished and set in position by this Contractor. B. Chrome plated escuteheons shall be installed around all exposed pipe passing through a finished floor, wall or ceiling . C. Space between pipe and sleeves to be filled with fiber- glass or rockwool bats and sealed off with chrome plated escut- cheon plates in all occupied areas . 2. 3 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Heads shall be pendant type Viking Model "C" brass Grinnell, or Automatic. 15500-7 FIRE PROTECTION PART 2 PRODUCTS & MATERIALS 2 .1 MATERIALS A. Pipe shall be new, designed for 175 P .S .I . working pressure, conforming to A.S .T.M. specifications, manufactured in the United States, and have the manufacturer ' s name or brand along with the applicable A.S .T.M. standard marked on each length of pipe. B. Pipe shall be steel„ Schedule 10, black and in accordance with specification A.S .T.M. A 135. C. Schedule 10 black steel A.S .T.M. A 135 sprinkler pipe shall be joined by welded joints in accordance with specifications ANSI B 31 .10, ANSI B 31 .1 . Oa and ANSI B 31 .1 .Ob, and by UL and FM approved mechanical couplings. Couplings may be of the rolled groove type . Grooves for the rolled groove type shall be rolled only (cut grooving will not be allowed) and they shall be dimensional- ly compatible with the coupling . Pipe end preparation for the mechanical locking type couplings will be in accordance with the manufacturer ' s recommendations . D. All black steel pipe must be preoxidized with a suitable protective coating. Sprinkler piping that is exposed to the weather, or used in a corrosive atmosphere (where noted on drawings) , shall be galvanized. E. All A.S .T.M. A 135 sprinkler pipe must be tested with a non-destructive electric test for continuous and uninterrupted inspection of the welded seam. F. All A.S .T.M. A 135 sprinkler pipe must be tested to a critical weld, both cone and flatten test. G. All A.S .T.M. A 53 and A.S .T.M. A 120 sprinkler pipe must be hydrostatic tested at the mill per the A.S.T.M. standard. H. Screwed fittings shall be cast iron, 175 lb. class, black, and in accordance with A.N.S .I . B 16 . 4 or malleable iron, 150 lb. class, black, and in accordance with A.N.S .I . B 16. 3 . I . Flanged fittings shall be cast iron, short body, Class 125, black, and in accordance with A.N.S .I . B 16.1 . Gaskets shall be full face of 1/8" minimum thickness red sheet rubber. Flange bolts shall be hexagon head machine bolts with heavy semi-finished hexagon head nuts, cadmium plated, having dimensions in accordance with A.N.S .I . B 18. 2 . J. Weld fittings shall. be steel , standard weights, black, and in accordance with A.N.S .I . B 16 . 9, A.N.S .I . B 16. 25, A.S .T.M. A 234 , A.N.S.I . B 16. 5, or A.N.S .I . B 16 .11 . ookk 15500-6 FIRE PROTECTION 1 .11 GUARANTEE A. Before the work is finally accepted this Sub-Contractor shall give the Owner a written guarantee to make good to the satisfaction bf the Owner, any defect in materials or workmanship which shall-.become apparent during the period of one (1) year from the completion and acceptance by the Owner. 15500-5 FIRE PROTECTION C. This Sub-Contractor shall file required notices and plans and shall secure and pay for all necessary permits for his work. 1 .7 DAMAGE TO OTHER WORK A. This Sub-Contractor shall be held responsible for and shall pay for all damage to other work caused by his work or workmen. Repairing of such damage shall be done by the General Contractor or Contractors who installed the work, and as directed by the Architect. 1.8 RECORD DRAWINGS A. This Sub-Contractor shall maintain at the site a set of drawings on which shall be accurately shown the actual installation of all work under Division, indicated thereon any variations from the contract drawings , including changes in sizes , location and dimensions . B. Location of valves , etc. on the site shall be noted on drawings with distances from buildings . For this purpose the Owner will furnish two (2) sets of black-or-blue-on-white drawings . At the conclusion of the work this Sub-Contractor shall deliver to the General Contractor a complete set of reproducible record drawings in reproductions on mylar showing the entire work as actually installed, and two (2) sets of black-or-blue-line-on-white prints thereof. These shall be submitted to the Architect who, after checking them shall submit them to the Owner. 1.9 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A . At the completion of the work, this Sub-Contractor shall instruct such persons as the Architect may designate regarding the care and use of the systems specified under "Fire Protection" and all apparatus pertaining thereto. 1.10 CLEAN UP A. This Sub-Contractor shall clear away all debris , surplus materials and so forth, resulting from his work or operations , leaving the job and equipment furnished under this Section in a clean, first-class condition. All debris shall be removed and the building left broom clean. ,,, 15500-4 FIRE PROTECTION 2. Sprinkler heads and accessories . B. All drawings shall be submitted at one time. C. Shop drawings shall be coordinated with mechanical layouts (i.e. , Plumbing, Electrical, Heating) and the building construction drawings for review. D. Submit shop drawings for approval by the Engineer prior to submission to Insurance Company for approval. E. Upon final approval of shop drawings, six (6) complete sets bearing stamp of Underwriters ' and local building and/or fire department approval, shall be submitted to the Architect-Engineer. 1 .5 MANUFACTURERS NAMES A. In addition to the above shop drawings he shall submit for approval, at the same time as the drawings seven (7) copies of a list of the manufacturer ' s names for the following equipment: ew 1. Pipe and fittings . 2 . Valves . 3 . . Hangers . B. This Sub-Contractor shall assume the cost of the entire responsibility for any changes in the work which may be occasioned by the approval of materials and/or equipment other than those specified. 1.6 CODES , ORDINANCES AND PERMITS A. The Fire Protection work shall be performed in harmony with the other work in the building and at such times as not to interfere with or hold back the other trades in an unwarranted manner. B. The Fire Protection work shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of N.F.P.A. Pamphlet 13 and 14, and local building and/or fire departments. 3.5500-3 FIRE PROTECTION 1 .3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. The following work in conjunction with the work done under this Division of the specification shall be done under other Divisions of the specifications . This work shall be done at no expense to this Contractor . 1. Electric wiring is included -under the work of Division 16, Electrical. 2 . Cutting and patching by General Contractor, except as otherwise specified. 3 . Painting is included under the work of Division 9. 4. Excavation and backfill is included under the work of Division 2 . 5 . Concrete thrust blocks is included under the work of Division 3 . 6 . Access panels are included under the work of Division 9 . 7 . Temporary facilities and cost for energy consumed by all trades are -included under Division 1. 8. Mechanical, Plumbing and .Heating, Ventilating & Air Conditioning included under Division 15 in their respective Sections . 9. Trash chute included under Division 11. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS A. This Sub-Contractor shall submit to the Architect within thirty (30) days of the award of the contract, six (6) copies of shop drawings and pertinent data -for -the following equipment, showing sizes, capacities, grade, motor horsepower, name of manu- facturer, etc. 1. Supervisoryswitches and water flow indicators . :5500-2 FIRE PROTECTION Hampton Court SECTION 15500 FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 REFERENCES A. The GENERAL DOCUMENTS , as listed on the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of Division 1, GENERAL REQUIRE- MENTS , shall be included in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this trade . 1 . 2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work to be performed under this Section includes the furnishing of all labor, material and equipment to complete the Fire Protection work as shown on Drawing FP-1 thru FP-6 and as herein specified. B. The principle items of work are as follows : 1 . Complete Fire Protection System shall consist of fire service, standpipes, sprinkler and accessories which shall be left in first class operating condition. a 2. Water flow indicators and supervisory switches . 3 . Double check assembly. 4 . Testing. 5. Sprinkler head and test connection. 6. Trash chute sprinklers . 7. Shop drawings. 8 . Siamese. 15500-1 FIRE PROTECTION The Ventilating Contractor shall supply the Architect with four (4) copies of table showing measured and specified air quantities of each exhaust register . Equipment necessary to conduct above tests shall be furnished by the Ventilating Contractor. "` SECTION 15200 - H.V.A.C. 15200 - 26 During this test period, this Contractor shall take temperature readings of all systems , also , make necessary adjustments to automatic temperature controls to insure correct room tempera- ture and reasonably quiet and efficient operation. Fuel, water and electricity for all tests will be furnished by the General Contractor, equipment necessary to conduct above tests shall be provided by this Contractor . Tests - General : All piping shall be installed drip tight and arranged for proper drainage and air elimination. If upon testing , leaks develop or the installation fails to function properly, this Contractor shall make all necessary corrections and new tests shall be made and repeated, until all defects have been remedied. Corrections necessary for the proper functioning of the installation shall be made to the satisfaction of the Architect-Engineer before final acceptance of the work . This Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials , instruments, etc . , necessary for all tests specified. Before closing in, before covering is applied and before connections are made to equipment, all supply and return piping shall be hydrostatically tested to a pressure of not less than seventy-five (75) pounds gauge pressure for a period of not less than four (4) hours without loss of pressure. If any leaks develop, necessary repair: shall be made subject to an eight (8) hour working test. The stuffing boxes on all valves shall be repacked with new packing and shall be made tight. Testing and Balancing - Duct Work: . The Heating & Ventilating Contractor shall run a test under normal operating conditions during which test all necessary adjustments and changes required for operation shall be made . This test shall be continued, until the system operates without frequent adjustment. During this test period the Heating & Ventilating Contractor shall take readings of air flow on all systems, and make necessary adjustments to deflectors and dampers to insure correct air flows and reasonably quiet and efficient air flows . SECTION 15200 - H.V.A.C. 15200 - 27 If it is questionable that insufficient space or conflict with the work of other Sub-Contractors, or Architectural and Structural obstructions will result in an arrangement which will prevent proper access , operation or maintenance of the indicated equipment, the Heating & Ventilating Contractor shall immediately notify the Architect and not proceed with this part of the contract work until definite instructions have been given to him by the Architect. It shall be the responsibility of the Heating & Ventilating Contractor to coordinate the delivery of Mechanical equipment' to the project prior to the time installation of• equipment will be required, but he also shall make sure such equipment is not delivered too far in advance of such required instal- lation, to assure that possible damage and deterioration of such equipment will not occur. Such equipment stored for an excessively long period of time (as determined in the opinion of the Architect on the project site prior to installation may be subject to rejection by the Architect. ) CUTTING, FITTING & PATCHING: It shall be the duty of the Heating & Ventilating Contractor to consult with and to give to the General Contractor exact locations and sizes of all openings and full information as to cutting necessary for the installation of his work, and it shall be the duty of the General Contractor to provide the same, and should he, after having been fully advised by the Heating & Ventilating Contractor, fail to arrange properly for this work, this Contractor shall promptly notify Architect in writing of such failure . It shall be the duty of the Heating & Ventilating Contractor to securely set all sleeves in connection with this work, in forms before the concrete foundations, walls, slabs, partitions and other building construction is complete. In the event of any disagreement between the Heating & Ventilating Contractor and the General Contractor over the foregoing the decision of the Architect shall be final . TESTING AND BALANCING: The Heating & Ventilating Contractor shall run a test under normal operation conditions,during which test all necessary adjustments and changes required for proper operation shall be made . This test shall be continued until the systems operate without frequent adjustment. SECTION 15200 - H.V.A.C. 15200 - 26 PART 3 - EXECUTION GENERAL: Unless specifically noted or indicated otherwise all equipment and materials specified in SECTION 15200 or indicated on the drawings shall be installed under this Contract, whether or not specifically itemized herein. This part of the specifica- tion covers particular installation methods and requirements peculiar to certain items and classes of material and equip- ment. COOPERATION AND WORK PROGRESS : . The Heating & Ventilating work shall be carried on under the usual construction conditions, in conjunction with all other work at the site . The Heating & Ventilating Contractor shall cooperate with the Architect and all Contractors and equipment suppliers working on the site , coordinate the work and proceed in a manner so as not to delay the progress of the project. The Heating & Ventilating Contractor shall coordinate his work with the progress of the building and other trades so that he shall complete his work as soon as conditions permit and so that interruptions of building functions incurred due to lack of or improper coordination with other trades or the Architect by the Heating & Ventilating Contractor shall be assumed by the Heating & Ventilating Contractor without any additional cost to the Owner. Waste material shall be removed promptly from the premises . All material and equipment stored on the premises shall be kept in a neat and orderly fashion. Material or equipment shall not be stored where exposed to the weather. The Heating & Ventilating Contractor shall be responsible for the security, safekeeping, and damages, including acts of vandalism, to all material and equipment stored at the job. The Heating & Ventilating Contractor shall erect and maintain at all times necessary safeguards for the protection of life and property of the workmen, staff and the public. The Heating & Ventilating Contractor has a responsibility to coordinate the exact mounting arrangement and location of equipment indicated on the drawings to allow for proper space requirements for equipment access, operation and maintenance. Particular attention shall be given in the field to such group installations. SECTION 15200 - H .V.A.C. 15200 - 25 Water-cooled condensers shall be mechanically cleanable shell- and-tube type with integral-finned copper tubes, and shall have removable heads . Construction shall comply with applicable A.S .M.E. Code . Each condenser shall be constructed to provide positive subcooling of the liquid refrigerant. A pressure relief valve, purge cock and liquid shutoff valve shall be provided on each condenser. unit shall have a control box which contains : high and low- pressure cutout switches for each refrigerant circuit, a manual reset low water temperature cutout switch, a multiple-step chilled water temperature controller t:o ensure staggered starting of the compressors and to provide 8 steps of capacity control . Mounted on each condenserless unit as standard equipment shall be an oil-pressure safety switch for each circuit. The control panel shall have mounted on it individual compressor indicator lights, a start-stop button, control power fuse or circuit breaker, a manual switch to change starting sequence of compressors from one refrigerant circuit to the other demand limit switch. unit shall operate on 208 Volt, 3 Phase, 60 Hz power. Control power shall be 115 V. ROW SECTION 15200 - H.V.A.C. 15200 - 24 PACKAGE CHILLER: Furnish and install one Carrier factory-assembled 30H water- cooled-evaporative-cooled multiple hermetic compressor liquid chilling package with a capacity of 160 tons using Refrigerant 22 . Unit shall cool 348 G.P.M. of water from 55°F. to 45°F. with 438 G6P.M. of condenser water entering at 85 0F. or when operatin at 95 F. saturated discharge temperature. Construction and ratings shall be in accordance with A.R.I . Standard 590-76, and shall comply with ANSI B9 .1. Safety Code, National Electrical Code, and applicable A.S .M.E. Code U.L. and C.S .A. listings . Compressors shall be reciprocating serviceable hermetic-type, and shall have an automatically reversible oil pump and an operating oil charge. Compressors shall be equipped with suction and discharge shutoff valves , and shall be mounted on spring vibration isolators . Each compressor motor shall be cooled by suction gas passing around the motor windings and shall be thermally protected. Each compressor shall be equipped with an insert-type crankcase heater to control oil dilution during shut- down. Compressor Capacity Control shall be by electrically-actuated suction cutoff type cylinder unloaders . Circuit breakers shall be factory installed for each compressor. They shall be calibrated manual reset and ambient insensitive. They shall open all 3 phases should an overload occur on any phase . Cooler shall be shell-and-tube type, with removable heads; it shall have 2 independent direct-expansion refrigerant circuits on multiple compressor units and one refrigerant circuit on single- compressor units . Seamless copper tubes shall be rolled into the tube sheets. Shell shall be covered with a 3/4-in. layer of closed- cell foam plastic, vapor barrier insulation (K = 0. 28) . Each refrigerant circuit shall include : hot gas muffler, combina- tion moisture indicator and eight glass , refrigerant filter drier (replaceable) liquid line solenoid valve maximum operating pressure thermal expansion valve, charging valve. All suction lines shall be insulated with close-fitting cellular insulation. Condenserless unit shall have discharge line check valves furnished for installations using remote condensers . SECTION 15200 - H.V.A.C. 15200 - 23 Controls on each module shall be suitable for firing each module individually. Step firing of each module shall be accomplished by firing individual boilers without reducing their thermal efficiency. Control system may be designed and provided for heating plant by the manufacturer and included in system design with factory wiring of controller into a designated control panel. Boiler control for heating shall be Level I Hydrotherm. Boiler water shall be constant, set at 160°F . leaving water temperature. After completion of installation, the heating plant shall be test started in the presence of representative of the boiler manufacturer. Installed shall supply one (1) year free service after acceptance of boiler installation. SMOKE BREECHING: Furnish and install #24 gauge galvanized iron smoke pipe of size as shown on drawings . Provide steel thimble where flue enters chimney. OIL TANK & PIPING (EMERGENCY GENERATOR) : ` Tank shall be of steel built in accordance with local and Underwriters ' Laboratories requirements , and shall bear Underwriters ' Laboratories label . Size of tank, location and methods of support shall be as indicated on the drawings . Furnish and install a complete system of oil piping between the fuel oil storage tank, and emergency generator. For piping details see drawings . SECTION 15200 - H.V.A.C. 15200 - 22 BOILER-BURNER UNITS: Furnish and install where indicated on the plans , cast iron gas-fired modular hot water heating plant complete with all accessories in accordance with manufacturer 's instructions and in compliance with all rules and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. The boiler capacities shall be as scheduled on drawings . Each boiler module shall be factory-assembled with one-piece fibre ceramic combustion chamber base absorption unit, hi-limit aquastat and wiring. Manufacturer shall provide one burner and one-double swing barometric draft control per module. Each battery of modules shall be equipped with one or more A.S .M.E . 75# pressure relief valves with a capacity corresponding to the battery gross output, one or more tempera- ture pressure indicators, a manual reset hi-limit and a low water cutoff approved by the manufacturer . Insulated steel jackets shall be provided by the manufacturer for assembly into one (1) complete extended jacket for each battery of modules . Headers as supplied by the manufacturer shall be included with each battery of modules . The cast iron absorption unit for each module shall be constructed for 100 p. s .i . working pressure in accordance with Section IV of the A.S .M.E. Code for Low Pressure Boilers . Construction features shall include horizontal section design to provide zig-zag water flow with maximum heat transfer from deep-ribbed iron surfaces with cast iron push nipples . Cope seal shall be employed between sections to provide a permanent gas light seal between sections . Sections shall be held together with draw rods . Each section shall be hydrostatically tested at 250 p.s .i . Complete assembly shall be hydrostatically tested at 150 p.s .i . and air tested. Flue collector shall be of same quality cast iron as asborption unit. Absorption unit shall be held to an aluminized-steel dry-base assembly by steel clips and bolts . Fibre rope seal shall be provided between absorpotion unit and base assembly. The burner for each module shall be a powered natural gas burner with electric ignition and safety controls to lock out burner on safely in the event of flame failure. Burner shall incorporate air flow switch to prevent fuel from entering combustion chamber upon loss of combustion air. The burner for each module shall be equipped with a gas train having not greater than 10" W.C. pressure drop when firing at rated capacity, and gas train shall be designed for 4 . 5" W.C. minimum gas service pressure. SECTION 15200 - H.V.A.C. 15200 - 21 Radiator vents shall be suitable for 125 p. s .i .g. working pressure. Air compression tanks shall be of size indicated on the drawings and shall be constructed in accordance with the A.S .M.E. Code and 125# construction. Tank shall be equipped with a tank drainer containing hose connection similar to "Bell & Gossett" Drain-O-Tank valve, Taco, or Woods . AIR HANDLING UNIT AC-1 & AC-2 Furnish and install Horizontal Air Handling Unit as shown on Drawing HVAC-1 and as scheduled on Drawing No. HVAC-5. APARTMENT VERTICAL FAN COIL UNITS : Furnish and install units where shown on plan . Units shall be Whalen, Trane or McQuay. Cabinet shall be 22 gauge galvanized steel , combined with fan board, top and internal baffles to make a rigid unit. All internal assemblies shall be welded, treated to prevent corrosion and acoustically and thermally insulated with vapor proof insulation. Riser-Heat Exchanger shall be seamless copper tubes mechanically expanded into . 010" thick aluminum fins that have a stamped pattern for strength and rigidity. Fan shall be low speed centrifugal type . Fan and motor shall be removable as a unit through return air grille. Motor shall be permanent split capacitor, two (2) speed with all bronze, oil impregnated bearings and built-in thermal over-load protection. Motors shall be 120/60/1 , two speed 1 , 050/850 R.P .M. Filter shall be 13-2" thick throwaway type. Furnish two (2) sets of filters for each unit. Supply and return air grilles shall be aluminum, adjust- able, double deflection bar supply air register. Complete with volume damper. Return air grille shall be fixed bar type. Thermostat shall be heavy duty, line voltage thermostat, and integral fan speed switch, Barber-Colman or equal . Furnish six (6) spare. motors of each size. Furnish one (1) spare filter for each fan coil unit. SECTION 15200 - H.V.A.C. 15200 - 20 AUTOMATIC DAMPERS : All automatic dampers furnished under the paragraph of these specificationsentitled "TEMPERATURE CONTROLS" shall be installed by this Contractor. A full size hinged access door shall be installed at each automatic damper. FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS : Flexible connections shall be installed at the inlet and discharge of each fan and wherever else indicated on the drawings . The connection shall be neoprene covered, canvas tape or approved equal . The flexible connections shall be tightly secured to the fan inlet and discharge with metal bands . A minimum four (4" ) inch space shall be allowed between the duct and fan connec- tions and the flexible connection shall not be stretched tight. HOT WATER HEATING SPECIALTIES : Balancing cocks for mains shall be square head plug cocks with plugs ground into cock bodies . Cocks two (2" ) inches and smaller shall be brass screwed, two and one-half (22" ) inches and larger shall be all iron and flanged. Balancing valves for risers shall be ball type, brass screwed with union ends, either straightway type or angle type, as manufactured by Appollo , Nibco or Sarco . Flow control valves as shown or required shall be iron body with flanged ends. They shall be Bell & Gossett Co. , Taco or Balance Master . Float type automatic air vents shall be provided for all high points of the piping system, suitable for 125 p.s.i . working pressure. Vents shall have provision for manual closing with cock instal- led between vent and piping. k SECTION 15200 - H.V.A.C. 15200 - 19 CIRCULATING PUMPS : Pumps shall be of the centrifugal type _base mounted. Pumps shall be suitable for continuous operation at 2250 maximum temperature . Pumps shall be suitable to operate at a maximum pressure of 125 p .s .i . Bearings shall be bronze sleeve type . For capacity see pump schedule on Drawing. Pumps shall be Bell and Gossett, Taco or Thrush. FIRE DAMPERS : Furnish and install , where indicated on the drawings or where required, approved fusible link, self-closing fire dampers of the types shown in the details of the drawings. Fire damper frames shall be made of #10 gauge steel and shall be securely fastened to the masonry construction. Each frame shall be fitted with an angle iron stop and a spring latch. All fire dampers , unless otherwise noted on drawings , shall be constructed and installed in accordance with the National Fire Protection Association . Samples of fire dampers and construction drawings shall be submitted to and be approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. After approval of the dampers this Contractor shall submit construction .drawings to the .Architect for his records . Fire dampers shall be as manufactured by Prefco, Venco, United. VOLUME DAMPERS: Furnish and install at all branch ducts off of the supply mains , where indicated on the drawings and where required, air splitter dampers and/or butterfly dampers with indicating and locking quadrants or push rods and pillow blocks . The dampers shall be two (2) gauges heavier than the ducts in which they are installed. Damper blades shall be riveted to the sup- porting rod. Cast or malleable brackets riveted to the sides of the ducts shall be used to support the damper rod . Splitter dampers shall be sufficiently long to extend the full width of the branch duct to which attached. Where necessary, they shall be curved to scoop branch duct air out of the main duct air stream. SECTION 15200 - H .V.A.C. 15200 - 18 Ali nipples and fittings shall be of the same material and thickness as the pipe with which they are used, except where screwed fittings are used, in which case, they shall be of close grained cast iron standard weight with heavy band and clean out fill taper thread. Flanged joints shall be made up with one-sixteenth (1/16") inch thick, ring type compressed sheet asbestos gaskets, cold-pressed semi-finished hexagon nuts, and square forged head commercial steel bolts. Where union connections are indicated, specified, or necessary for ferrous pipe two (2") inches in diameter, and smaller, they shall be brass-seated, black malleable iron. On piping two and one-half (22") inches in diameter and larger, unions shall be flanged pattern. Sleeves shall be provided for all piping passing through walls , slabs, partitions, or other building construction. Sleeves through concrete slabs may be of the plastic type. Sleeves through wall or partitions shall be steel . Escutcheons : Where exposed pipes pass through floors, finished walls, or finished ceilings, they shall be fitted with neat, heavy spun or stamper steel, chrome plated escutcheons, firmly secured to the pipes . Escutcheons shall be of sufficient outside diameter to amply cover the sleeved openings for the pipe . EXPANSION LOOPS, OFFSETS AND ANCHORS : Provisions for expansion in mains and risers shall be made by the installation of offsets or pipe loops, with anchors, as may be required. AIR VENTS : Furnish and install at all high points in hot water flow and return mains to properly vent= the system an automatic float type air vent. Each vent shall be one-half (�") inch size and provided with one-fourth (-") inch overflow to drain. Each section of heating element shall have a manual air vent. Provide access panels to General Contractor for installation at vent locations over ceiling. All air vents shall be Bell and Gossett, Dole, or Taco. opk SECTION 15200 - H.V.A.C. 15200 - 17 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS : All piping systems shall be supported by means of hanger having individual means of vertical adjustment, and shall be fabricated in accordance with Section Six of the American Standards Association Code for pressure piping and Underwriters ' approved. Horizontal piping lines shall. be supported by means of threaded rods attached to malleable iron inserts . Roll supports to be used on all piping where there is longi- tudinal movement due to temperature changes . Pipe covering protection saddles shall be used at each hanger with a roll of sufficient size to take the saddle . Maximum spacing of hangers or supports : �" to 1" pipe - 7 ft. 114-" to 2" pipe - 10 ft . 2�" to 3?" pipe - 12 ft . 4" to 6" pipe - 14 ft. Where concentrated loads such as heavy valves or fittings occur, supports shall be installed within two (21 ) feet of the load. Anchors welded to the pipe shall be installed to permit the line to take up its expansion and contraction freely in opposite directions away from the anchored point. Where expansion joints are used, pipe guides shall be installed to allow the pipe line to move freely within the expansion joint. All risers are to be anchored to floor construction by means of welded anchors . Hanger rods of ASTM A-107-42 hot rolled steel shall be of the following minimum sizes for fire protection. 3/4" to 2" pipe - 3/8" rod 21," to 3�" pipe - 1/2" rod 4" to 5" pipe - 5/8" rod 6" pipe - 3/4" rod Hangers to be Milford, Carpenter and Patterson, Grinnell, Calco . PIPING MATERIALS : Unless otherwise noted, all piping, including nipples, shall be of new material , absolutely perfect throughout, scale free, and be of the best grade guaranteed full weight. All pipe shall be Schedule 40, black steel . Pipe shall be continuous butt weld. The manufacturer 's name or branch shall be rolled or stamped on each length of pipe and nipple . SECTION 15200 - H .V.A.C. 15200 - 16 VALVES : Furnish and install valves where shown on plans and also wherever necessary to make the system complete in its operation. All valves must be so constructed that they may be repacked under pressure while open. Throttling valves shall be installed in all lines where regulation is required . Sving check valves shall be installed in all lines where flow may reverse from intended direction . Except for above , or as otherwise noted on plans , ball valves shall be installed in all supply and return lines . All valves shall be one (:1) make and shall be as manufactured by Jenkins B:ros . , Lunkenheimer Company, Walworth Company. Gate Valves : Two and one-half (2;" ) inch and three (3") inch shall be 125r iron body bronze mounted, solid wedge , insice screw, non-rising spindle , screwed end. Four (4" ) inches and larger shall be 125#1 iron body bronze mounted O.S. &Y . with regrind-renew beveled, bronze disc and seat ring , flanged end. Check Valves : Sizes two (2" ) inch and smaller shall be 1251 bronze, horizontal swing type with regrinding bronze seat and disc that may be reground, without removing the valve from the line, screwed end. Two and one-half (21� ) inch and larger ,shall be 1251 iron body bronze mounted, horizontal swing type with regrind-renew bronze seat ring and disc, screwed or flanged end. SECTION 15200 - H .V .A.C. 15200 - 15 INSULATION : Insulate all heating and chilled water piping mains and branches to risers with one (1" ) inch nominal thick fiberglass . One-piece insulation jacketed with a vinyl coated and embossed vapor barrier laminate . Insulation shall be Owens/Corning , Fiberglas 25 ASJ (all service jacket) , Johns-Manville or Carey . Cover all elbows , fittings , etc . with an equal thickness of premoulded fittings by Zeston. All above insulation shall be Owens-Corning , Johns-Manville or Carey . Insulate all boiler room combustion air duct with one (1") inch thick fiberglass blanket insulation with vinyl jacket. Insulation shall have a flame spread rating of 75' maximum and smoke developed rating of 50 maximum. Insulation shall be wrapped tightly on ductwork with all circumferential joints butted longitudinal joints overlapped a minimum of two (2" ) inch. Adhere insulation with four (4" ) inch stripes of insulation Bonding Adhesive . Secure insulation to bottom of rectangular ductwork over twenty-four (29" ) inch wide with suitable mechanical. fasteners at not more than eighteen (18" ) inch on centers . t."IRING: All boiler burner wiring shall be furnished and installed J`, the Heating Contractor from junction box, furnished and installed b%7 the Electrical Contractor . All fan wiring shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor . All power wiring for circulating pumps shall be furnished and installed by the. Electrical Contractor.. All wiring to vertical fan units shall be furnished and installed by Electrical Contractor, including mounting and connecting of thermostat furnished by Heating, Ventilating & Air Conditioning Contractor. rAM�"` SECTION 15200 - H .V.A.C . 15200 - 14 VALVE TAGS , NAME PLATES AND CHARTS : Furnish and install on each gate and globe valve, and on all automatic control valves used in this contract, a two (2") inch diameter brass tag with stamped numerals painted white. The tags shall be attached to the valve handles or stem necks with brass hooks or chains and properly secured. These numbers shall correspond with numbers indicated for valves and controls on the record drawings and on two (2) printed detailed lists . These printed lists shall state the number and location of each valve and control and the equipment which it controls, and other necessary information, such as requiring the opening or closing of another valve when one (1) valve is to be opened or closed. These printed lists shall be prepared in a form to meet the approval of the Engineer . Nameplates, catalog numbers and rating identifications shall be securely attached to Electrical and Mechanical equipment with screws or rivets . Adhesives or cements will not be permitted. REGISTERS AND GRILLES : Exhaust registers and grilles shall be of aluminum gasketed flanged separate mounting frame. Opposed blade damper shall be operated from the face of the grille with a removable key. Registers shall be Titus , Metal-Aire or Grille Masters of sizes, shown on the drawings . MAGNETIC STARTERS : Furnish magnetic starters for motor 1/2 H.P. and larger. Magnetic starters shall be furnished with windings to match windings of the motors to be used. Magnetic starters shall be installed and wired by the Electrical Sub-Contractor. All magnetic starters for equipment to be electrically inter- " '' locked shall be furnished with extra contacts as required. SECTION 15200 - H .V.A.C. . 15200 - 13 TESTS - GENERAL: All piping shall be installed drip tight and arranged for proper drainage and air elimination. If upon testing , leaks develop or the installation fails to function properly, this Contractor shall make all necessary corrections and new tests shall be made and repeated, until all defects have been remedied. Corrections necessary for the proper functioning of the installation shall be made to the satisfaction of the Architect-Engineer before final acceptance of the work . This Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials , instruments, etc. , necessary for all tests specified. TESTS - PIPING : Before closing in, before covering is applied and before connections are made to equipment, all supply and return piping shall be hydrostatically tested to a pressure of not less than seventy-five (75) pounds gauge pressure for a period of not less than four (4) hours without loss of pressure. If any leaks develop, necessary repairs shall be made subject to an eight (8) hour working test. The stuffing boxes on all valves shall be repacked with new packing and shall be made tight. TESTING AND BALANCING - DUCT WORK: The H .V.A.C. Sub-Contractor shall run a test under normal operating conditions during which test all necessary adjustments and changes required for operation shall be made . This test shall be continued, until the system operates without frequent adjustment. During this test period the H.V.A.C. Sub-Contractor shall take readings of air flow on all systems, and make necessary adjustments to deflectors and dampers to insure correct air flows and reasonably quiet and efficient air flows . The H .V.A.C. Sub-Contractor shall supply the Architect with four (4) copies of table showing measured and specified air quantities of each exhaust register. Equipment necessary to conduct above tests shall be furnished by the H.V.A.C. Sub-Contractor. Avk SECTION 15200 - H .V.A.C. 15200 - 12 Transformation pieces shall be made with a slope not exceeding one to seven insofar as it is possible to do so. Water pipes must not pass through ducts . Where pipe obstructions cannot be moved, the ducts shall be increased at the point to maintain a constant cross sectional area, and the streamline enclosure for pipe shall be provided. All ducts shall be securely and permanently hung in a rigid manner from the building construction. Hangers shall not be less than 1" x 1/3" band :iron spaced approximately 8 ' on centers extended to bottom of duct in all cases and riveted and bolted to outside of duct. They must not pass through or be installed inside of duct. All ducts must be thoroughly cleaned before the system is placed in operation. Where ducts pass through walls , floor or partitions, the space around ducts shall be sealed with rope, packing mineral wool or other non-combustible material to prevent the passage of flame and smoke . Portion of ducts visible through grilles or registers shall be given two (2) coats of flat :black paint over a primer used to prepare galvanized metal for the proper adherence of paint. Furnish and install fire dampers where ducts pass thru fire partitions, floors and at other locations as required by the National Fire Protection Association, State and local ordinance and the Owner . TESTING AND BALANCING: The Heating Sub-Contractor shall run a test under normal operation conditions , during which test all necessary adjust- ments and changes required for proper operation shall be made . This test shall be continued. until the systems operate without frequent adjustment. During this test period, this Contractor shall take temperature readings of all systems; also, make necessary adjustments to automatic temperature controls to insure correct room tempera- ture and reasonably quiet and efficient operation. Fuel , water and electricity for all tests will be furnished by the General Contractor, equipment necessary to conduct above tests shall be provided by this Contractor . SECTION 15200 - H .V.A.C. 15200 - 11 Yew,, Provide access doors wherever there is a damper which is not accessible from visible sight. Fittings may be constructed of Pittsburgh type lock seams . Cross brake each duct panel wider than twelve (12") inches all four (4) sides of duct, so as to provide extra assurance of stiffness . Insulated ducts shall have no cross brake . End of duct sections shall be notched and lapped at least one (1") inch and connected with bar slip, S slip or drive caps . All slips shall be at least one (1) gauge heavier than the duct, and all joints must be made in a neat and workmanlike manner. In all cases the joint must be tight . All corner joints shall be caulked with cement. All laps are to be made in the direction of airflow, so as to leave a smooth finished surface inside the ducts . All inside groove seams shall be prick punched 2 ' on centers . ,All bar slips shall be clipped two (2") inches from edge and ten (10" ) inch on center . When the length of duct approaching an elbow, outlet or other partial obstruction is more than eight (8) times the dimension of duct in the plans of the elbow, a full radius elbow shall be used. The inside of throat radius shall be 3/4 the width of the duct. When the length of duct referred to above is less than eight (8) times the dimension of duct in the plane of the elbow, a radius elbow with vanes shall be provided. The throat radius of these elbows shall be not. less than six (6") inches. Radius elbows up to twenty-=six (26") inches in width shall be equipped with one (1) vane. Vanes in square elbows shall be spaced on three (311) inch radius on the diagonal for ducts up to twenty-four (2411) inches wide. Furnish and install vanes in all duct offsets, air inlets, and in all spread connections to outlets . All vanes shall be constructed of No. 18 gauge metal securely held in place by cleats without sheet metal screws or ends or sheet projecting into the ducts . All raw and sharp edges must be removed from the blades . Vanes must be rigid, so as not to rattle or vibrate in the air stream. The above specification applies to all exhaust ducts . The type of elbow to be installed will depend upon structural conditions encountered at the building as well as upon the conditions relative to locations of outlets stated above. If space is not available for full radius elbows with vanes, square elbows 0",,, with vanes shall be provided. SECTION 15200 - H .V.A.C. 15200 - 10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS All materials and equipment necessary to make the installation complete in every detail shall be furnished and installed under this Contract whether or not specifically indicated on the drawings or specified herein . All materials and equipment shall be new. It is the intent of the specifications that one (1) manufacturer be selected, not a combination, for any particular classifica- tion of material . For example , all valves of one (1) manufacturer, all Plumbing fixtures of one (1) manufacturer, etc . , except specific material classifications in which delivery time becomes a problem the Awarding Authority may give specific exemption from this requirement. Where materials, equipment, apparatus , or other products are specified by manufacturer, brand name , type or catalog numbers, such designation is to establish standards of performance , quality, type and style . SHEET METAL WORK: Furnish and install all ductwork shown on drawings and specified herein . The work shall include , in addition to the duct work, access panels , registers , fire dampers, and other apparatus required to complete the work . Sizes of all ducts , as indicated on drawings , shall be adhered to as closely as possible . The right is reserved to vary sizes of ducts to accommodate structural conditions and to provide clearance for ceiling heights during progress of the work without entailing additional cost to - the Owner. All ducts, unless otherwise noted, shall be constructed of galvanized iron. Duct Dimensions Ducts 12" wide or less No . 26 13" to 30" wide No . 24 30" and wider No. 22 All ducts up to maximum size shall be constructed with inside groove seams and joints of the drive-slip and S slip type on 7 '-10" centers . All ducts shall be made tight in accordance with SMACNA Standards and corners of ducts shall be sealed with E-8W compound . Length of Section up to twenty-four (24") inches wide not more than 8 ' -0" . SECTION 15200 - H .V.A.C. 15200 - 9 FINAL INSPECTION: At the conclusion of this work, this Contractor shall inspect all his equipment. He shall make sure that all motor-driven equipment rotates freely, is properly protected by guards, and is connected for proper rotation, and that all bearings are lubricated. RECORD DRAWINGS : The H.V.A.C. Sub-Contractor shall maintain at the site a set of drawings on which shall be accurately shown the actual instal- lation of all work under this Section, indicated thereon any variations from the contract drawings , including changes in sizes , location and dimensions . For this purpose the Owner will furnish two (2) sets of black or blue line on white drawings . At the conclusion of the work the H.V.A.C. Sub- Contractor shall deliver to the General Contractor a complete set of reproducible record drawings showing the entire work as actually installed, and two (2) sets of black or blue line on white prints thereof . These shall be submitted to the Architect. TEMPORARY HEATING: Refer to provisions under Special Conditions for temporary heating requirements. No equipment intended for permanent installation shall be operated for temporary purposes without the written permission of the Architect. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS : For two (2) days prior to the completion of the work, this Sub-Contractor shall give detailed instructions to the responsible person or persons designated, in the operation and maintenance of all work installed under this contract. When the operating instructions have been completed, this Contractor shall notify the Architect in writing stating when, to whom and number of days such instructions have been given. SECTION 15200 - H .V.A.C. 15200 - 8 COOPERATION: The work shall be carried on under the usual conditions affecting construction of the type involved, and in conjunc- tion with other operations at the site . This Sub-Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer and all Contractors working on the site . He shall coordinate his work with theirs and shall proceed in such a manner as not to delay or hinder in any way the progress of the work as a whole . In case of dispute, the Architect shall render a decision which shall be final . PROTECTION: This Sub-Contractor shall take proper precautions to protect his work and materials from loss or damage, until the complete installation, is turned over, to the Owner. Any loss or injury shall be made good without expense to the Owner . WORKMANSHIP, MATERIALS AND DELIVERY: This Sub-Contractor shall see that all his materials , are delivered at the building when required, so as to carry on the work in the most efficient manner . All work and materials shall. be protected at all times . This Sub-Contractor shall make good all damage caused either directly or indirectly by his workmen. Equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury . All work shall be done by skilled workmen, in accordance with the best practice of the trade and to the satisfaction of the Architect. This Sub-Contractor shall enforce instructions of the Architect regarding signs , open fires, smoking, etc. , and shall require his personnel to comply with these regulations while on the premises . This Sub-Contractor shall confine his storage of material and his construction operation -to such limits as directed by the Architect. �►, SECTION 15200 - H.V.A.C. 15200 - 7 The drawings shall be taken in a sense as diagrammatic. Sizes of ductwork and pipes , and general method of running them, are shown; but it is not: intended to show every offset and fitting nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered. All necessary parts to make complete working systems ready for use shall be furnished without extra charge. The H.V.A.C. drawings and specifications are intended to sup- plement each other, so that any detail shown on the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications , or vice versa, shall be executed the same as if mentioned in the specification or shown on the drawings. In case of conflict with parts of the building or the work of other trades , the Architect shall be notified immediately and requested to render a decision, so that there may be no delay in the building construciton. QUALITY OF WORKMANSHIP : All work performed under this section shall be in accordance with the latest accepted practices, and shall be of the best workmanship. CLEANING: All duct work shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt and dust. CODES : All work shall be performed in strict accordance with local and state codes and regulations . ORDINANCES AND PERMITS : This Sub-Contractor shall give the proper authorities all requisite notices or information relating to the work in his charge, pay all fees, obtain all official licenses or permits and certificates and comply with the rules of the Underwriters, or Public Departments and with all local ordinances and state laws applying to this work. SECTION 15200 - H.V.A.C. 15200 - 6 Circulating Pumps . Hot Water Specialties . Insulation. Temperature Controls . Exhaust Fans . Louvers . Registers and Grilles . Air & Water Balancing Report. Two (2) complete sets of all the above data including operating and maintenance instructions shall be delivered to the Owner by this Sub-Contractor at the completion of the work . The Contractor shall assume the cost of and entire responsibi- lity for any changes in the work which may be occasioned by approval of materials other than those specified. GUARANTEE: This Sub-Contractor shall guarantee that all labor and materials required under this contract: will be free from defects , and agrees on notice from the Owner to make good any and all defects in the work within one (1) year after acceptance of the work, to the complete satisfaction of the Owner and at no cost to the Owner. This Sub-Contractor further agrees that if any damage occurs to any equipment, the building or merchandise stored therein, through defects in his materials or installation, he will repair, replace , or pay for such damage at no cost to the Owner . LOCATIONS : Location of all equipment, piping and ductwork on Heating plans shall be checked by the Heating Sub-Contractor against the general and detailed drawings of the construction proper. All measurements must be taken at the building. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS . SECTION 15200 - H .V.A.C. 15200 - 5 This Sub-Contractor, before installing any of his work, shall see that it does not interfere with the clearance required for finished columns , pilasters, walls and ceilings, as shown on the contract Architectural. drawings and details . Work installed by this Sub-Contractor which interferes with or modifies the Architectural design as shown on the contract drawings, shall be changed as directed by the Architect and all costs incident to such changes shall be paid by this Sub-Contractor, In any and all cases of discrepancy in figures, plans or specifications, the matter shall be immediately submitted to the Architect for decision, Should it appear that the character of the work herein contem- plated or any matter related thereto is not sufficiently explained in the specifications or drawings , this Sub- Contractor may apply to the Architect for further information or drawings and shall conform to such when given as part of these specifications as far as they may be consistent with the original drawings and specifications . TYPICAL DETAILS : Typical details where shown on the drawings shall apply to each and every item of the project where such items are incorporated. They are repeated in full on the drawings, which in many cases are diagrammatic only, but with the intention that such details shall be applicable in full . MANUFACTURER'S DATA: This Sub-Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval within thirty (30) days of award of contract, seven (7) copies of shop drawings and pertinent data for the following equipment, showing sizes, capacities, motor horsepowers and name of manufacturer : Boilers . Cabinet Heaters & Fan Coil Units . Chiller. Rooftop Units . Valves . SECTION 15200 - H .V.A.C. 15200 - 4 This Sub-Contractor shall provide all necessary tools, machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completing his work and shall remove all waste or broken material resulting from it. GIVING INFORMATION: This Sub-Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the shape , size, and position of all openings required for his apparatus and shall give full information to the General Contractor and other Sub-Contractors sufficiently in advance of the work so that all openings may be built in advance . FAILURE: In the case of failure on the part of this Sub-Contractor to give proper information as noted above, he will be required to do his own cutting and patching, to the satisfaction of the General Contractor , or have :same done by the General Contractor, but in any case, same is to be done without extra expense to the Owner. OBTAINING INFORMATION: This Sub-Contractor shall obtain detailed information from the manufacturers of apparatus which he is to furnish or install as to the proper method of installing and connecting same. He shall obtain all information from the General Contractor, and the other Mechanical Sub-Contractors which may be necessary to facilitate his work and the completion of the whole project. DRAWINGS : This Sub-Contractor shall refer to the H.V.A.C. drawings and the Architectural floor plans and details for a full compre- hension of the extent and detail of the work to be performed. These drawings are intended to be supplementary to the speci- fications and any work indicated, mentioned or implied is to be considered as specified by both. All work shown on the drawings is intended to be approximately correct to the scale of the drawings, but figured dimensions and detailed drawings are in. all cases to assume precedence over them. SECTION 15200 - H .V.A.C. 15200 - 3 Smoke Breeching . Pipe and Duct Insulation . Louvers . Exhaust Fans . Registers and Grilles . Testing and Balancing . RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS : The following work is not included in this section of the specifications and is to be performed under other sections . Painting . Win. Openings through Roof and Walls for Passage of Ducts and Louvers . Water Service for Heating Systems . Wiring . (Power) . Electric Baseboard Heating . Cutting and Patching . Chiller Support. Temporary Heat. Range Hoods . Access Panels . INTENT: The entire work provided for in this Specification shall be constructed and finished in every respect in a workmanlike and substantial manner, according to the drawings and this speci- ficat�ion. It is not intended that the drawings shall show every fitting and appliance, but this Sub-Contractor shall furnish and install such parts as may be necessary to complete the system in accordance with the best practice of this trade and to the satisfaction of the Architect. SECTION 15200 - H .V.A.C. 15200 - 2 # Hampton Court SECTION 15200 - HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS : Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The work to be performed under this Section without limiting the generality thereof, consists of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, scaffolding, power, tools and rigging, except as otherwise specified, and performing all work as necessary to fully complete the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning system shown on the accompanying drawings and as specified hereinafter. The scope of the work shall include, but is not limited to the following: Chiller . Vertical Fan Coil Units (Whalen) . Air Handling Unit. Piping and Fittings . Ductwork. ` Forced Hot Water Heating Specialties . Boilers . Automatic Temperature Controls . Hot Water Specialties . Circulating Pumps . Exhaust Systems . SECTION 15200 - H.V.A.C. 15200 - 1 The piping system shall be considered tight, if the drop in pressure does not exceed two (2) pounds per square inch during the test period. If the pressure drop exceeds two (2) pounds, the Contractor shall make all necessary repairs and altera- tions in the piping system necessary to meet the test. CUTTING AND PATCHING INFORMATION: All cutting and patching of building structure shall be done and provided per -the General Conditions . The Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall specifically inform the General Contractor, and the various trades concerned of the size and location of all chases , holes and supports, etc. , in building structure which Plumbing work, may require, and the Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the construction and location of same . The Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall not cut away any steel , concrete brickwork, floor construction or arches , or dig into any walls, or in any case allow the same: to be done without the full knowledge and consent of the Architect, and the Plumbing Sub-Contractor otherwise this; Contractor will be held responsible for any damage resulting from any such work. In case of work of two (2) trades shall interfere in such a manner as to necessitate a deviation from the design, work shall not be altered until the Architect has been notified and has rendered a decision as to the manner in which the difficulty shall be overcome . STERILIZATION: Disinfection of the entire water supply system, if required by the local Water Department, shall be carried out in accordance with their instructions . In the absence of these regulations , the entire water system shall be filled with solution containing fifty (50) parts per million of available chlorine and allowed to stand six (6) hours, during which time all valves and faucets shall be opened and the system shall be flushed with clean water, until the residual chlorine content is not greater than 0. 2 parts per million. SECTION 15100 - PLUMBING 15100 - 20 Piping shall be run parallel with the lines of the building ; well supported from the structure ; free from pockets or sag pitched to drain points ; and installed with loops , offsets and anchors to adequately care for thermal expansion . Piping shall be installed to provide not less than three- fourths (3/4") inch spacing from finished covering to other covering or surfaces of other construction. All piping shall be protected from water hammer or shock by air chambers twenty (20) times pipe diameterin length, or by approved shock absorbing devices . Shock protection shall be provided at top of risers , at, groups of fixtures and at remote single fixtures . Air chambers for three-fourths (3/4") inch piping shall be a minimum eighteen (18" ) inch long . Drain points shall have a three-fourths (3/4" ) inch hose and draw-off as specified under MATERIALS . Valves shall be installed on branches leaving mains , at branches to groups of fixtures , at single fixtures when trim does not include stops , and at all appliances or equipment. Final connections shall be made to all fixtures, appliances or equipment whether furnished by Plumbing Sub-Contractor or under other Sections of the specifications . TESTING: The entire piping of the sanitary and water systems in building shall be tested with water and proven tight to the satisfaction of the local Plumbing Inspector and the Architect before piping is covered or fixtures connected. The sanitary piping shall have all openings plugged where neces- sary and shall be filled with water to the level of top of vent pipes and allowed to stand for at least thirty (30) minutes for inspection after which, if the lines prove tight, the water shall be drawn off. Each vertical stack of the sanitary system with its branch waste and vent pipes may be tested separately. Water supply shall be tested with water for hot and cold to a hydrostatic pressure of one hundred fifty (150) pounds per square inch and proved tight at this pressure before piping is insulated . The piping systems , if in any way concealed by structural work, shall be tested to the aforesaid pressure and 0,,, proved tight before pipes are concealed. The test pressure shall be held for a period of not less than thirty (30) minutes . SECTION 15100 - PLUMBING 15100 - 19 PART 3 - EXECUTIG?J MATERIAL: Unless specifically noted or :indicated otherwise all equipment and materials specified in this SECTION , or indicated on the drawings shall be installed under this contract, whether or not specifically itemized herein . This part of the specification covers particular installation methods and requirements peculiar to certain items and classes of material and equipment. SANITARY SYS=1: The interior sanitary system shall be constructed using materials as specified and/or indicates, and shall extend to points indicated on drawings . The interior sanitary piping shall provide properly trapped and vented waste connections to all fixtures . Drain piping shall be uniformly pitched to conform with State Rules formulated by the State Examiners of Plumbers . Vents throuclh roof shall be flashes: by Roofing Sub-Contractor . Cleanouts shall be installed at changes in direction, at base of stacks at not over fifty (50 ' ) feet intervals in horizontal runs . Cleanout tees shall not be used where it is possible to use a straight cleanout. Traps of material and design approved by the State Examiners of Plumbers shall be furnished and installed by the Plumbing Sub-Contractor for all fixtures , appliances or equipment . INTERIOR WATER SYSTEMS : Materials for the interior water systems shall be as specified under MATERIALS . SECTION 15100 - PLUMBING 15100 - 18 SUMP & SUMP PUMP AMW Furnish and install where shown on plans , simplex submersible sump pumps . Weil Series 1400 Model 2-141514-1/2 rated 50 G.P.M. at 15 Feet T.D.H . with 1/2 horsepower, 120 Volt single phase, 60 cycle , 1 , 750 R.P.M. motor. Furnish and install one (1) automatic mercury float switch with 10 feet cord and plug; one (1) mercury float switch to actuate alarm; one (1) N.E .M.A. I alarm panel with horn, light and silencer. Furnish and install one (1) 30" diameter x 5'-0" deep Fiberglass basin; one (1) 34" O.D. round steel cover with vent and necessary openings . Furnish and install check valve in horizontal and gate valve. SECTION 15100 - PLUMBING 15100 - 17 P-11 Water Closet (Commercial) American Standard elongated Water Saver Cadet 2109. 405 vitreous china siphon jet action close coupled tank; Church 296 solid plastic open front. P-12 Urinal American Standard Water Saver Trimbrook 6581 . 017 Sloan Royal 186-YB, carrier to suit. P-13 Lavatory (Commercial.) American Standard Declyn vitreous china 0321 . 026 4" centers with wall hangers, Reliant 2385.049 single lever faucet with pop up drain and aerator pair of 3/8" angle stops and supplies chrome plated; cast brass "P" trap with cleanout chrome platted. P-13A Lavatory (Commercial) American Standard 5608. 039 Oval Contura counter top Duramel self rimming 20" x 17" 4" centers Reliant 2385 . 049 single lever faucet with pop up drain and aerator; pair of 3/8" angle stops and supplies chrome plated; cast brass "P" trap with cleanout chrome plated. P-14 Shower J .R. Smith 2010A - six (6)") inch round nickle bronze shower drain; Symmons Safetymix 1 - 100-X with integral stops and 3 G.P .M. flow. Shower head and bracket. SECTION 15100 - PLUMBING 15100 - 16 P-5 Disposer Insinkerator Model Badger V 1/2 horsepower continuous feed operation 115 Volts . P-6 Water Closet (H.C. ) American Standard elongated water saver Cadet 2109.405 vitreous china, close coupled tank Church 380 TL solid plastic closed front and cover 3/8" flexible supply with stop chrome plated. P-7 Lavatory (H.C . ) American Standard Roxalyn 0195 . 289 24" x 20" punched for concealed arm carrier. Reliant single lever faucet 2385 . 078, 22 G.P.M. flow restrictor; 7723 . 018 offset grid drain pair of 3/8" supplies with stops chrome plated 1;" x 12" cast brass "P" trap with cleanout; concealed arm chair carrier with 2" chrome plated escutcheons to set lavatory 22" from wall exposed drain pipes and hot water piping shall be recessed, insulated or guarded. P-8 Bath Tub (H.C. ) American Standard 0134 .130 Solar 5 foot enameled steel . Bath tub slip resistant surface. Symmons S-96-401-X-3 pressure balance bath and shower fitting, pop up drain and overflow cast brass .17 gauge direct lift pop up mechanism. P-9 Sink (H.C. ) Elkay GECR 2522 stainless steel sink with outlet to right or left rear as required. Reliant 4205 . 074 single handle faucet with hose spray; pair of 3/8" angle stops and risers to suit chrome plated; 12" cast brass "P" trap with cleanout chrome plated. P-10 Service Sink 7692. 049 Lakewell service sink enameled cast iron 22" x 18" with rim guard and wall hanger Heritage service sink faucet. 8340. 075 rough chrome finish with vacuum breaker, bucket hook, hose end and stops in shanks . Trap standard 7798.16 - 3" outlet and strainer. SECTION 15100 - PLUMBING 15100 - 15 These printed lists shall be typed on good quality white paper. Lists framed under glass shall be hung as directed by the Architect. FIXTURES : The Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall furnish and install all fixtures and equipment shown. on Plumbing plans and hereinafter specified, except as specified otherwise . All fixtures shall be new, of first quality with all exposed parts and trim chrome plated. Fixtures shall be American- Standard, Kohler, Eljer . Fixture numbers listed below are American Standard. All Plumbing Fixtures shall be of one (1) manufacturer and all exposed brass goods shall be heavily chromium plated with stop valves in each supply line . All enamelware shall be acid resisting . P-1 Water Closet 2122 .453 Cadet Water saver vitreous china round front siphon jet action close coupled tank. Church solid plastic round closed front 3 D, 3/8" flexible supply with stop chrome plated. P-2 Lavatory 0476 . 028 Aqualyn vitreous china self-rimming 20" x 17 faucet holes on 4" center. Reliant 2385 . 049 single .lever faucet 2? G.P .M. flow restrictor pop-up drain and aerator. Pair of 3/8" angle stops and supplies chrome plated; cast brass "P" trap with cleanout chrome plated. P-3 Bath Tub 0135 .137 Salem recess bath enameled steel 60" slip resistant surface, acid resisting. Symmons 96-2-3X pressure balance bath and shower fitting. Pop up bath drain and overflow cast brass 17 gauge direct lift pop up mechanism. P-4 Kitchen Sink Dayton 25" x 22" stainless steel sink 20 gauge, 3 faucet hole . Reliant 4205 . 074 single handle faucet with hose spray pair 3/8" angle stops and risers to suit chrome plated 1' " cast brass "P" trap with cleanout chrome plated. OOW SECTION 15100 - PLUMBING 15100 - 14 PROTECTION: The Plumbing Contractor, at his own expense shall cover and protect his work and new and existing materials from all damage by weather or any causes during the progress of the work. The Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall exercise the care in protecting all other materials and the building structure , with proper supervision by his representatives, of his work, against floods, plumbing torches , and portable fires in the building. On the completion of the buildinq and work, he shall instruct the Owner ' s representative in the use and control of the entire Plumbing system. ACCEPTANCE OF INSTALLATION CONDITIOvS : This Contractor shall report to the Construction tanager and the Architect, prior to commencing any portion of this work, any unsuitable conditions for the installation or this portion ., of the work . Work schedule: This Contractor "shall install his work as requested by the Architect and the General Contractor . VALVE TAGS & CHARTS : All valves on pipes of every description shall have neat circular white plastic valve tags of at least one and one-half (1�" ) inch in diameter (with black letters) attached with plastic hook to each valve stem. Stamp on these valve tags in letters as large as practical the number of the valve and the service , such as : "Htti"' , "Ceti'" and "F" for Hot Water, Cold hater and Fire respectively. The numbers of each service shall be consecutive . These numbers shall correspond to numbers indicated for valves on the RECORD DRAWINGS and on two (2) printed detailed lists . These printed lists shall state the numbers and locations of each valve and the fixture or group of fixtures which it controls, and other necessary information, such as, requiring the opening or closing of another valve or valves when any one (1) valve is to be opened or closed. OONK SECTION 15100 - PLUMBING 15100 - 13 All horizontal rainwater piping & roof drain bodies shall be insulated with one (1) inch fiberglass 25 ASJ. Fittings shall be insulated with premoulded one (1) piece, P.V.C. as made by Zeston. Insulation installed in accordance with manufacturer' s instructions . Covering protector of twenty-four (24) gauge spun aluminum or chrome plated brass shall be applied to all exposed ends of insulation. The covering shall recede into these protectors at least one and one-half (1z") inch and installed on exposed piping only. Where fixture branches are exposed or drop from overhead, the covering shall stop on vertical pipes six (6 ' ) feet above the floor and supplies from this point fixture shall not be covered. A ceiling plate shall be installed at point where covering stops . FLOOR & ROOF DRAINS AND WALL HYDRANTS : Floor drains : (J.R. Smith, Josam or Zurn. ) Mechanical and Compactor Room. J.R. Smith 2350 with ductile iron grate & sediment. bucket. Shower and Toilet Rooms : (J.R. Smith 2010 A 6" round nickle bronze. ) Roof Drain: (J .R. Smith 1010 ERC - cast iron dome. ) Wall Hydrant - WH - J .R. Smith 5610-H, Josam or Zurn, three- fourths (3/4") inch all bronze with integral vacuum breaker. Hose Bibb Chicago Model 952 with lock shield cap, removable tee handle, vacuum breaker and 3/4" hose thread. SECTION 15100 - PLUMBING 15100 - 12 TEMPORARY WATER: Temporary water and temporary water piping is specified under the "General Conditions" . Permanent piping , if installed , may be used for temporary water . Cost of water and temporary piping is to be borne by the General Contractor . BATHROOM ACCESSORIES : Accessories will be furnished under Section 10800• All accessories , except Medicine' Cabinets , shall be installed by Sub-Contractor. GAS SERVICE : The exterior gas piping, including connection to main in street, service to building and furnishing and installing of meter , will be done by local utility, company . Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall pay all costs for this work . Gas piping in building s::all be steel with screwed malleable iron 150 p. s . i . standard fittings . Piping shall be supported on eight (8 ' ) foot centers with hangers as specified for sanitary piping. Piping shall be pitched to drain and drip pockets shall be installed at all low points . Valves shall be Boston Key type. Upon completion, gas system shall be tested with air at a pres- sure twice the maximum working pressure and pressure tight. INSULATION: All insulation shall be applied by a competent Contractor using only skilled labor . Only whole sections shall be used and covering must fit the piping tightly. All hot water and circulating piping, except horizontal runs in pipe spaces shall be insulated with one-half (�" ) inch fiber- glass with fiberglass 25ASJ ,jacket factory applied and stapled in place . 00*4 All cold water piping, except horizontal runs in pipe chases shall be insulated same as hot water . SECTION 15100 - PLUMBING 15100 - 11 The bronze headers shall be secured to the tube sheets by properly spaced stud bolts and flange nuts . Heat exchanger is to be explosion proof on the waterside and waterways are to be 100% copper and bronze to prevent galvanic action within the boiler by positively sealing off water contact between ferrous and non-ferrous metals . Boiler to be equipped with remote bulb electric high limit control adjustable to 200 F. Main gas valve to be 24 Volts with 110/24 Volt transformer. Gas pressure regulator to be set at 4" W.C. Burners to be raised port and die formed from stainless steel alloy and equipped with fixed primary, air ports . Bronze headers and copper fin tubes shall carry a five (5) year warranty against failure except: for corrosive atmosphere or freeze-up. Heater controls will be warranted against failure for two (2) years . Heater shall be inspected and fired off by an authorized representa- tive of the manufacturer at no cost to the installer. Storage Tanks : Hot water storage shall be provided by a Ruudglas Storage System, Model No. 120-SS-3L-2 with insulated and jacketed tanks (s) perfectly manifolded to store 360 gallon: maintained at 140°F. This system shall utilize tank (s) that have a double coating of a high tempera- ture glass formula and are equipped with a magnesium anode rod. Tank (s) shall be designed for 160 P .S .I . working pressure Unit (s) shall be insulated with R-Foam rigid polyurethane foam that completely surrounds tank and shall be encased in baked enamel steel jacket. Manifold shall be pre-cut copper and packaged at factory with necessary sweat fittings to insure component tanks performing as a single unit. Tank (s) shall be covered by a 5-year limited warranty against corrosion. Manifold shall have unions and shut offs . ACCESS PANELS: Access panels for cleanouts or valves shall be furnished and set by others under another section of the specification. Section 08305. This Sub-Contractor shall notify General Contractor where access panels are necessary and shall be responsible for the coordination with the General Contractor . SPECIAL FIXTURES: Furnish and install wastes and supplies to fixtures furnished and set by others . Make final connections . Connections to be installed to comply with Plumbing Code. Furnish and install on washing machine supply lines "k as detailed on drawings, water hammer eliminators equal to J.B.Smith Co . , Model #5005 and Symmons laundry mate valve W-602 . SECTION 15100 - PLUMBING 15100 - 10 MW Check valves shall be horizontal swing type, 125# working pressure, bronze body. Valves shall be screwed or sweat end to suit the pipe on which they are installed. Valves shall be of one (1) manufacturer; Wolverine, Walworth, Nibco. In lieu of above Appolo ball valves may be provided. WATER PIPING - INSTALLATION : Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall run cold, and hot water piping to all fixtures requiring same . He shall do all roughing and final connections. Piping shall be run substantially as shown on the drawings and shall be straight, true and installed in a workmanlike manner. All piping shall be pitched sufficiently so that it will drain and shall have draw-offs at all low points. Supplies to individual fixtures or to batteries shall be equipped with an air chamber at least twenty (20) pipe diameters long and as large as the pipe it serves . It shall be placed as near as practicable to the fixture it :serves . In lieu of above shock absorbers may be provided. Where branches are taken from mains, provide double swing joints to allow for movement and expansion. DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATER AND ,STORAGE TANKS : Heater: The boiler shall be Raypak Model 624 WT-B with 627, 000 Input, 502, 000 B.T.U.H. Output. The boiler shall be approved by A.G.A. , A.S .M.E . inspected and stamped for 160 P.S.I . working pressure complete with manufacturer' s data report. Boiler shall be equipped with 125 P.S .I . , A.S .M.E . pressure relief valve. Boiler shall be rated to deliver water up to 1500F. temperature rise and be equipped with electronic intermittent pilot ignition with 1-4 second shutdown and factory installed flow switch to prove water flow before burner fires. Water tube heat exchanger shall be constructed of straight integral copper fin tubes with fins spaced at seven fins per inch. Tube sheets shall be A.S .M.E. fire box steel . Headers shall be high pressure cast bronze and joined to the copper tubes and tube sheets by means of silicone "0" rings; to form a positive seal between the copper tubes and bronze headers to 1, 200 P .S .I . hydrostatic pressure. 00 SECTION 15100 - PLUMBING 15100 - 9 Cleanouts shall be of the same size as the pipes they serve, up to four (4 " ) inches . They shall be placed so as to be readily accessible, being extended if necessary. Cleanouts shall be installed at each change in direction, and at least every fifty (50 ' ) feet in long runs of piping or as required by local code . SANITARY DRAINAGE VENTS & TRAPS : All vent pipes shall be pitched toward the drain pipe they serve. All vents smaller than four (4" ) inches shall be increased to four (4" ) inches before passing through the roof . All fixtures and drains shall be vented as shown on the drawings or required by the Plumbing Inspector . Vents may be connected together , if found desirable , but not less than six (6" ) inches above the highest fixture. No vents shall pass through the roof , except in positions approved . WATER PIPING - MATERIALS : All cold, hot and recirculating water piping for the Plumbing in the building shaall be Type M hard copper tubing with wrought sweat fittings . All piping in living spaces shall be concealed. Wherever piping is exposed in toilet rooms it shall be chromium plated. All underground piping within building shall be Type "K" hard drawn copper tubing with silver joints . Solder joints for "M" copper shall be 95-5 (no lead) . WATER PIPING - HANGERS : All water piping shall be supported at intervals of not over eight (8 ' ) feet by malleable split ring hangers . Hangers shall be Carpenter and Patterson, Fig . 81 , round three-eighths (3/8") inch iron rods and Fig. 650 inserts or machine threaded lag end rods in the structure . Hangers shall be finished to match the pipe they serve . C:alco, Grinnel . WATER PIPING - VALVES : Valves and draw-off cocks shall be installed on each riser where it leaves the main. They shall be installed on wall hydrants, where shown and where directed. Where valves are concealed in walls or ceilings , access panels shall be furnished by the General Contractor . Valves on water lines one (1" ) inch and larger shall be bronze body, wedge disc for 125'1 working pressure. SECTION 15100 - PLUMBING 15100 - 8 SANITARY & STORP4 DRAINAGE - JOINTS: jc,ini INFORMATION: The Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall obtain detailed information from the manufacturers of apparatus which he is to furnish or install as to the proper method of installing and connecting same. He shall obtain all information from the General Contractor and the other Mechanical Contractors which may be necessary to facilitate his work and the completion of the whole project. CLEANING: At the completion of the work, all fixtures, equipment, apparatus and exposed trim for same included in this Section shall be cleaned and where required, polished ready for use. Faucet washers which have been damaged during construction shall be replaced. Drains and traps shall be thoroughly cleaned. SANITARY AND STORM DRAINAGE - GENERAL: The Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall furnish and install , substantially as indicated on the drawings, soil , wastes, drains , vents, from all fixtures, sanitary drains to 10 feet outside building. All piping within the buildings shall be run concealed where possible. Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall submit Plumbing drawings to the Inspector having jurisdiction over this project for his approval before commencing the work. The sanitary drainage system of the building shall run to points shown on the Plumbing drawings . Lines shall be run in a workmanlike manner, straight, and as nearly as possible in accordance with the drawings . Sanitary piping shall pitch one-fourth (1/4" ) of an inch per foot, unless otherwise noted. PART II - PRODUCTS SANITARY AND STORM DRAINAGE - MATERIALS : All sanitary storm and indirect waste piping under slab shall be service weight, bell and spigot, cast iron. All sanitary piping above grade shall be no hub cast iron where not designated as a dwelling unit. Cast iron pipe which is buried in the ground shall be coated with tar or asphaltum. Vent piping above ground floor shall be no hub cast iron. All piping within dwelling areas shall be P.V.C. piping. FORCED MAIN MATERIAL: Piping shall be Type "M" copper. SECTION 15100 - PLUMBING 15100 - 6 In the event that weather conditions do not permit, an air test may be made subject to the approval of the Architect, and the Plumbing Inspector . At the completion of the work„ the Plumbing Sub-Contractor, in the presence of the Architect, shall operate each fixture and piece of equipment to detect defects in material and workmanship . Said fixtures and equipment shall operate with no undue noise or water hammer, and shall be made satisfactory to the Architect . All cold and hot water piping shall be tested, before being concealed and before fixtures are installed, to a hydrostatic pressure of one hundred fifty (150) pounds per square inch and provided tight at this pressure . Test pressure shall be held for at least one-half (�) hour with no drop during that time . GUARANTEE: Before the work is finally accepted, the Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall give the Owner a written guarantee to make good to the satisfaction of the General Contractor any defect in materials or workmanship which shall become apparent during the period of one (1) year from the completion and acceptance by the General Contractor . SLEE'V'ES AND CUTTING AND PATCHING: The Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall keep himself informed as to the location of pipes , etc . , and the openings he will require for his work and shall furnish and set all sleeves , frames, hangers , etc . , so that they may be built in place. All piping passing through concrete floors shall have plastic sleeves two (2) sizes larger than nominal diameter of pipe . Cast iron pipe shall, where possible, be installed before walls and floors are constructed and built in place. Every precaution shall be taken to place sleeves for all pipes before construction, and the cutting of the structure is to be avoided, if possible . SECTION 15100 - PLUi,1BING 15100 - 5 ate" WORKMANSHIP, MATERIALS AND DELIVERY: The Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall see that all his materials, including fixtures are delivered at the building when required, so as to carry on the work in the most efficient manner. All work, fixtures and equipment shall be protected at all times . The Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall make good all damage caused either directly or indirectly by his workmen. All pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury. All work shall be done by skilled workmen , in accordance with the best practice of the trade and to the satisfaction of the Architect. The Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall confine his storace of material and his construction operation to such limits as directed by the Architect. The Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall enforce instructions of the Architect regarding signs , open fires , smoking, etc . shall require his personnel to comply with these regulations while on the premises . CARTING AND HANDLING: The Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall do all carting, handling, hoisting, for his material and equipment in a safe and satisfactory manner. Any damage resulting therefrom shall be repaired or paid for by this Sub-Contractor to the satisfaction of the parties concerned. PLUMBING SYSTEM TESTS : The entire sanitary system shall be tested by the Plumbing Sub-Contractor in the presence of the Architect or his repre- sentative and the Plumbing Inspector having jurisdiction, after completion of roughing and before concealing any section from view. Each section or stack may be tested separately if desired and if permitted by the Plumbing Inspector. Test may be made by filling new systems with water so that all piping being tested will be subject to a minimum pressure equal to a ten (10 ' ) foot head of water . SECTION 15100 - PLUMBING 15100 - 4 "` RECORD DF-411INGS : The Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall maintain at the site a set of drawings on which shall be accurately shown the actual installation of all work under this Section, indicating thereon . any variations from the contract drawings , including changes in sizes, location and dimensions . For this purpose, the Owner will furnish two (2) sets of black cr blue line on white drawings . At the conclusion of the work, the Plumbing Sub- Contractor shall deliver to the General Contractor a complete set of reproducible mylar record drawings., showing the entire work as actually installed and two (2) sets of black or blue line on white prints thereof . These shall be submitted to the Architect. SHOP DRAWINGS : The Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall submit to the Architect, within thirty (30) days of the award of the Plumbing Contract, six (6) copies of shop drawings and pertinent data for the following equipment, showing sizes , capacities , grades, motor horsepower, name of manufacturer, etc : Plumbing fixtures. Water meter, sump pumps, :booster pump. Drains and water heater . K!!NUFACTURER'S NA^IEES : In addition to the above drawings, he shall submit for approval , at the same time as the drawings , seven (7) copies of a list of the manufacturer 's names for the following equipment: Soil pipe and fittings . Water pipe and fittings. Valves . Hangers . Wall hydrants (non-freeze) . AOWI SECTION 15100 - PLUMBING 15100 - 3 RELATED WORK UNDER OTHER SECTIONS : Electric wiring. Painting. Excavating and backfill . Manholes and catch basins and exterior utilities . Cutting and patching . Concrete work. Accessories. Fire protection. Vent flashing. Temporary water, sanitary facilities and fire protection. Countertop. Bathroom accessories . Exterior water, sanitary and storm services . Access panels . ORDER OF THE WORK: The Plumbing work shall be performed in harmony with the other work on the buildings and at such times as not to interfere with or hold back, the progress of` the other trades . The Plumbing work shall be installed as fast as the conditions of the buildings will allow and it must be ready for use when the buildings are complete . LAWS AND ORDINANCES: All Plumbing work shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the local and state codes . Where these speci- fications call for less than Plumbing codes, the requirements of the codes shall govern. The Plumbing Contractor shall file required notices and plans and shall secure and pay for all necessary permits for his work. DRAWINGS AND EXTENT: The Plumbing Sub-Contractor shall refer to the Plumbing drawings and the Architectural floor plans and details for a full comprehension of the extent and detail of the work to be performed. SECTION 15100 - PLUMBING 15100 - 2 Hampton Court SECTION 15100 - PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS : Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The work to be performed under this Section, without limiting the generality thereof, consists of furnishing of all labor, material, equipment, scaffolding, power, tools and rigging, except as otherwise specified., and performing all work as necessary to fully complete the Plumbing systems shown on the accompanying Plumbing drawings and as specified hereinafter . The completed Plumbing systems shall consist of soil , waste, and water connections, fixtures , drains and miscellaneous items indicated, specified or required to complete the Plumbing system which shall be left in first-class operating condition. Sanitary systems shall include all inside waste, soil and vent connections, sanitary drains and terminating 10 feet outside building wall . The cold water system shall consist of all inside piping, fixture connections, water meter and terminating 10 feet outside building wall . The hot water system shall consist of all piping and fixture connections , requiring hot water and hot water recirculating. Domestic hot water heater & tanks . Complete piping for dishwashers , clothes washers, trash chute water wash, back flow preventers, wall hydrants and hose bibbs . Complete gas piping to hot water heaters, boilers and roof top. Complete roof drains and roof drainage system terminating 10 feet outside building wall . Sump pumps and pressure reducing station. Indirect waste piping. Trash chute piping. Pipe insulation. SECTION 15100 - PLUMBING 15100 - I DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 2. Delay final adjustments of sills and doors until car is operable in shaft . 3. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimen- sions at each landing. F. Sills : At each floor landing, set sill unit accurately aligned, slightly above structural floor, to suit level of scheduled floor finish. 3. 03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing : 1 . On installation of equipment and when in full oper- ating condition, completely test equipment to dem- onstrate compliance with codes , regulations , and Contract Documents . 2. Provide necessary labor and equipment for on-site observations , testing and retesting, and cost of same as part of Work. 3. Perform performance evaluation test with detailed check lists on elevator. B. Correction of Defects : 1 . Make any changes necessary if tests indicate equip- ment is defective, at variance with specified re- quirements , or dangerous or objectionable in opera- tion. 2. Remedy any defects and pay expenses of labor and equipment of subsequent tests or on-site observa- tions until equipment is accepted. END OF SECTION - 8632 14200-5 Elevators VA quirements of dry pit area. 3. Hoistway : a. Provide positive venting of smoke and hot gases to outside for hoistways serving more than three floors . b. Locate vents in side of hoistway, min. 3 sq. ft . for each elevator car . C. Provide enclosures with flush surfaces with beams , floor slabs, or other building construc- tion having max. 2 in. projection inside gener- al line of hoistway unless top of projection is beveled at min. 75 deg. angle to horizontal . d. Bevel setbacks at min. 75 deg. angle to hori - zontal . e. Grout door entrance frames , headers , and sills solid for fire rating. f . Grout and point up all voids , holes , slots , and other opening's in hoistway to maintain fire rating and remove all nails , snap ties, form straps , and wood. g. Fire Ratings : 2 hr. for floor penetrations , 1-1/2 hr . for entrances . 3. 02 INSTALLATION A. General : 1 . Comply with applicable standards , manufacturer ' s instructions , and recommendations . 2. Comply with NFPA 70 for electrical work required during installation. OOOW 3. Coordinate structural steel for framing and metal fabrications for ladders and railings as required to comply with reviewed shop drawings as specified In Section 05500, Metal Fabrications . B. Welded Construction : 1 . Provide welded construction for installation of elevator wherever bolted connections are not re- quired for subsequent removal or for normal opera- tion, adjustment , inspection, maintenance, or re- placement of worn parts . 2. Comply with AWS standards for installation and for qualification of welding operators . C. Sound Isolation : Mount rotating and vibrating elevator equipment and components on vibration-absorption mounts , designed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure, and eliminate sources of structure-borne noise. D. Lubrication : Lubricate operating parts of system, including guides , etc. , as recommended by manufacturer . E. Alignment : 1 . Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator ' s guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances. 8632 14200-4 Elevators VA b. Walls : Plastic laminate, color as selected. C. Floor : Carpet , as selected. d. Front Entrance : Stainless steel . e. Handrail : Oak. 10. Signals : a. Ground Floor Lobby : Terminal hall station at each bank of elevators , position indicator above each car entrance in hall , terminal floor hall direction lantern - vertical style with chime. b. Floor Lobbies : Intermediate hall station at each bank of elevators , intermediate floor hall direction lantern - vertical with chime. C. Cab: Illuminated car operating station. 11 . Emergency Operation : ANSI A-17. 1 and State Codes. 12. Special Features : a. Elevator Fire Sign: ANSI A17. 1 , Appendix H, 5 in. wide x 8 in. high, pictograph. b. Handicapped Markings : ANSI handicapped recom- mendations . C. Telephone Cabinet . d. Audible Signal : Indicate passing or stopping at floor. e. Exhaust Fan. f . Emergency Car Lighting: Power by 6-volt rechargeable battery. g. Car Door Safety Device. h. Car Stall Protective Circuit. I . Emergency Return Operation : Battery operated to prevent trapping elevator occupants, re- "' chargeab 1 e. J . Inspection Operation. k. Protective mats and hooks for three sides of elevator cab. 13. Product : Dover Corp. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 PREPARATION A. Insure following items are complete before starting elevator installation by elevator installer. 1 . Pits : a. Waterproof , designed to provide dry pit area. b. Floor , approximately level . C. Provide metal ladder on each elevator pit for pit deeper than 3 ft . -0 in. d. Provide two moisture-proof light fixtures and grounded duplex receptacle adjacent to elevator pit stop switch with two adjacent elevators having three light fixtures , and three adjacent elevators having four light fixtures . e. Do not use PVC or plastic pipe in pit . 2. Sump Provisions : a. Set into pump floor and cover entire sump hole 0"Il` area with metal cover . b. Do not use sump pump or sump hole to meet re- 8632 14200-3 Elevators VA 4. Include 24 hours/day, 7 days/week emergency call - back service. 5. Exclude only repair/replacement due to misuse, abuse, accidents , or neglect caused by persons other than Installer ' s personnel . B. Warranty : 1 . Provide special project warranty, signed by Con- tractor, Installer , and Manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair/restore defective materials and installation of elevator work during warranty period. 2. Defective is defined to include, but not limited to operation or control system failures , performances below required minimums , excessive wear, unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes , unsafe conditions , need for excessive maintenance, abnormal noise or vibration, and similar unusual , unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions . 3. Warranty Period : 12 months starting on date of Substantial Completion of elevator work. C. Warranties : 1 . Provide coincidental product warranties where available for major components of elevator work. 2. Submit with maintenance manuals . PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. General Requirements : 1 . Provide manufacturer ' s standard pre-engineered elevator systems to comply with or fulfill re- quirements of elevator schedule sheets at end of Section or , at manufacturer ' s option, provide cus- tom manufactured elevator systems which will ful - fill requirements . 2. Where components are not otherwise indicated, pro- vide standard components , published by manufacturer as included in standard pre-engineered elevator systems , and as required for complete system. B. Elevator : 1 . Control : Hydraulic. 2. Capacity : 2500 lb. 3. Speed : 150 fpm. 4. Operation : Simplex selective collective. 5. Car Size : 6 ft . -8 in. x 4 ft. -3 in. 6. Travel : Refer to Drawings . 7. Power : As required. 8. Hoistway Doors : a. Size : 3 ft . -6 in. x 7 ft . -0 in. b. Finish and Material : As selected. 9. Car : a. Ceiling: White eggcrate, min. 8 ft . ceiling height under suspended ceiling. 8632 14200-2 Elevators VA SECTION 14200 ELEVATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Hydraulic Elevator. B. Related Sections : 1 . 05500, Metal Fabrications . 2. Division 15, Mechanical . 3. Division 16, Electrical . 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements : 1 . Elevator Code : Comply with ANSI /ASME A17. 1 Safety Code for Elevators , and Escalators . 2. NEII Standards : Comply with Suggested Minimum Passenger Elevator Requirements for the Handi - capped. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data : Submit manufacturer ' s complete product data for each elevator or group of elevators ; include shop drawings for information not included in or mark- ed-up on product data. B. Samples : Submit samples of primary exposed finish materials . C. Permits and Manuals : 1 . Furnish certificates or operating permits to Owner as required by governing authorities , furnish bound copies of maintenance manual with operating and maintenance instructions , emergency Informa- tion, spare parts list, and simliar information. 2. Instruct Owner ' s personnel in proper operation and maintenance of elevators . 1 . 04 WARRANTY A. Maintenance Service : 1 . Provide full maintenance service by skilled, com- petent employees of the elevator Installer for 12 months following date of Substantial Completion. 2. Include monthly preventive maintenance, performed during normal working hours . 3. Include repair/replacement of worn or defective parts or components and lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation in conformance with specified requirements . 8632 14200-1 Elevators VA DIVISION 14 '^ CONVEYING SYSTEMS A. Ensure surfaces receiving pre-cut sauna wood finish are complete and in compliance with manufacturer ' s require- ments . 3. 02 INSTALLATION A. Install all boards full length of wall or ceiling sur- faces with blind nail 5d galvanized finish nails or equivalent power stapling. B. Set all exposed nails . C. Comply with manufacturer ' s recommendations for install - ation of sauna. - END OF SECTION - 8632 13C152-3 Saunas VA A. Saunas : 1 . Lumber : Provide pre-cut sauna room of kiln dried western cedar as follows : a. Wall and Ceiling Paneling: 1 in. x 4 in. v-joint tongue-and-groove with wall paneling applied horizontally, ceiling applied across joists . b. Base, Corner , and Ceiling Trim: 5/8 in. x 1-1/4 in. and 1/2 in. x 1/2 in. clear red cedar. C. Bench and Bench Supports : Pre-assembled of 1 x 3, 2 x 4, and 2 x 2 clear red cedar. d. Heater Guard Rail : Fabricate of cedar . e. Door Assembly ,: Solid v-groove kiln dried doug- las fir rails 24 in. x 80 in. x 1-3/4 in. with 15-3/4 in. x 65 in. clear tempered safety glass insulating unit , hermetically sealed double glass complete with hardware. 2. Heater : a. Floor mounted stainless steel with triple air chambers , stainless steel tubular heating elements , and overhead safety switch. b. Size unit for application. 3. Temperature Control : a. Provide room temperature thermostat , 60 min. heater timer , heating indicating light , light switch, and time clock. b. Provide keyed lock cover transparent for view- ing of control positioning. '" 4. Miscellaneous Equipment : Provide light fixture, thermometer , bucket , dipper , and head/back rests . 5. Provide Caution Sign on Exterior of Sauna Stating: "Elderly persons and those with heart disease, high blood pressure, or other ailments should consult a physician before using a sauna. Do not exceed 30 minutes in sauna - excessive exposure can be harm- ful . " 6. Product : Viking Leisure Products Co. , Amerec Model Metos . 2. 02 FABRICATION A. Sauna Room Substrate Structure: 1 . Insulation : a. Provide foil faced fiberglass walls and ceiling with aluminum foil face toward inside of sauna room. b. Refer to Section 0 7200, Insulation. 2. Plasterboard: a. One hour fire rated gypsum walboard on walls and ceilings before precutting wood paneling. b. Refer to Section 09250, Gypsum Board. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 INSPECTION 8632 13052-2 Saunas VA SECTION 13052 SAUNAS PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Lumber. 2. Heater . 3. Control and Accessories . B. Related Sections : 1 . 07200, Insulation . 2. 09250, Gypsum Board. 3. Division 16, Electrical . 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Quality Control : 1 . Field Measurements : a. Take field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of Work. b. Allow for adjustments within specified toler- ances wherever taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay Work. B. Coordination : Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be built into other Work for installation and related Work ; coordinate delivery with other Work to avoid delay. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data : Submit manufacturer ' s detailed technical data for materials , fabrication, and installation, in- cluding catalog cuts of anchors , hardware, fastenings , and accessories . B. Shop Drawings : Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of assemblies not fully described by pro- duct drawings , templates , and instructions for Install - ation of anchorage devices built into other Work. C. Samples : 1 . Submit full range of color samples for each type of unit required. 2. Submit 6 in. square samples of each color and fin- ish on same substrate to be used in Work, for color verification after selections have been made. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS 8632 13052-1 Saunas VA DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION A. Factory-assembled with all joints welded or lockseamed. B. Provide one expansion joint per floor. C. Interior of chute flush assembled without rivets , bolts , or clips . PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 INSTALLATION A. General : 1 . Comply with manufacturer ' s instructions and recom- mendations , NFPA 82 ; ensuring expansion is provided for . 2. Coordinate flashing with roofing and roof flashing. 3. Comply with fire resistance rating requirements for installation of doors and other elements penetrat- ing rated construction. B. Fire Rated Chutes : Bed lining joints in special cement recommended by manufacturer for compliance with rating requirements . C. Fire Stopping: 1 . Fill annular space between chute wall and each floor/roof deck construction with mineral fiber insulation, packed to 10-20 lbs . density per cu. f t . 2. Provide 16 ga. zinc-coated steel sheet retainer flange under insulation, anchored to deck construc- tion and not anchored to chute wall . 3. 02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean all surfaces at time of installation and before Final Acceptance of Owner . B. Repair all surfaces damaged during installation. - END OF SECTION - O 8632 11175-3 Chutes and Collectors VA verification after selections have been made. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. Fire Rated Rubbish Chutes : 1 . General : Manufacturer' s standard steel jacketed chute system, lined with refractory material for 2 hr. fire resistance, bearing UL labels ; chute sizes , door sizes „ door locations , and accessory items as indicated ; hopper-type self-closing and self- latching doors , except as otherwise indicated. 2. Intake Door Units ': UL B Label , 1 . 5 hr . , 30 minute rise 250 deg. F; AISI 302/304 stainless steel with satin finish or directional polish. 3. Locks : 5-pin/disk cylinder locks , keyed alike ; 10 keys per door . 4. Foot Operators : Equip hopper-type door units with manufacturer ' s standard foot-pedal operator . 5. Door Interlocks : Provide electrical interlock on each intake door, wired into system which is com- plete with sensors and controls to lock door and prevent opening when : a. Any other intake door is open. b. Heat in chute exceeds predetermined temper- ature. C. Chute sanitizer unit is in operation. d. Manual control switch is energized. 6. Roof Vent Unit : Manufacturer' s standard full -size through-roof unit „ extended to 4 ft . -0 in. above roof ; with bird/spark screen and rain cap, metal counterflashing, and clamping ring. B. Chute Accessories : 1 . General : Manufacturer' s standard accessories , anchors , fasteners , and trim units as indicated and as required for complete chute system. 2. Fire Sprinklers : NFPA No. 13 heads , one above highest intake door , one at alternate intake doors . 3. Flushing Spray Unit : Locate spray head in chute above highest intake door for 3/4 in. hot water piping connection. 4. Sanitizer : Equip unit with 1 gal . fluid tank, proportioning valve, and control valves with water bypass . C. Trash Compactor : 1 . Top-fed unit extruding pre-compacted waste hori - zontally into container . 2. Automatic operation with manual on/off , reset, and reverse switches . 3. Product : Auto-Pak Model 1830-2000, International Dynetics , Compackager Inc. 2. 02 FABRICATION 8632 11175-2 Chutes and Collectors VA SECTION 11175 CHUTES AND COLLECTORS PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Chute. 2. Sprinkler System. 3. Trash Compactor . B. Related Sections : 1 . 03300, Cast- In-Place Concrete. 2. 04200, Unit Masonry. 3. Division 15, Mechanical . 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards : 1 . NFPA No. 82 Section 70. 2. UL Labeled 1-1/2 hour , B temp. rise 30 min. 250 deg. max. B. Source Quality Control : 1 . Field Measurements : a. Take field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of Work. b. Allow for adjustments within specified toler- ances wherever taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay Work. C. Coordination : Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be built into other Work for installation and related Work ; coordinate delivery with other Work to avoid delay. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data : Submit manufacturer ' s detailed technical data for materials , fabrication, and installation, in- cluding catalog cuts of anchors , hardware, fastenings, and accessories . B. Shop Drawings : Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of assemblies not fully described by pro- duct drawings, templates , and instructions for install - ation of anchorage devices built into other Work. C. Samples : 1 . Submit full range of color samples for each type of unit required. 2. Submit 6 in. square samples of each color and fin- ish on same substrate to be used in Work, for color 8632 11175-1 Chutes and Collectors VA DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 INSPECTION Aw, A. Examine substrates and adjoining surfaces before in- stallation to ensure adjacent Work has been completed. 3. 02 INSTALLATION A. General : 1 . Install specialties to manufacturer ' s recommenda- tions . 2. Do not install before completion of Work by other trades on adjacent surfaces . 3. Coordinate requirements for cutouts and openings in wall for recessed mounted units in conjunction with Section 04200, Unit Masonry, or Section 09250, Gypsum Board. B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets : 1 . Comply with NFPA 10, securely fasten to structure, square and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer ' s instructions . 3. 03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean all surfaces at time of installation and before final acceptance by Owner . B. Repair all surfaces damaged during installation. - END OF SECTION - *001, 8632 10950-4 Miscellaneous VA Specialties keyed different from all other locks for Pro- ject . b. Provide min. 1.000 key changes for lock type supplied. 00%, C. Lock Unit : 5--pin tumbler cam type supplied with 3 change keys per lock. D. Bath Accessories : 1 . Curtain Rod and Curtain: Bobrick B207. 2. Towel Bar : Bobrick B674. 3. Robe Hook: Bobrick B672. 4. Medicine Cabinet : 14 x 24, recessed with louvered door and 4 adjustable shelves . E. Roller Blinds : 1 . Fabric : a. Tearproof woven fiberglass coated with sun- resistant vinyl plastic, fire-retardant and fade-resistant . b. Color : Blackout type, as selected. C. Double needle stitch both hems and backstitch. 2. Roller : Wood with heavy duty springs and positive locking mechanism. 3. Pull : 1-1/4 in. x 5/16 in. hard maple slat , hard- braided large diameter cotton cord attached to slat with screw eye and cord clasp. 4. Mounting: Inside brackets . F. Drapery Track: 1 . Traverse Rod : 0. 0245 in. steel , telescoping, white finish. 2. Curtain Carrier : Molded acetal resin rollers with swivel -action drapery carrier. 3. Mounting : 0. 060 in. steel wall return bracket . G. Closet Shelving: 1 . Type : Vinyl coated wire type with mounting hard- ware and integral clothes rod as required. 2. Product : Clairson Industries Model Closet Maid. H. Residential Appliances : 1 . Refrigerator : Whirlpool Model ET14JK. 2. Range : Whirlpool Model RF365BXT. 3. Range Hood : Whirlpool Model Series 4000. 4. Dishwasher : Whirlpool Model DU4000XR. 5. Garbage Disposal : Whirlpool Model Insector Badger 5. 6. Cooktop : Whirlpool Model BC8200. 7. Wall Oven: Whirlpool Model RB120 or RB160. I . Fountain System: 1 . Provide fountain basin, interconnection of plumbing to equipment , reservoirs , and interconnection to HVAC system as detailed. 2. Coordinate placement of fountain equipment and finish with separate Contractor retained by Owner . 8632 10950-3 Miscellaneous VA Specialties B. Shop Drawings : Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of assemblies not fully described by pro- duct drawings, templates , and Instructions for Install - ation of anchorage devices built into other Work . C. Samples : 1 . Submit full range of color samples for each type of unit required. 2. Submit 6 in. square samples of each color and fin- ish on same substrate to be used in Work, for color verification after selections have been made. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. Fire Extinguishers : 1 . Provide fire extinguishers of types indicated for each fire extinguisher cabinet (FECB) and other locations indicated. 2. Type : a. Multi -Purpose Dry Chemical Type (2A-10BC-FE) : UL rated 2-A; 10-BC, 5- lb. nom. capacity, enameled steel container . B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets (FECB) : 1 . Manufacturer ' s standard units of suitable size for housing fire extinguishers of type and capacity indicated, and as follows . 2. Type: a. Recessed : Cabinet box recessed in wall to suit trim style indicated. b. Trimless Style : Frame of cabinet box finishes flush with wall finish and door face. 3. Exposed Trim: a. One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface. b. Flat : Square edges with 1/4 to 1/2 in. back- bend. 4. Door Material : 16 ga. sheet steel , field paint . 5. Door Style : Full glass front . C. Mailboxes : 1 . Mailbox : a. General : Recessed wall mounted vertical type units . b. Material of Box : 0. 025 in. thick terneplate. C. Material of Door and Exposed Frame: 0. 085 in. thick extruded aluminum. d. Finish : Anodized aluminum color as selected by Architect . e. Doors swing on concealed pivots . f . Compartment Numbers : Engraved numerals on door front . 2. Locks : a. Provide each mail compartment door with lock, 8632 10950-2 Miscellaneous VA Specialties SECTION 10960 MISCELLANEOUS; SPEC:I ALT I ES PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Fire Extinguisher Cabinets . 2. Toilet Accessories . 3. Bath Accessories. 4. Window Treatment . 5. Closet Shelving. 6. Residential Appliances . 7. Fire Extinguishers . 8. Postal Boxes . 9. Fountain System. B. Related Sections : 1 . 02200, Earthwork. 2. 03300, Cast- In-Place Concrete. 3. 04200, Unit Masonry. 4. 05500, Metal Fabrications . 5. 09250, Gypsum Board. 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards : 1 . Postal Regulations : a. Do not use less than 3 and nor more than 7 mail compartments per single frame. b. Comply with latest regulations of USPS for materials , sizes , construction, and installa- tion. B. Source Quality Control : 1 . Field Measurements : a. Take field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of work. b. Allow for adjustments within specified toler- ances where taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay Work. C. Coordination : Furnish Inserts and anchorages which must be built into other Work for installation of related Work; coordinate delivery with other Work to avoid delay. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data : Submit manufacturer ' s detailed technical data for materials , fabrication, and installation, in- cluding catalog cuts of anchors , hardware, fastenings, and accessories . 8632 10950- 1 Miscellaneous VA Specialties DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 4. Galvanized Iron : Clean as recommended by paint manufacturer. 5. Iron and Steel : SSPC-SP 2, hand tool cleaning or SSPC SP 3, power tool cleaning. 6. Exercise care to prevent damage to shop coat . 7. Touch up abraded or marred shop coats with paint used for priming. C. Gypsum Drywall : Repair minor cracks and holes with finishing compound ; sand smooth after drying. D. Woodwork : 1 . General : a. Sandpaper woodwork to remove roughness , loose edges, slivers , or splinters and then brush to remove dust . b. Treat surfaces of open-grained woods with two coats of paste filler. C. Remove surplus filler. After primer or paste filler has dried, fill nail holes and other Indentations with putty, flush with adjacent surfaces . d. Sand wood surfaces smooth with No. 00 sandpaper and remove dust . 2. Painted Woodwork : a. Clean knots , pitch streaks , or visible sap spots of residue and treat with two coats of "Formula WP-576 Knot Sealer" (Western Pine Association) . b. Prime millwork on all sides before install - '"" a t ion. 3. 02 APPLICATION A. Mixing: 1 . Mix materials thoroughly and strain if necessary. 2. Do not change ready-mixed materials except accord- ing to manufacturer ' s instructions . B. Application : 1 . Apply materials with care to uniform and proper film thickness . 2. Apply with minimum brush marks . 3. Insure finishes are uniform in sheen, color , and texture. 4. Allow coats to dry thoroughly before succeeding coats are applied. 3. 03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove paint spots , oil or stains upon adjacent sur- faces not requiring painting and leave entire job clean. - END OF SECTION - 6632 09900-4 Painting VA a. For purpose of designating type and quality of Work, Specifications are based on products of Benjamin Moore. b. Products of other manufacturers shall fully match type and quality of product specified. C. Alternate Manufacturer : Glidden, Pratt & Lambert , Pittsburgh Paints . B. Exterior Surfaces : 1 . Metal - Galvanized : a. Primer : 1 coat , Iron Clad Retardo Rust Inhibi - tive Paint . b. Finish : 2 coats , :Impervo Enamel . 2. Metal - Aluminum: a. Primer : 1 coat , Iron Clad Retardo Rust Inhibi - tive Paint . b. Finish : 1 coat , Impervo Enamel . C. Interior Surfaces : 1 . Gypsum Board - Satin : a. Primer : 1 coat , Latex Quick Dry Prime Seal . b. Finish : 2 coats , Satin Impervo Enamel . 2. Wood - Painted, Semi -Gloss : a. Primer : 1 coat , Moore' s Alkyd Enamel Under- body. b. Finish : 2 coats , Alkyd Dulamel . 3. Interior Surfaces - Restrooms : a. Primer : i coat , Latex Quick Dry Prime Seal . b. Finish : 1 coat , Tile-Like Enamel and 1 coat , Tile-Like Clear Glaze Semi -Gloss. 4. Metal - Gloss : a. Primer : 1 coat , Iron Clad Retardo Rust Inhibi - tive Primer for ferrous metal and 1 coat , Iron Clad Galvanized Metal Primer . b. Finish : 2 coats , Impervo Enamel . PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 PREPARATION A. General : 1 . Prepare surfaces to receive paint ; thoroughly clean off substances that may interfere with proper ad- hesion of paint . 2. Fill dents , cracks , hollow places , open joints , and other irregularities with filler suitable for pur- pose and, after setting, sand to smooth finish. 3. Prime surfaces not more than 8 hrs . after clean- s ng. B. Metals : 1 . Clean metal surfaces of foreign matter before priming coat is applied. 2. Remove grease and oil with cleaner manufactured for purpose. 3. Aluminum: Degrease and steam clean per SSPC-SP 1 , solvent cleaning. 8632 09900-3 Painting VA 6. Actual Wall Surfaces and Other Building Components : . Duplicate painted finishes of acceptable samples as directed by Architect . 1 . 04 DELI VERY, STORAGE, ANI) HANDLING A. Handling: 1 . Do not paint when air is dust- laden or when weather and temperature conditions are unsuitable. 2. Do not paint exterior isurfaces in damp or rainy weather . 3. Comply with manufacturer ' s recommendation with respect to application and drying period tempera- tures and application conditions . B. Fire Protection : 1 . Place materials which might constitute fire hazard Into metal containers . 2. Remove from premises at close of each days ' Work. 3. Take every precaution to avoid damage by fire. C. Surface Protection : 1 . Provide suitable coverings to protect surfaces not requiring painting. D. Accessories : 1 . Remove or protect items which are not to be painted and which were placed before painting. 2. Reposition or remove protection upon completion of each space. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. General : 1 . Tint primers and undercoats to approximate shade of selected finish coat color . 2. For deep tone finish colors , use Deep Base Primers recommended by manufacturer for surface. 3. Dry Mil Thickness : a. Comply with manufacturer ' s specifications . b. If thinning of materials is performed, apply additional coats to achieve full film thickness of coats specified. 4. Color Selections : a. If color is not listed for any specific area or item, it does not relieve Contractor of respon- sibility for providing colors to be selected. b. Color selection made by Architect is to deter- mine basic color required for surface. C. Colors with same designation but produced from two or more sources shall match when viewed from distance of 24 in. or more. d. Final application of colors shall match pre- pared samples approved by Architect . 5. Manufacturer : 8632 09900-2 Painting VA SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Primers . 2. Finish Paints . 3. Sealers . 4. Stains . 5. Varnish. 1 . 02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance : 1 . Refer to Drawings and :schedules for extent of Work. 2. Work includes painting and finishing interior and extrior exposed items and surfaces throughout Pro- ject , except as Indicated. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and coats of paint specified are in additi.on to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections . 4. Work includes field paiinting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts , including color coding, and of exposed hangers ,, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment in- stalled as part of Division 15 and 16. 5. Do not include painting of factory finished or installer finished items , finished metal surfaces , operating parts , and labels or nameplates . 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Before beginning Work„ Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be painted. B. Product Data : Submit manufacturer ' s data, application instructions , and labial analysis for each coating maternal . C. Samples : 1 . Submit samples for Architect ' s review of color and texture only. 2. Resubmit samples if requested until required sheen, color , and texture is achieved. 3. 12 in. x 12 in. Hardboard : Provide 2 samples of each color and material , with texture to simulate finish conditions . 4. Wood Surfaces : Provide two 4 in. x 8 in. samples for natural and stained wood finish. 5. Concrete Masonry : Provide two 4 in. square samples of masonry for each type of finish and color , de- fining filler , prime, and finish coats . 8632 09900-1 Painting VA A. Vacuum carpet with commercial vacuum, with rotating agitator or beater in nozzle. B. Remove soil spots in accordance with manufacturer ' s recommendations . C. Protect carpet from damage and soiling. D. Use non-staining cover material for protection. E. Tape joints in protective covering. - END OF SECTION - 8632 09680-4 Carpet VA drawings . 3. Maintain direction of pattern, texture, and lay of pile. 4. Extend carpet into closets and offsets , and under movable equipment of rooms and spaces shown or Scheduled to receive carpet , including recessed covers within those spaces . 5. Provide cutouts as required for removable access covers in substrates except do not cut out for floor closer cover plates . 6. Bind edges neatly and secure to substrate. 7. Cut only 3 sides where feasible to provide carpet flap in lieu of fully removable cutout . 8. Cut openings in carpet for electrical outlets , piping, and other penetrations . 9. Maintain close tolerances so edges of carpet will be covered by plates and escutcheons. 10. Install edge strip at every location where edge of carpet is exposed to traffic, unless otherwise indicated. 11 . Install in single lengths wherever possible, sec- ured in accordance with manufacturer' s directions. B. Glue-Down Installation : 1 . Install test sample to demonstrate proper adhesion and removal capability of bonding system. 2. Cut and fit sections of carpet before application of adhesive. 3. Apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer ' s directions , complying with procedure demonstrated AOW to be satisfactory by test sample. 4. Butt carpet seams and edges tightly together and cement edges of backing together with continuous bead of latex cement in accordance with manufactur- er ' s directions . 5. Eliminate air pockets and roll to ensure uniform band over entire area. 6. Promptly remove adhesive from carpet face. C. Tackless Carpet Stripping : 1 . Nail to substrate and strip entire perimeter of each carpeted space and at obstructions and cut- outs . 2. Locate to allow concealment of carpet edge between stripping and base of wall . D. Resilient Bases : 1 . Secure bases to surfaces with waterproof cement . 2. Make joints tight . 3. Keep top and bottom edges in firm contact with adjacent surfaces . 4. Use longest lengths possible. 5. Straight pieces less than 23 in. long not permitted. 3. 03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 8632 09680-3 Carpet VA PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A.. Carpet : 1 . Apartments : 30 oz. 2. Corridors : 38 oz., 3. Manufacturer : Philadelphia Carpets Model Benton Harbour or North Shore„ B. Carpet Cushion : 1 . Rippled-surface sponge rubber with top fabric sheet , FS ZZ-C-00811 ; passing pill test , ASTM D2859 ; 68 oz. per sq. yd. , 0. 44 in. thick. C. Accessories : 1 . Carpet Adhesive: Release-type as recommended by manufacturer . 2. Tackless Carpet Stripping: a. Water-resistant plywood strips , 9/32 in. thick with angular spins protruding from top. b. Provide two rows of pins . 3. Edge Strip : Color as selected from manufacturer ' s standard color range. 4. Seaming Tape : "Rubber -Loc" (Reiling) , "Rug Sealz" (Naugatuck Chemical Div. ) . 5. All Other Materials : Manufacturer ' s standard for product specified. D. Resilient Bases : 1 . Solid homogeneous vinyl toe base in continuous lengths . 2. Size : 0. 080 in. ga. x 4 in. high. 3. Accessories : Provide inside and outside corners , and end stops where applicable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate installation of carpet not to delay occupancy of building or interfere with completion of construction. B. Examine substrates , adjoining construction, and condi- tions under which Work is installed. C. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory condi - tions have been corrected. 3. 02 INSTALLATION A. General : 1 . Comply with manufacturer ' s instructions and recom- mendations . 2. Place seams at locations indicated on accepted shop 8632 09680-2 Carpet VA SECTION 09660 CARPET PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Carpet . 2. Carpet Cushion. 3. Resilient Bases . 4. Accessories . 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria : 1 . Carpet Flammability : a. Pass pill test: , ASTM D2859 (DOC FF- 1 -70) . b. Radiant Panel Test ; Rating of 0. 22 for corri - dors , circulation spaces , and rooms larger than 400 sq. f t . ; ASTM 1?648. C. Radiant Panel Test ; Ratio of 0. 45 for corri - dors , circulation spaces , and rooms larger than 400 sq. f t . ; ASTM 1?648. d. Tunnel Test : Max. flame spread 75, ASTM E84 . e. Smoke Density Test : Density of 450 or less ; NFPA No. 258. 2. HUD Certification : Comply with HUD Use of Mater- ials Bulletin UM-44c, and carry current listing in HUD Certified Products Directory. 3. Static Electricity : 3 , 5 KV max. @ 70 deg. F and 20 percent relative humidity, AATCC 134. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples : 18 in. x 27 in. sample of each color , type, and pattern with 6 in . long carpet edge strip. B. Shop Drawings : Submit showing layout , seam locations, and edge strip locations with direction of pattern and lay of pile indicated and details of cutouts . C. Manufacturer ' s Data. D. Certificates : Submit certified laboratory test reports for fire hazard classification of carpet and carpet cushion. E. Maintenance Instructions : Submit 2 copies for care, cleaning, maintenance, and repair. F. Spare Parts : 1 . Deliver all unused carpet and scraps larger than 2 OOW sq. ft . in area and 12 in. wide to Owner . 2. Store where directed. 8632 09680-1 Carpet VA and tear throughout construction period, free from any indication of use or damage at time of acceptance by Owner . - END OF SECTION - 6632 09650-5 Resilient Flooring VA B. Edging Strips : Installl in continuous lengths at ex- posed edges of resilient flooring. C. Prime Coat : 1 . Apply primer to concrete surfaces . 2. Work well into surface,. 3. Use quantity to assure complete surface coverage with non-absorptive base. 4. Allow primer to dry before applying adhesive. 5. Prime coat may be omitted if recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer . D. Adhesive : 1 . Apply to substrate with properly notched steel trowels . 2. Allow adhesive to become tacky before applying resilient flooring. E. Extensions : 1 . Extend resilient flooring into closets and offsets, and under movable equipment of rooms and spaces shown or Scheduled to :receive resilient flooring, including recessed covers within those spaces . 2. Extend unexposed edges of flooring under set-on bases and similar trim work. 3. Scribe, cut , and -fit exposed edges of flooring and base adjoining other Work accurately and neatly with tight joint . F. Sheet Flooring: 1 . Lay with minimal ;seams and economical use of material . 2. Match edges for color shading and pattern at seams . 3. Use conventional full spread adhesive method, unless indicated otherwise. 4. Prepare seams with special routing tool and heat weld with vinyl thread. G. Resilient Bases : 1 . Secure bases to surfaces with waterproof cement . 2. Make joints tight . 3. Keep top and bottom edges in firm contact with adjacent surfaces . 4. Use longest lengths possible. 5. Straight pieces less than 23 in. long not permitted. 3. 03 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Cleaning: 1 . Not more than 4 days before acceptance or occupancy by Owner, clean resilient flooring and base. 2. Wash thoroughly with cleaner recommended by flooring manufacturer, to manufacturer ' s recommen- dations . B. Protection : Protect 'Work from damage and normal wear 8632 09650-4 Resilient Flooring VA C. Accessories : 1 . Vinyl Wall Base : FS SS-W-40, Type II ; 4 in. high ; 0. 080 in. ga. , with matching stops , preformed cor- ner units , standard top-set cove, unless otherwise Indicated. 2. Resilient Edge Strips : Min. 1 in. width ; 1/8 in. ga. , tapered bullnose edge, color to match floor- ing or as selected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 PREPARATION A. Examine substrates and adjoining construction, and con- ditions under which Work is to be installed. B. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory condi - tions detrimental to proper and timely completion of Work have been corrected. C. Surface Preparation : 1 . Clean substrate to remove deleterious substances which would impair Work. 2. Fill cracks , holes , and depressions in substrate. 3. Surface shall be smooth, level , and at proper ele- vation. 4. Surface shall not vary more than 1/8 in. in 10 ft . in any direction from level , plumb, or slopes shown. 5. Remove roughness and protrusions from concrete surfaces by grinding. 6. Use compounds for filling complying with resilient flooring manufacturer ' s recommendations . 7. Prime, seal , or cover substrates which manufacturer of resilient flooring recommend be primed, sealed, or covered. D. Bond and Moisture Test : 1 . Using specified flooring materials , install 3 ft . x 3 ft . panels spaced 50 ft . apart throughout des- ignated floor area. 2. Install test panels with correct pattern direction using adhesive to be used in actual installation. 3. If panels are securely bonded after 72 hrs . , sur- face is to be considered dry and clean of foreign materials . 4. Test panels can be considered securely bonded if unusual force is required to lift from floor and adhesive clings to both floor and back of resili - ent flooring. 3. 02 INSTALLATION A. Standards : Install resilient flooring in accordance with manufacturer ' s instructions . 8632 09650-3 Resilient Flooring VA 3. 6 in. x 9 in. samples of sheet flooring. 4. Other materials as requested. C. Certification for Fire Test Performance: Submit certi - fication from independent testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction resilient flooring complies with fire test performance requirements . D. Maintenance Instructions : Submit 2 copies manufactur- er ' s recommended maintenance practices for each type resilient flooring and accessory required. E. Extra Stock : 1 . Deliver stock of maintenance materials to Owner . 2. Furnish maintenance materials from same manufac- tured lot as materials installed and enclosed in protective packaging with appropriate identifying labels . 3. Sheet Flooring: Furnish min. 5 lin. yds . for each type, color , and pattern installed. 1 . 04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements : 1 . Maintain min. 65 deg. 'F in spaces to receive resi - lient flooring min. 48 hours before installation, during installlation, and min. 48 hours after installation. 2. Store resilient flooring materials in spaces where they will be installed for min. 48 hours before beginning installation. 3. Subsequently, maintain min. 55 deg. F in areas where Work is completed. B. Coordination : 1 . Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations , including painting, have been completed. 2. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs until latter have been cured and are suffi - ciently dry to achieve bond with adhesive as deter- mined by resilient flooring manufacturer ' s recom- mended bond and moisture test. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. General : Provide color and patterns as indicated or , If not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer ' s standards . B. Filled Vinyl Sheet : 1 . Provide vinyl sheet products whose vinyl wearlayer complies with description in FS L-F-475. 2. Product : Tarkett Model Response Designer Sheet Vinyl . 8632 09650-2 Resilient Flooring VA SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Vinyl Sheet . 2. Base. 3. Accessories . 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Quality Control : 1 . Manufacturer : Provide each type of resilient flooring and accessories produced by single manufacturer including recommended primers , ad- hesives , and sealants and leveling compounds . B. Special Requirements : 1 . Fire Test Performance : Provide resilient flooring complying with following fire test performance criteria as determined by independent testing lab- oratory acceptable? to authorities having jurisdic- tion. 2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF) : Following min. rating per ASTM E648. a. 0. 45 watts per sq. cm. b. 0. 22 watts per sq. cm. 3. Flame Spread : Max. 75, ASTM E84. 4. Smoke Developed : Max. 450, ASTM E84. 5. Smoke Density : Max. 450, ASTM E662. C. Qualifications : 1 . Installer : Engage installer , certified in writing by resilient flooring manufacturer, qualified for installation of sheet vinyl employing heat welded seams . 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data : Submit manufacturer ' s technical data for each type of resilient flooring and accessory. B. Samples : 1 . Initial Selection Purposes : Submit manufacturer ' s standard color charts in form of actual sections of resilient flooring, including accessories , showing full range of colors and patterns available, for each type of resilient flooring required. 2. Verification Purposes : Submit following samples of each type, color , and pattern of resilient flooring required, showing full range of color and pattern variations . 8632 09650-1 Resilient Flooring VA Hartco/Tibbals Flooring Co. , Pennwood, Permagrain Products , Inc. B. Resilient Pad : 1/2 in. thick multi -cellular , closed cell , flexible polyethylene plastic foam. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 PREPARATION A. Existing Conditions : 1 . Do not install until all masonry, plastering, and painting is completed and overhead work is finished. 2. Insure that subfloor is dry, free from materials , and broom clean. 3. Install over thoroughly, seasoned concrete base which has been finished hard, smooth, and level exactly depth below finished floor level corres- ponding with thickness of wood flooring. 4. Insure that subfloor hales no projections , ridges , or waves that will form uneven bearing for wood flooring. 3. 02 INSTALLATION A. General : Comply with f• loori.ng manufacturer ' s instruc- tions and recommendations for preparation of substrates to receive wood flooring, including application of pri - mers , vapor barriers , moisture barriers , and adhesives . B. Conditioning: 1 . Do not proceed with wood floor work or delivery of materials until building is enclosed and humidity has stablized at approximate level anticipated for sustained occupancy. 2. Deliver wood flooring in advance of installation as recommended by manufacturer , min. 7 days before installation, to permit natural adjustment of mois- ture content . 3. Open packages which are sealed against moisture penetration. C. Adhesive Installation : Comply with manufacturer ' s recommendations for type of adhesive and method of installation, for a permanent , water-resistant bond to substrate. - END OF SECTION - 8632 09550-2 Wood Flooring VA SECTION 09550 WOOD FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Plastic Impregnated Parquet Flooring. 2. Resilient Pad - Exercise Room. B. Related Sections : 1 . 06100, Rough Carpentry. 2. 09900, Painting. 1 . 02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data : Submit technical data and installation instructions for each type of wood flooring. B. Samples : Submit sets of range samples complete with finish. 1 . 03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements ;: 1 . Maintain temperature al: 65 deg. F. or higher for period of one week before, during, and 72 hrs . following Installation,. 2. Store materials at Project site for sufficient length of time to equalize with site conditions . 3. Open cartons min. 48 hrs . before installation. 1 . 04 WARRANTY A. Submit 3-year warranty signed by manufacturer , install - er , and Contractor agreeing to repair or replace wood flooring which breaks its anchorage or bond with sub- strate or fails to perform as required, due to failure of materials or installation and not due to unusual exposure to moisture or other abusive forces or ele- ments not anticipated for application. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. Plastic Impregnated Parquet Flooring: 1 . Manufacturer ' s standard 5/16 in. thick, acrylic plastic impregnated, gamma radiation treated. 2. Finish : Prefinished. 3. Specie : As selected from hardwood selection of manufacturer by Architect . 4. Color : As selected from manufacturer ' s standards. 5. Manufacturer : Applied Radiant Energy Corp. , 8632 09550-1 Wood Flooring VA 3. 02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tolerances : oow 1 . Main Runners : Level to within 1/4 in. in 10 ft . 2. Cross Runners : a. Center-to-Center : +/- 1/32 in. , non-cumulative beyond 12 ft. b. Intersections : 90 (leg. +/- 1/2 deg. C. Vertical Alignment ;: Max. 0. 015 in. 3. Gaps : Max. 0. 020 in. - END OF SECTION - 8632 09510-3 Acoustical Ceilings VA 2. 01 MATERIALS A. Suspension System: ,Oft, 1 .1 . As required to support acoustical units , fixtures , and other components as indicated, including an- chorages , hangers , runners , cross runners , splines , clips , moldings , fasteners , and other members , de- vices , and accessories . 2. Comply with requirements of ASTM C635. 3. Hanger Wire : Min. 12 ga. galvanized steel . 4. Exposed Direct Hung Steel Suspension System: a. Exposed Runner Type : Single Web. b. Structural Class : Intermediate-Duty System. C. Finish : Painted, white. 5. Edge Moldings : a. Metal channel type with single flange exposed. b. Finish : Painted, white. B. Ceiling Panels : 1 . Flame Resistance: ASTM E84, Test Procedure. a. Flame Spread: 15. b. Fuel Contributed : 15. C. Smoke Developed : 0-15. 2. Light Reflective Coefficients : ASTM C523. 3. Panel Type : a. Size : 24 in. x 24 in. b. Color : White.. C. Edge Treatment : Square, lay- in. d. Pattern : Heavy fissured. e. Manufacturer : U. S. Gypsum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 INSTALLATION A. General : 1 . Install acoustical material and suspension system, including necessary hangers , grillage, splines , and other supporting hardware to ASTM C636. 2. Suspend grid system true and level and tied in with concealed members to eliminate swaying or cocking of main and cross runners . 3. Install edge moldings straight and tight to abut- ting surfaces , mitered at corners . 4. Frame openings in grid system as required for re- cessed lighting fixtures , diffusers , etc. , with main tees parallel to sides and ends of opening. 5. Patterns : Center the or board pattern both dir- ections in each major space or room and adjust as necessary to insure edge pieces are min. 1/2 unit In width. 6. Align joints in both directions . B. Install primary suspension members and mechanical sus- ,,, pension system to support required loads with max. 1/360 deflection of span. 8632 09510-2 Acoustical Ceilings VA SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Ceiling Suspension System. 2. Ceiling Panels . B. Related Sections : 1 . Division 15, Mechanical . 2. Division 16, Electrical . 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards : 1 . Acoustical Materials : FS SS-S-118. 2. Suspension System: ASTM C635 for materials, C636 for installation. B. Special Requirements : 1 . Surface Burning Characteristics : Flame spread - max. 25, smoke developed - max. 50, per ASTM E84, UL listed marked. 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated by reference to design designation in UL Fire Resistance Direc- tory, tested per ASTM E119. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples : Submit 6 in. x 4 in. square samples of each exposed acoustical unit ; 24 in. long samples of each exposed suspension member and molding. B. Extra Stock : 1 . Furnish extra materials matching products installed equaling 2 percent of acoustical units and exposed suspension members installed. 2. Package materials in protective covering and iden- tify with approporate labels . 1. 04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Scheduling: 1 . Do not install acoustical materials unless temper- ature and humidity approximate interior conditions of occupied building. 2. Maintain temperature and humidity during and after installation. 3. Insure all Work is complete in area to receive acoustical materials . PART 2 PRODUCTS 6632 09510-1 Acoustical Ceilings VA A. Clean surfaces on completion of grouting. B. Remove all grout haze to manufacturer ' s Instructions . 000k C. Polish surface with soft cloth. D. Protect against damage and replace damaged items at no cost to Owner . - END OF SECTION - 8632 09300-5 Tile VA 3. Out Corners : Bullnose. 4. In Corners : Rounded. 5. Jambs : Bullnose where tile projects from jamb. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 PREPARATION A. Report all unacceptable surfaces and do not tile until surface conditions meet requirements specified. B. Concrete Substrate : 1 . Etch with 10 percent solution of muriatic acid as required to removes curing compound or other sub- stances which would Interfere with bonding of mor- tar or adhesive. 2. Rinse with water to remove all traces of acid. 3. Seal substrate as required with material recommend- ed by mortar or adhesive manufacturer . 3. 02 INSTALLATION A. Layout : 1 . Lay tile to minimize cuts less than one-half tile in size. 2. Locate cuts in walls and floors at least conspicu- ous location. 3. Lay out tile wainscots to next full the beyond dimensions indicated. 4. Align all wall joints 'to achieve straight uniform grout lines , plumb and level . 5. Align floor joints to achieve straight uniform grout lines parallel with walls . B. Placing: 1 . Clean cut edges before installing. 2. Smooth exposed cut edges . 3. Fit against trim and accessories so escutcheons , plates , and collars will completely overlap cut edges . C. Setting Methods : 1 . Floors , Interior Concrete Subfloor : TCA Method F113-86, latex-portland cement mortar and grout . 2. Walls , Interior - Gypsum Board : TCA Method W223-86, organic adhesive and latex-portland cement grout . 3. Bathtub Walls : TCA Method B412-86, glass mesh mortar unit , latex-portland cement mortar and grout . 4. Shower Walls : TCA Method B415-86, glass mesh mortar unit , latex-portland cement mortar and grout . 5. Thresholds : TCA Method TH611-86. 3. 03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 8632 09300-4 Tile VA a. Flat tile. b. Size : 4-1/4 in. x 4-1/4 in. C. Face: Plain with square edge. d. Mounting: Pregrout:ed sheets of tiles factory- ., assembled and grouted with manufacturer ' s Stan- dard elastomeric material . e. Product : American Olean. 3. Trim Units : a. Provide tile grim units to match characteris- tics of adjoining flat tile. b. Size : As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile, where applica- ble. C. Shapes : Select from manufacturer' s standard shapes . C. Stone Thresholds : 1 . General : Provide stone uniform in color and fin- ish, fabricated to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between tile surf- aces and adjoining; finished floor surfaces . 2. Marble Thresholds : a. Comply with ASTM C503 for exterior use and abrasion resistance for uses subject to heavy foot traffic. b. White, bonded marble complying with MIA Group A requirements for soundness . D. Sealant : Refer to Section 07900, Joint Sealers . E. Waterproofing Admixture - Grout and Mortar : 1 . Latex mortar additive for dry set grouts and mor- tars . 2. Service Life : Min. 10 years . 3. Compressive Strength : 3000 psi . 4. Bond Strength : 500 psi . 5. Product : Laticrete International Model 3701 , Boiardi Products Model Elastiment 150. F. Latex Thinset Admixture - Grout and Mortar : 1 . ANSI A108. 5 and A118. 4, compounded and stabilized latex for blending with neat portland cement or portland-sand mix. 2. Service Life: Min. 10 yrs . 3. Compressive Strength : Min. 5, 000 psi . 4. Bond Strength - Shear : Min. 600 psi @ 28 days . 5. Water Absorption : Max. 3 percent . 6. Density : 83 lbs . per cu. ft . 7. Product : Laticrete International Model 4237, Boiardi Products Model Elastiment 753. G. Tile Trim: 1 . Furnish size, color, and shade to match field the 2. Base : Use cove straight top for wall tile transi - tion, cove round top for no wall tile transition, and bull nose where cove and no wall tile transi - tion is detailed. 8632 09300-3 Tile VA each shipment and type of tale, signed by manufacturer and Installer . 1 . 04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements : Maintain temperature at 50 deg. F. min. during tile Work and for 7 days after com- pletion. B. Provide adequate lighting for good grouting and clean up. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. General : 1 . ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile : a. Comply with ANSI A137. 1 American National Stan- dard Specification:; for Ceramic Tile for types and grades for tile indicated. b. Furnish tile complying with Standard Grade re- quirements unless otherwise indicated. 2. ANSI Standard - Tile Installation Materials : Com- ply with ANSI standard referenced with installation products and materials indicated. 3. Colors , Textures and Patterns : a. For the and other products requiring selection of colors , surface textures or other appearance characteristics , provide products to match cha- racteristics indicated or, if not otherwise in- dicated, as selected by Architect from manufac- turer ' s standards . b. Provide the trim and accessories which match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. 4. Mounting : a. Where factory mounted tile is required, provide back or edge-mounted tile assemblies as stand- ard with manufacturer unless another mounting method is indicated. b. Where tile is indicated for installation in swimming pools , on exteriors or in wet areas , do not use back or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specified type of mounting is suitable for use and has been used succesfully on other projects . B. Tile Products : 1 . Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile : a. Factory mounted flat tile. b. Type : Porcelain. C. Wearing Surface : Slip-resistant the with abrasive content . d. Size : 1 in. x 1 in. e. Face : Plain with cushion edges . f . Product : American Olean. 2. Glazed Wall Tile. 8632 09300-2 Tile VA SECTION 09300 TILE PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Glazed Tile. 2. Ceramic Mosaic Tile. 3. Glazed Tile Trim. 4. Ceramic Mosaic Tile Trim. 5. Marble Thresholds . B. Related Sections : 1 . 07900, Joint Sealers . 2. 09250, Gypsum Board. 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Quality Control : 1 . Provide the of standard grade conforming to TCA/ ANSI 137. 1 . 2. Obtain each material required for any one type and color from single source. 3. Furnish Master Grade Certificate signed by both tile manufacturer and Installer . B. Reference Standards : Comply with standards of TCA and ANSI as referenced in this Section. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data : Submit manutacturer ' s technical infor- mation and installation instructions for materials re- quired, except bulk materials . B. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes : 1 . Submit manufacturer ' s color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tile showing full range of colors , textures and patterns available for each type of the indicated„ 2. Include samples of grout and accessories involving color selection. C. Samples for Verification Purposes : 1 . Samples for each type of tile and for each color and texture required, min. 12 in. , sq. , on plywood or hardboard backing and grouted. 2. Full size samples for each type of trim, accessory and for each color . 3. 6 in. long samples of stone thresholds . 4. Samples of metal edge strip. D. Certification: Furnish Master Grade Certificate for 8632 09300-1 Tile VA h. Embed 2 in. wide fiberglass tape in skim coat of mortar at joints and corners . D. Drywall Installation and Finishing: 1 . Install gypsum boards in lengths and directions which will minimize number of end joints , and avoid end joints in central area of ceilings . 2. Install walls and partitions with exposed gypsum boards vertical , with joints offset on opposite sides of partitions . 3. Install boards with edges perpendicular to sup- ports , with end joints staggered over supports , except where recommended in a different arrangement by manufacturer . 4. Form control joints with 1/2 in. space between boards . 5. Install acoustical sealant at base of space, and apply trim accessory at: face. 6. Acoustical Sealant : Where work is indicated as sound retarding or shown with STC rating, apply acoustical sealant; as recommended by manufacturer . 7. Isolate drywall work from abutting structural and masonry work ; provide edge trim and acoustical sealant as recommended by manufacturer . S. Install sound attenuation blankets where shown, without gaps ; and support where necessary to pre- vent movement or dislocation. 9. Screw gypsum board to raetal supports . 10. Do not bridge building expansion joints ; leave space of width indicated between boards , and trim both edges for installation of sealant or gasket . E. Drywall Finishing: 1 . Except as otherwise indicated, apply joint tape and joint compound at joints , both directions , between gypsum boards . 2. Apply compound at accessory flanges , penetrations , fasteners heads and surface defects . 3. Install compound in 3 coats plus prefill of cracks where recommended by manufacturer ; sand after last 2 coats . 4. Treat joints , fastener heads , cut edges and pene- trations in water-resistant backing board using water-resistant joint compound to comply with water-resistant joint compound manufacturer ' s di - rections . END OF SECTION - 8632 09250-6 Gypsum Board VA turer for application indicated, except as other- wise indicated. 2. Joint Tape : Paper reinforcing tape. 3. Joint Compound : Ready-mixed vinyl -type for inter- ior use. 4. Exterior Joint Compound;: Special chemical-harden- ing-type for exterior application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 INSTALLATION A. Metal Support System: Do riot bridge building expansion joints with support systems, , frame both sides of joints with furring and other, supports as indicated. B. Ceiling Support Suspension Systems : 1 . Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible, otherwise connect to inserts , clips , other anchorage devices , or fasteners as indicated. 2. Provide indirect-hung metal support system with main runners 48 irk. o. c:. , hangers 48 in. o. c. along runners and furring members 24 in. o. c. , unless otherwise indicated. C. Wall /Partition Support: System: 1 . Install steel studs with bottom and top runner tracks anchored to substrates . 2. Isolate system from building structure to prevent transfer of loading and deflections into metal support system, both vertically and horizontally. 3. Frame door and other openings with studs and run- ners and gage, number , and arrangement to comply with manufacturer ' s recommendations for size of opening, weight of dooms and height and stud size, unless otherwise Indicated. 4. Erect thermal insulation and Z-furring members to comply with manufacturer ' s directions . 5. Install supplementary iframing, runners , furring, blocking, and bracing at openings and terminations in gypsum drywall and where required for support of other work which cannot be adequately supported on gypsum board alone. 6. Shower and Bathtub Walls - Tile Backer Board : a. Showers : Space studs max. 12 in. o. c. and provide horizontal blocking behind walls at 9 in. above finished floor . b. Bathtubs : Space studs max. 16 in. o. c. C. Fasteners : Use type suitable for stud used in wall framing and space max. 8 in. o. c. d. Precut board 'to size and make necessary cut- outs . e. Fit ends and edges closely together , max. 1/8 in. gap ; do not force tightly together . f . Fasten to framing max. 8 in. o. c. g. Fill gap at edges and ends with mortar . 8632 09250-5 Gypsum Board VA C. Thickness : 5.18 in. 4. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing Board : a. ASTM C79. b. Type: X where indicated and required in fire- resistance rated assemblies . C. Thickness : 1/2 in. D. Tile Backer Board : 1 . Cementitious reinforced board formed in continuous process of aggregated portland cement slurry and reinforced with vinyl -coated, woven glass-fiber mesh embedded in both surfaces . 2. Size : 3 ft . wide x length as required, nominal 7/16 in. thick. 3. Product : Modulars Inc. Model Wonder-Board, U. S. Gypsum Model Durock. E. Trim Accessories : 1 . General : a. Provide manufacturer ' s standard trim acces- sories of types indicated for drywall work, formed of galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated, with either knurled and perforated or expanded flanges for nailing or stapling, and beaded for concealment of flanges in joint compound. b. Provide corner beads , L-type edge trim-beads , U-type edge trim-beads , special L-kerf-type edge trim-beads , and one-piece control joint beads . C. Semi -Finishing Type : Manufacturer ' s standard trim units not to be finished with joint com- pound ( nonbeaded) . F. Screws , Adhesives , and Sealants : 1 . Screws : a. ASTM C1002, Grade 1013 to 1022 steel wire meeting ASTM A548. b. Gypsum Board to Gypsum Board : Type G. C. Gypsum Board to Steel Framing: Type S or use ASTM C954, Grade 1018 to 1022 steel wire meet- ing ASTM A510 for steel studs 0. 033 in. to 0. 112 in. thick. 2. Sealant : Refer to Section 07900, Joint Sealers , for materials and application. 3. Concealed Acoustical Sealant : Non-drying, non- hardening, non-skinning, non-staining, non-bleed- ing, gunnable sealant for concealed applications per ASTM C919. 4. Exposed Acoustical Sealant : Non-oxidizing, skin- able, paintable, gunnable sealant for exposed applications per ASTM C919. 5. Sound Attenuation Blankets : Refer to Section 07200, Insulation . G. Joint Treatment : 1 . General : ASTM C475 ; type recommended by manufac- 8632 092;50-4 Gypsum Board VA tices or by certified test data. b. Size devices for 3x calculated load supported, except size direct pullout concrete inserts for 5x calculated loads . OOW 6. Furring Members : a. ASTM C645, min. 0. 0179 in. thickness of base metal , hat-shaped. b. Where shown as resilient , provide manufactur- er ' s special type designed to reduce sound transmission. 7. Furring Members : ASTM C645, min. 0. 0179 in. thick- ness of base metal , C-shaped studs . 8. Furring Anchorages : 16 ga. galvanized wire ties , manufacturer' s standard: wire type clips , bolts , nails , or screws as recommended by furring manufac- turer and complying with ASTM C754. B. Interior Wall /Partition Support Materials : 1 . Studs : a. ASTM C645, min. 0. 0179 in. thickness of base metal , unless otherwise indicated. b. Depth of Section : 3-5/8 in. , except as other- wise indicated. C. Runners : Match studs ; type recommended by stud manufacturer for floor and ceiling support of studs , and for vertical abutment of drywall work at other Work. 2. Furring Members : a. ASTM C645, min. 0. 0179 in. thickness of base metal , hat-shaped. b. Where shown as resilient , provide manufactur- er ' s special type designed to reduce sound transmission. 3. Fasteners for Furring Members : Type and size rec- ommended by furring manufacturer for substrate and application indicated . C. Gypsum Board : 1 . Gypsum Wallboard : a. ASTM C36, in maximum lengths available to mini - mize end-to-end butt joints . b. Type : Regular or Type X for fire-resistant rated assemblies and where indicated. C. Edges : Tapered d. Thickness : 5/8 in. 2. Gypsum Backing Board for Multi -Layer Applications : a. ASTM C442, in maximum lengths available to min- imize end-to-end joints . b. Type : Regular or Type X for fire-resistance rated assemblies and where indicated. C. Edges : Square. d. Thickness : 5/8 in. 3. Water-Resistant Backing Board : a. ASTM C630, tapered edges , in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints . b. Type : Regular or Type X for fire-resistant rated assemblies and where indicated. 8632 09250-3 Gypsum Board VA bundles bearing brand name and identification of manu- facturer or supplier. B. Storage : 1 . Store materials inside under cover , dry, protected from weather , direct sunlight, surface contamina- tion, corrosion, damage from construction traffic, and other causes . 2. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging. C. Handling: 1 . Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges , ends , or surfaces ,. 2. Protect metal corner beads and trim from being bent or damaged. 1 . 05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements : 1 . General : Comply with requirements of referenced gypsum board application standards and recommen- dations of gypsum board manufacturer for environ- mental conditions before, during, and after appli- cation of gypsum board. 2. Cold Weather Protection : When ambient outdoor tem- peratures are below 55 deg. F, maintain continuous , uniform, comfortable building working temperatures min. 55 deg. F min. 48 hour period before, during, and following application of gypsum board and joint treatment materials or bonding adhesives . 3. Vent i lat ion : a. Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for drying of joint treatment material immediately after application. b. Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent too rapid drying. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. Ceiling Support Materials and Systems : 1 . General : Size ceiling support components to comply with ASTM C754 unless indicated otherwise. 2. Main Runners : Steel channels with rust inhibitive paint finish, hot or cold-rolled. 3. Hanger Wire : No. 6 ga . monel . 4. Hanger Rods and Flats : Mild steel with zinc or equally rust inhibitive coating for rods and zinc or rust- inhibitive paint finish for flats . 5. Hanger Anchorage Devices : a. Screws , clips , bolts , cast- in-place concrete inserts , or other devices applicable to Indica- ted method of structural anchorage for ceiling hangers whose suitability for use intended has been proven through standard construction prac- 8632 09250-2 Gypsum Board VA SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Framing and Furring. 2. Gypsum Board. 3. Tile Backer Board. 4. Veneer Plaster System. 5. Accessories . B. Related Sections : 1 . 04200, Unit Masonry. 2. 06100, Rough Carpentry. 3. 07200, Insulation. 6. 09300, Tile. 7. 09900, Painting. 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria : 1 . Fire-Resistance Rating: a. Where gypsum drywall systems with fire resis- tance ratings are indicated, provide materials and installations identical with applicable assemblies tested per ASTM E119 by fire testing laboratories acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Provide fire-resistance rated assemblies iden- tical to those indicated by reference to GA File No' s . in GA Fire Resistance Design Manual or to design designations in UL Fire Resistance Directory or In liiiting of other testing and agencies acceptable to authorities having jur- isdiction. 2. Gypsum Board Terminology Standard : GA505 by Gypsum Association. 3. Single Source Responsibility : Obtain gypsum board products from single manufacturer or from manufac- turers recommended by the prime manufacturer of gypsum board. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data : Submit manufacturer ' s product specifi - cations and installation Instructions for each gypsum drywall component , including other data as required to show compliance with Specifications . 1 . 04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Deliver materials in original packages , containers , or 8632 09250-1 Gypsum Board VA DIVISION 9 FINISHES a. Offset in Alignment of Adjoining Edges : Max. 1/16 in. b. Offset in Face Alignment Over Wall Surface: Max. 1/8 in. C. No gap between adjacent members . 3. 03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Wash and polish glass on both faces before Owner ' s acceptance of Work. B. Comply with glass manufacturer ' s published directions. C. At completion of Work, all glass shall be free from cracks and other defects . D. Any defective glass that may appear before acceptance or within one year warranty period, if direct result of manufacturing, transporting, or performance of Con- tract , shall be removed and replaced with new glass without cost to Owner . - END OF SECTION - 8632 08800-5 Glazing VA ded by sealant: or gasket manufacturer . 2. Setting Blocks : Neoprene, EPDM, or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing seal - ants , 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness . 3. Spacers : Neoprene, EPDM, or silicone blocks , or continuous extrusions as required for compatibility with glazing sealant , of size, shape, and hardness recommended by glass and sealant manufacturers for application indicated. 4. Edge Blocks : Neoprene„ EPDM, or silicone blocks as required for compatibiiity with glazing sealant , of size and hardness required to limit lateral move- ment ( side-walking) of glass . 5. Compressible Filler Rods : Closed-cell or water- proof-jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam, flexible and resilient, with 5-10 psi compression strength for 25 percent deflection. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 INSPECTION A. Inspect members to be glazed and notify Architect of any defects , improper materials or Work, and other conditions which may affect satisfactory installation of glass . B. Do not proceed with glazing until such conditions have been corrected. C. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before install - ation and eliminate glass which has observable edge damage or face imperfections . 3. 02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with combined recommendations of glass manufac- turer and manufacturer of other materials used in glazing, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified and except where manufacturer ' s technical representatives direct otherwise, in writing, and approved by Architect . B. Comply with "Glazing Manual " of FGMA, except as shown and specified otherwise, and except as specifically recommended otherwise by manufacturers of glass and glazing materials . C. Wall Mirrors : 1 . Install mirror spots of adhesive, four to square foot , approximately 1/8 in. to 3/16 in. thick and 4 in. to 4-1/2 in. in dia. 2. Provide bottom support for mirrors min. three days until adhesive has set . 3. Install bedding tape or cushion strip under bottom AOW* edge of each mirror . 4. Tolerances : 8632 08800-4 Glazing VA lity, and form. 2. Heat-Treated Glass Standard : Provide heat-treated glass complying with FS DD-G-1403 requirements , in- cluding those indicated, by reference to grade, style, type, quality, and class . 3. Sizes : a. Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings indicated, with edge clearances and tolerances complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer . b. Provide thicknesses; indicated or, if not other- wise indicated, as recommended by glass manu- facturer for application indicated. B. Type A Glass : 1 . Thickness : 1 in. overall for insulating and 1/4 in. for non- insulated. 2. Color : Clear . 3. Type : Float or tempered as required and detailed. C. Wire Glass : 1 . Thickness : 1/4 in. 2. Color : Clear . 3. Type : UL rated, square pattern. D. Mirror : 1 . Plate glass , electroplated, painted and baked for corrosion resistance. 2. Thickness : 1/4 in. 3. Color : Clear. 4. Edge Treatment : Smooth. E. Glazing Sealants : 1 . General : a. Comply with recommendations of sealant and glass manufacturers for selection of glazing sealants having performance characteristics suitable for applications indicated and condi - tions at time of installation. b. Compatibility : Select sealants with proven compatibility with surfaces contacted in in- stallation and under service conditions indi - cated, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. C. Colors : Provide color of exposed sealants in- dicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as se- lected by Architect from manufacturer' s stand- ard colors . 2. Refer to Section 0 7900, Joint Sealers , for mater- ial and installation criteria. F. Miscellaneous Glazing Materials : 1 . General : a. Compatibility : Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces contact- ed. b. Cleaners , Primers and Sealers : Type recommen- 8632 08800-3 Glazing VA B. Samples : 1 . Submit , for verification purposes , 12 in. sq. sam- ple of each type of glass indicated except for clear single pane units , and 12 in. long samples of each color required, except black, for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. 2. Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative of adjoining framing system in color . C. Certificate : 1 . Submit certificates from respective manufacturers attesting glass and glazing materials furnished for Project comply with requirements . 2. Separate certification will not be required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer' s permanent labels designating typo? and thickness of glass pro- vided labels represent quality control program in- volving recognized certification agency or indepen- dent testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test Reports : Submit sealant-substrate adhesion and sealant compatibility test reports , including glazing sealant manufacturer' s findings and recommendations . 1 . 04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage, and handling to comply with manufacturer ' s directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass , damage to glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture including condensation, temperature changes , direct exposure to sun, and other causes . 1 . 05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions : 1 . Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and sub- strate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturer or when joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost , con- densation or other causes . 2. Install glazing sealants only when temperatures are in middle third of manufacturer ' s recommended in- stallation temperature range. 3. Install liquid sealants at ambient and substrate temperatures above 40 deg. F. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. General : 1 . Primary Glass Standard: Provide primary glass complying with FS DD-G-451 requirements , including those indicated by reference to type, class , qua 8632 06800-2 Glazing VA SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Glass . 2. Mirror . 3. Wire Glass . B. Related Sections : 1 . 07900, Joint Sealers . 2. 08400, Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts . 3. 08460, Automatic ;Entrance Doors . 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards : 1 . Glazing Standards : a. Comply with recommendations of FGMA Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual except where more stringent requirements are indicated. b. Refer to publications for definitions of glass and glazing trims not otherwise defined in Sec- tion or other referenced standards . 2. Safety Glazing Standard : a. Where safety glass is indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide type of product indicated to comply with ANSI Z97. 1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials. b. Subject to compliance with requirements , pro- vide safety glass permanently marked with cer- tification label of SGCC or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having juris- diction. 3. Fire-Resistance Rated Wire Glass : Provide wire glass products identical to those tested per ASTM E163 (UL 9) and labeled and listed by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to author- ities having jurisdiction. B. Single Source Responsibility : Provide materials ob- tained from one source for each type of glass and glazing product indicated. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data : Submit manufacturer ' s technical data for each glazing material and fabricated glass product re- quired, including installation and maintenance instruc- t ions . 8632 08800-1 Glazing VA 5. Do not install surface--mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. 6. Set units level , plumb,, and true to line and loca- tion. A00k. 7. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as neces- sary for proper installation and operation. 8. Drill and countersink units not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners . 9. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with Industry standards . ` 10. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of sealant to requirements of Section 07900, Joint Sealers . B. Deliver hardware for doors as shown and scheduled, and as specified in applicable hardware portions of these Specifications . C. Store in locked space to prevent loss . D. Apply to doors as recommended by hardware manufacturer and as required. E. Fit locks and latchsets in their respective doors and remove before painting. F. Reinstall after painting of doors is complete. G. On completion, adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. H. Instruct Owner ' s personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware. 3. 02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING; A. Adjustments : 1 . Assist installer in adjusting and checking instal - lation of finish hardware. 2. Furnish proper lubricant , graphite, or special oil to installer . 3. Check, test , and adjust moving parts to ensure free and smooth operation. 4. Furnish Owner with special tools required to adjust and maintain hardware. - END OF SECTION - 8632 08710-7 Finish Hardware VA and to fit door frames , and as follows . b. In-Swinging Doors : Provide units with inter- locking lip and interior drain channel ; include hook on bottom edge? of door and drain pan. #OW- C. Out-Swinging Doors : Provide units with inter- locking lip and with hook on bottom edge of door to act as; weather bar . d. Out-Swinging Doors :: Provide rabbeted type units with replaceable welatherstrip insert in stop. I . Lock Cylinders and Keying: 1 . General : Supplier will meet with Owner to final - ize keying requirements and obtain final instruc- tions in writing. 2. Standard System: Except as otherwise indicated, provide new masterkey system for Project . 3. Review keying system with Owner and provide type required, either new oir integrated with Owner ' s existing system. 4. Equip locks with manufacturer' s special 6-pin tum- bler cylinder , with construction master key fea- ture, which permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal . 5. Equip locks with cylinders for interchangeable-core pin tumbler inserts . a. Furnish only temporary inserts for construction period and remove ldhen directed. b. Owner will provide final inserts. 6. Comply with Owner ' s instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide indi - vidual change key for each lock not designated to be keyed alike with group of related locks . 7. Key Quantity : a. Furnish 3 change keys for each lock ; 5 master keys for each master system; and 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system. b. Deliver keys to Owner ' s Representative. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 INSTALLATION A. General : 1 . Mount hardware units at heights indicated in Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames by Door and Hard- ware Institute, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations , and except as may be otherwise directed by Architect . 3. Install each hardware item in compliance with man- ufacturer ' s instructions and recommendations . 4. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal , storage, and reinstallation or application of sur- face protections with finishing work specified in Division 9. 6632 087'10-6 Finish Hardware VA sets . b. Provide units with 3/4 in. throwbolts typical , 1 in. throw where required and designated by Architect . 9. Latchbolts : Min. 5/8 in. projection. D. Panic Devices : 1 . Furnish panic devices as required to following requirements : a. Mounting : Furnish devices with provision for concealed mounting;; throughbolts will not be accepted. b. Keying: Key cylinders to Building system as specified. C. Bolts : Provide retract feature for all con- cealed vertical roil devices provided at center hung doors . E. Overhead Closers : 1 . Closer size per manufacturer ' s recommendation for application. a. Full rack and pinion. b. Independent closing speed and latch regulating valves . C. Adjustable back-check. d. 180 degree opening where construction will per- mit . F. Accessories : 1 . Push/Pull Assemblies : a. Push Plate : 4 in. x 15 in. x 1/4 in. stainless steel , beveled all edges , with oval Phillips head fasteners . b. Pull Assembly : 8 in. c. to c. of bases , stain- less steel , with 1-1/4 In. flat face half round grip, 2 in. overall projection, machined to accept concealed throughbolt attachment . 2. Wall Bumpers : Wrought disc type with convex rubber bumper and concealed attachments suited to sub- strate. 3. Door Mutes : Furnish for hollow metal frames , 3 door mutes for each single door and 4 door mutes for each pair of doors . G. Miscellaneous Hardware: 1 . Door bottom seal . 2. Head and jamb gaskets . 3. Astragal gaskets . H. Thresholds : 1 . General : Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size, and profile as shown or scheduled. 2. Exterior Hinged/Pivoted Doors : a. Provide units min. 4 in. wide, formed to accom- modate change in floor elevation where Indi - cated, fabricated to accommodate door hardware, 8632 08710-5 Finish Hardware VA fastening is not possible. e. Finish to match hardware item being fastened. 4. Hardware Quality Level : Comply with following for design, grade, function , finish, size, and opera- tion. a. Usage : Moderate frequency. b. Type : Residential , high quality. C. Style : As selected. d. Finish : As selected. 5. ANSI /BHMA Designations : Provide products complying with standards and requirements specified elswhere In this Section. a. Butts and Hinges : ANSI A156. 1 , BHMA 101 . b. Locks and Lock: Trim: ANSI A156. 2, BHMA 601 . C. Exit Devices : ANSI A156. 3, BHMA 701 . d. Template Hinge Dimensions : ANSI A156. 7. e. Mortise Locks and Latches : ANSI A156. 13, BHMA 621 . f . Auxiliary Hardware ;: ANSI A156. 16, BHMA 1201 . g. Materials & Finishes : ANSI A156. 16, BHMA 1301 . 6. Manufacturer : All.met . B. Hinges : 1 . Pack all hinges with machine or wood screws as re- quired by door and frame construction. 2. Furnish hinges with leaves of width to clear door jamb or trim products . 3. Furnish template hinges in accordance with door and frame material requirements . 4. Hinge Type : Standard weight , two ball bearings , painted steel for interior and brass for exterior , full mortise, 4-1/2 in.. high, 0. 134 in. ga. , non- rising pin for interior and non-removable pins for exterior , flush tip. 5. Hinge Quantity : Up to 60 in. high doors provide 2 butts , and for each 30 in. additional height pro- vide one addtional butt . C. Latches and Locks : 1 . Furnish locksets and latchsets with anti -friction deadlocking latchbolts and deadlocks. 2. Provide locksets , latchsets , or deadlocks complete with trim and armor fronts . 3. Conceal fastenings , washers , and bushings . 4. Provide wrought box strikes for each lockset , latchset , or deadlock with curved lips of suffi - cient length to protect frames . 5. Heavy duty construction with min. 0. 093 in. thick wrought case. 6. Louver handle for all Apartment Entrances , Hand- icapped Apartments - all doors , and all Public Space doors . 7. Provide latchsets and locks of one manufacturer. S. Deadlocks : a. Furnish deadlocks from same manufacturer as locksets and latchsets , with same turnpiece and cylinder trim furnished for locksets and latch- 8632 06710-4 Finish Hardware VA 2. Packaging of hardware is responsibility of sup- plier . 3. As material is received) by hardware supplier from various manufacturers , sort and repackage in con- tainers clearly marked with appropriate Hardware Set Number to match Set: Numbers of approved Hard- ware Schedule. 4. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container . 5. Inventory hardware? jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct . 6. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at proper times to proper locations , shop, or Project site, for installation.. B. Storage : 1 . Provide secure lockup IEor hardware delivered to Project but not yet installed. 2. Control handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so comple- tion of Work will not be delayed by hardware losses , both before and after installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. General : 1 . Provide complete Hardware Set Schedule for appli - cation of individual items as required for each opening or function ; review with Architect and Owner before purchase of hardware. 2. Hardware Finishes : a. Produce finishes to exact match with selected sample ( s ) . b. Reduce variance in hue of each finish whether base metal is cast , forged, or stamped, or when plating is applied over steel , brass , or bronze. C. Match finishes of same designation from two or more sources when viewed at arms ' length and approximately 2 ft. apart. d. Unless otherwise specified, match finish of each item of hardware with finish selected for locksets and latches . e. Indicate type of finish in Hardware Schedule. 3. Fasteners : a. Provide concealed fastening wherever possible. b. Use of self-tapping or sheet metal screws Is prohibited except for application of flush mounted push and kick plates . C. Concealed : Furnish hardware items with appro- priate type and length of screws or other fast- enings suitable to ensure permanent anchorage. d. Exposed : Furnish hardware with countersunk oval Phillips head, type screws where concealed 8632 08710-3 Finish Hardware VA B. Hardware Schedule : 1 . Submit final hardware In manner indicated below. 2. Coordinate hardware with doors , frames , and related work to ensure proper size, thickness , hand, func- tion, and finish of hardware. 3. Final Hardware Schedule Content : a. Based on finish hardware indicated, organize Hardware Schedule ilLnto Hardware Sets indicat- ing complete designations of every item re- quired for each door or opening. b. Include Following :Information: Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item; name and manufacturer of each item; fastenings and other pertinent information ; location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and In door and frame schedule; explanation of all abbreviations „ symbols , codes , etc. contained in Schedule ; mounting locations for hardware ; door and frame sizes and materials ; keying Information. C. Submittal Sequence : Submit Schedule at ear- liest possible data, particularly where accept- ance of Hardware Schedule must precede fabrica- tion of other Work which is critical in Project Construction Schedule. d. Include with Schedule product data, samples , and shop drawings of other Work affected by finish hardware, and other information essen- tial to coordinated review of Hardware Sche- dule. 4. Keying Schedule : Submit separate detailed Schedule Indicating clearly how Owner ' s final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. C. Samples : Before submittal of final Hardware Schedule and before final ordering of finish hardware, submit one sample of each type of exposed hardware unit , fin- ished as required, and tagged with full description for coordination with Schedule. D. Templates : a. Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors , frames , and other work to be factory pre- pared for installation of hardware. b. Check shop drawings of such other work, to confirm adequate provisions are made for proper location and installation of hardware. 1 . 04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery : 1 . Tag each item or package separately, with iden- tification related to final Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. 8632 08710-2 Finish Hardware VA ��. MMMMMMW SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE OOW PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Hardware Finishes . 2. Fasteners . 3. Hardware Items . 4. Mounting Heights. B. Related Sections : 1 . 08100, Metal Doors and Frames . 2. 08210, Wood Doors „ 3. 08400, Entrances and Storefronts . 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications : 1 . Manufacturer : Obtain each type of hardware from single offering products complying with require- ments . 2. Supplier : Recognized ,architectural finish hardware supplier , with warehousing facilities , furnishing hardware in Project vicinity min. 2 years , and who 000"1 is , or employs , experienced architectural hardware consultant available at reasonable times during course of Work, for consultation about project ' s hardware requirements , to Owner, Architect , and Contractor . B. Design Criteria : 1 . Fire Rated Openings : Provide hardware for fire rated openings in compliance with NFPA 80 and local building code requirements . 2. Provide only hardware tested and listed by UL or FM for types and sizes of doors required, and complies with requirements of door and door frame labels . 3. Where emergency exits devices are required on fire rated doors , with supplementary marking on doors ' UL or FM labels indicating fire door to be equipped with fire exit hardware, provide UL or FM label on exit devices indicating Fire Exit Hardware. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data : 1 . Submit manufacturers technical product data for each item in accordance with Division 1 . 2. Include information necessary to show compliance with requirements and include instructions for +* installation and maintenance of operating parts and finish. 8632 087'10-1 Finish Hardware VA mined by manufacturer , except as otherwise indi - cated. 3. Preglaze wood window units at shop before delivery, unless not available as preglazed from fabricator ; do not preglaze light .sizes in excess of 100 united inches . 4. Shop-Primed Units : Provide fabricator ' s standard white shop prime coat on exterior-exposed sur- faces only of wood components ; comply with FS TT-P-25 for paint used as primer. 5. Manufacturer : Rollscreen Co. Model Pella, Eagle. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 INSTALLATION A. General : 1 . Comply with manufacturer ' s instructions and re- commendations for installation of wood window units , hardware, ,accessories , and other components of Work. 2. Set units plumb, level , and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. 3. Provide proper support , anchor securely in place. 4. Refer to Section 07900, Joint Sealers , for joint filler and sealants . 3. 02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjustments : 1 . Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide smooth operation with tight , weatherproof closure. 2. Lubricate hardware and moving parts . B. Finishing: 1 . Refer to Section 09900, Painting, for finish to be applied on wood window units at Project site. 2. Glaze each unit before application of final finish coat where coat extends over removable glazing bead or over exposed face glazing. C. Cleaning: 1 . Clean glass of window units promply after installa- tion, wash and polish glass on both faces max. 4 days before date scheduled for final inspection. 2. Comply with glass manufacturer ' s recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. 3. Remove and replace broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged glass . D. Protection : Institute protection required through remainder of construction period, to ensure wood window units without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of Acceptance. - END OF SECTION - 8632 08610-4 Wood Windows VA G. Glass and Glazing Materials : 1 . Insulated Glass : Window manufacturer ' s standard clear hermetically sealed insulating glass warran- ted min. 10 years against failure of hermatic seal . 2. Interior and Exterior Glass Lites : a. Interior : Clear float glass , FS DD-G-451, Type I , Quality q3. b. Exterior : Clear float glass , FS DD-G-451 , Type I , Quality q3.. C. Exterior : Grey-tinted float glass , FS DD-G-451 , Type I , Quality q3. 2. 02 FABRICATION A. Window Types - Operation : 1 . Comply with minimum operating requirements of NWMA I . S. -2. 2. Fixed Wood Windows : a. Provide fixed wood window units in locations , sizes , and configurations as indicated on Draw- ings . b. No operating hardware or equipment other than accessory items is required for fixed window units . 3. Double-Hung Wood Windows : a. Provide units containing 2 balanced, verti - cally-sliding sash ; with 2 pairs manufacturer' s standard concealed counterbalancing mechanisms , pair lift handles in lower rail , pair pulldown handles on meeting rail of upper sash, except substitute pole socket for upper sash if meet- ing rail is min. 72 in. above floor ; provide latch at meeting rail . b. Sash Max. 36 in. Wide : Provide single handles at lower rail and !meeting rail . C. Provide manufacturer ' s standard mechanism for either removal of sash without tools or pivot- ing of sash to facilitate cleaning glass en- tirely from inside. B. Window Fabrication : 1 . Sizes and Profiles : a. Conform to size and profile limitations as shown. b. Similar details by other manufacturers are ac- ceptable if in close conformance with sizes and profiles shown, as acceptable to Architect . C. Where custom sizes are indicated, coordinate dimensions with actual measure of window open- ings in construction Work. d. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construc- tion progress and, where necessary, fabricate without field measurement, providing install - ation tolerances to ensure proper fit of win- dow units . 2. Provide removable insect screen for each operating sash, with location, exterior or interior , deter- 8632 08610-3 Wood Windows VA D. Extra Stock : 1 . Furnish additional 5 percent maintenance stock, min. one unit and max. 10 units , of each type, color , thickness, and size/shape of factory-fabri - cated insulating glass units required. 2. Deliver to Owner' s storage as maintenance stock, and provide copy of manufacturer ' s printed instruc- tions for storage of units . PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. Wood : Ponderosa Pine or other suitable fine-grain clear lumber, free of finger-joints , treated with water repellent preservative after machining, kiln-dried to 6 to 12 percent moisture content during fabrication. B. Fasteners : 1 . Comply with ANSI /NWMA 1 . S-2 for fabrication, man- ufacturer ' s recommendations , and standard industry practices for type and size of fasteners . a. Wood Windows : Zinc-coated or nonferrous nails and screws . b. Hardware and Acces;iories : Brass screws . C. Weatherstripping : 1 . Compression : Manufacturer ' s standard nonferrous spring metal or vinyl I;asket designed for perm- anently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, completely concealed when window sash is closed. D. Screening: 1 . Wire Fabric - Insect : FS-RR-W-365, Type VII , 0. 013 in. dia. aluminum wire 18/14 mesh, except black anodized or gun metal coating on wire. 2. Insect Screens Frames : Manufacturer' s standard formed aluminum or, extruded aluminum frames with anodized aluminum finish or baked-on organic coat- ing, removable vinyl fabric-retainer spline. E. Hardware : Provide solid white-metal with special coat- ing finish or solid bronze with plated steel or brass/ bronze operating bars and rods . F. Aluminum Cladding: 1 . Provide manufacturer ' s standard formed sheet and/or extruded aluminum cladding applied on exterior ex- posure of wood members, finished with baked-on acrylic coating in color selected by Architect from manufacturer ' s standards . 2. Trim members provided with aluminum-clad window units may be either aluminum-clad wood or hollow aluminum extrusions or roll -formed aluminum mem- bers , at manufacturer ' s option. 8632 08610-2 Wood Windows VA SECTION 086:10 WOOD WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Aluminum Clad Wood Window Units . 2. Screens . 3. Glass and Glazing . B. Related Sections : 1 . 04200, Unit Masonry. 2. 07900, Joint Sealers . 3. 09900, Painting. 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards : Comply with general requirements of ANSI /NWMA I . S-2, except where more stringent re- quirements are indicated. B. Design Criteria : 1 . Performance and Testing: a. Provide tested and labeled windows . b. Structural Performance: ASTM E330. C. Air Infiltration: ASTM E283. d. Water Penetration : ASTM E331 . e. Results complying with ANSI /NWMA I . S. -2 for Class A window units . 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data : 1 . Submit manufacturer ' s specifications , standard de- tails , and recommendations for each type of wood window unit required. 2. Include manufacturer ' s certified test report , indi - cating each type of unit has been tested and com- plies with requirements for performance as speci - f ied. B. Shop Drawings : Submit shop drawings , including wall elevations at 1/4 in. scale, unit elevations at 3/4 in. scale, and half-size section details of every typical composite member including glazing. C. Samples : 1 . Submit finish samples on 12 in. length of typ- ical window member . 2. Architect reserves right to require additional sam- ple submittals showing; fabrication techniques and installation, hardware! and accessory designs . 8632 08610-1 Wood Windows VA of doors . C. 1/8 in. from bottom of door to top of decora- tive floor finish or covering. 2. Threshold : 1/4 in. clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. 3. Bevel non-rated doors 1/8 in. in 2 in. at lock and hinge edges . F. Prefit Doors : Fit to frames and machine for hardware to extent not previously worked at factory as required for fit and uniform clearance at each edge. G. Job Site Finished Doors : Refer to Section 09900, Painting, for finishing requirements . 3. 02 PROTECTION A. Protect doors and hardware during construction. B. Touch up marred finished to perfectly match adjacent surfaces to satisfaction of Architect or replace unit. - END OF SECTION - 8632 08210-4 Wood Doors VA 3. Finish : Refer to Section 09900, Painting. 4. Manufacturer : Weyerhauser Company, Algoma, Eggers . B. Hollow Core Doors : 1 . Type: AWI 1300 SHC (Standard Hollow Core) . ta 2. Core : ANSI /NWMA I . S. -l. Series . 3. Face Panels : Embossed hardboard, design as selec- ted. 4. Finish : Factory finished, color as selected. C. Stile and Rail Glass Doors : 1 . Type : AWI 1300, exterior grade, complete with frame, brick mold casings , and jamb extenders ; style as detailed. 2. Specie : Aluminum clad for french doors with side- lights and red oak for storefront doors . 3. Glazing : 5/8 in. clear insulating Low E glass . D. Accessories : 1 . Bypassing Door Hardware : a. Provide manufacturer ' s complete set , consisting of extruded aluminum overhead track, adjustable hangers (carr 'iages ') , bumpers , and floor guides . b. Design to accommodate the number, size, thick- ness , and weight of door leaves indicated. C. Provide flush pulls for each door leaf . d. Product : Stanley Hardware Model 2840. 2. Door Pulls : a. Bypass : Stnaley Hardware Model 3683, 3/4 in. dia. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 INSTALLATION A. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area before hanging. B. Hardware : Refer to Section 08710, Finish Hardware. C. Manufacturer ' s Instructions : Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer ' s instructions , of referenced AWI standard, and as indicated. D. Job-Fit Doors : 1 . Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clear- ances and bevels as indicated. 2. Do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors . 3. Machine doors for hardware. 4. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. E. Fitting Clearances : 1 . Non-Rated Doors : a. 1/8 in. at jambs and heads . b. 1/16 in. per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs 8632 08210-3 Wood Doors VA B. Shop Drawings : Submit; shop drawings indicating loca- tion and size of each door , elevation of each kind of door , details of const; ructi.on, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire rai: ings , requirements for fac- tory finishing, and other pertinent data. 1 . 04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANI) HANDLING A. General : 1 . Protect wood doors during transit , storage, and handling to prevent darnage, soiling, and deterio- ration. 2. Comply with requirements of referenced ANSI Stan- dard and recommendations of NWMA Pamphlet , How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install , and Maintain Wood Doors , and manufacturer ' s instructions . 3. Package doors at factory before shipping using manufacturer ' s standard method. 4. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation system used on shop drawings for door , frames , and hardware, using temporary, removable, or concealed markings . 1 . 05 SPECIFIED PRODUCT WARRANTY A. Door Manufacturer ' s Warranty : 1 . Submit written agreement on door manufacturer ' s standard form signed by Manufacturer , Installer , and Contractor , agreeing to repair or replace defective doors which have warped (bow, cup, or twist ) or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers , or do not conform to NWMA and AWI tolerance limitations . 2. Include reinstallation which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors where de- fect was not apparent before hanging. 3. Warranty : a. Shall be in effect during following period of time after date of Substantial Completion. b. Solid Core Flush Interior Doors : Life of installation. 4. Contractor shall be responsible for replacement or refinishing doors where Contractor ' s work contrib- uted to rejection or voiding of manufacturer ' s warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. Solid Core Doors : 1 . Type : a. Residential : AWI 1300 FLC-7 (Staved Lumber Core) , non-glued block core. 2. Face Panels : *01w,, a. Opaque Finish - Interior : Any closed grain hardwood of mill option, Custom Grade. 8632 08210-2 Wood Doors VA SECTION 0821.0 WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Solid Core Doors. 2. Wood Bypass Doors ., 3. Embossed Hollow Core Doors . 4. Stile and Rail Glass Doors . B. Related Sections : 1 . 06400, Architectural Woodwork. 2. 08100, Metal Doors and Frames . 3. 08710, Finish Hardware. 4. 09900, Painting. 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards : 1 . Provide wood flush doors complying with following standards : a. ANSI /NWMA I . S-1 , Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors . b. AWI Quality Standards : Section 1300, Arch- itectural Flush Doors of Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards , designations for grade and door construction. B. Design Criteria : 1 . NWMA Quality Marking : a. Mark each wood door with NWMA Wood Flush Door Certification Hallmark certifying compliance with applicable requirements of ANSI /,NWMA I . S. -1 Series . b. For manufacturers not participating in NWMA Hallmark Program, certification of compliance may be substituted for marking of individual doors. C. Source Quality Control : 1 . Manufacturer : Obtain doors from single manufactur- er to ensure uniformity in quality of appearance and construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data : Submit door manufacturer' s product data for each type of wood door including details of core and edge construction, trim for openings and louvers , and finishing specifications for doors to receive fac- tory finish. 8632 082;10-1 Wood Doors VA D. Door Mounting: 1 . Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufac- turer ' s instructions to mount door in frame. ems". 2. Anchor panels in place with concealed fasteners . 3. Adjust door installation to provide uniform clear- ance at head and .jambs and to contact stops uni - formly. 4. Remove and replace doors found to be warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged and cannot be properly fitted in frames . E. Comply with applicable regulatory requirements for fire-rated door and frame installation. END OF SECTION - 8632 081.00-5 Metal Doors and VA Frames by electrostatically spraying and baking, to pro- duce 1 . 25 mils DFT. E. Standard Steel Frames : 1 . General : a. Provide metal frames for doors , transoms , side- lights , borrowed lights , and other openings , of types and styles as shown on Drawings and Sche- dules . b. Conceal fastenings unless otherwise indicated. C. Frames : Min. 16 get. cold-rolled furniture steel . 2. Type : Mitered corners , welded construction for exterior applications and knocked-down for field assembly at interior applications . 3. Form exterior frames of hot-dip galvanized steel . 4. Door Silencers : Except on weatherstripped frames , drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single-swing frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-swing frames. 5. Plaster Guards : Provide 26 ga. steel plaster guards or mortar boxes „ welded to frame, at back of finish hardware cutoutia where mortar or other mat- erials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings . PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 INSTALLATION A. Frames : Set hollow metal frames at locations shown, in perfect alignment and elevation, plumb, level , true, straight , and free from rack, braced to prevent dis- placement . B. Anchorage: 1 . Extend frame anchorages below sills and finishes , except over membrane waterproofed areas . 2. Anchor bottom of frames to floors with anchor bolts or with power drive fasteners . 3. Coordinate installation of built- in anchors for wall and partition construction, as required, with other Work. 4. Min. three wall anchors and one clip-angle floor anchor per jamb. 5. Jamb and head extensions 12 ga. steel . 6. Wall Anchors - Concrete and Masonry : Flat-head, through bolts , min. 3/8 in. dia. set into expansion shields . 7. Wall Anchors - Other Construction: As required and type suited to application. 8. Grout full of mortar space between backs of frames and masonry with anchors securely bedded in mortar joints . C. Temporary Braces : After wall construction has been completed, remove temporary braces . 8632 081.00-4 Metal Doors and VA Frames factory-assembled before shipment to assure proper assembly at Project site. B. Hollow Doors and Frames : 1 . Comply with SDI 100 requirements as follows : a. Interior Doors : SDI 100, Grade II , heavy-duty, Model 1 , min. 18 ga. faces . b. Exterior Doors : SDI 100, Grade III , extra heavy duty, Model 2, min. 16 ga. faces . C. Exposed Faces of Doors and Panels Including Stiles and Rails of Non-Flush Units : Fabricate from only cold-rolled steel . d. Frames , Concealed Stiffeners , Reinforcement , Edge Channels Louvers and Moldings : Fabricate from either cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel , at fabricator ' s option. e. Exterior Doors , Panels , and Frames : Fabricate from galvanized sheet steel . f . Close top and bottom edges of all doors as integral part of door construction or by add- ition of min. 16-gEk. inverted steel channels . g. Exposed Fasteners : Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips heads for exposed screws and bolts . C. Finish Hardware Preparation: 1 . Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier .. 2. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series specifications for door and frame prepar- ation for hardware. 3. For concealed overhead door closers , provide space, cutouts , reinforcing, and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames , as applica- ble. 4. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface- applied hardware. 5. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied finish hardware may be done at Project site. 6. Locate finish hardware as shown on final shop draw- ings or , if not shown, in accordance with Recom- mended Locations for Builder ' s Hardware, published by Door and Hardware Institute. D. Shop Painting: 1 . Clean, treat , and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units , including galvanized sur- faces . 2. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust , oil , grease, dirt , and other foreign materials before application of paint . 3. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint . 4. Apply finish coat to doors indicated as prefinished 8632 08100-3 Metal Doors and VA Frames Drawings . 5. Indicate and coordinate glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements . C. Samples : 1 . Full range of color samples for Architect selec- tion. 2. 2 samples , min. 6 in. iaq. , of each color and tex- ture selected for factory finished doors and frames . 1 . 04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection : 1 . Protect hollow metal units from damage during transit , storage, and installation. 2. Tool marks , rust , blemishes , and any other damage on exposed surfaces will not be acceptable. 3. Protect units during construction period so they will be without any indication of deterioration, use, or damage at time of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. Steel : 1 . Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip : Commercial qua- lity carbon steel , pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A569 and A568. 2. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets : Commercial quality car- bon steel , complying with ASTM A366 and A568. 3. Galvanized Steel Sheets : Zinc-coated carbon steel , commercial quality, comply with ASTM A526, A525, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. B. Anchors and Fasteners : 1 . Supports and Anchors : Fabricate of min. 18 ga. galvanized sheet steel . 2. Inserts , Bolts and Fasteners : Manufacturer' s stan- dard units , hot-dip galvanize items to be built into exterior walls , comply with ASTM A153, Class C or D, as applicable. C. Shop Applied Paint : Rust- inhibitive primer enamel or paint , either air-drying or baking, suitable as base for specified finish paints . 2. 02 FABRICATION A. General : 1 . Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects , warp, or buckle. 2. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in 00 „ manufacturer ' s plant . 3. Clearly identify Work that cannot be permanently 8632 08100-2 Metal Doors and VA Frames SECTION 08100 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Listing of Significant Items : 1 . Flush Doors . 2. Fire Rated Doors. 3. Hollow Metal Door Frames . 4. Glazed Light Frames . B. Related Sections : 1 . 04200, Unit Masonry. 2. 07900, Joint Sealers . 3. 08210, Wood Doors . 4. 08710, Finish Hardware. 5. 09900, Painting. 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards : 1 . Provide doors and frames complying with SDI Re- commended Specifications , Standard Steel Doors and Frames , SDI -100, and as specified. 2. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies : Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated or required, provide fire- rated door and frame assemblies complying with NFPA 80 for Fire Doors and Windows, and have been test- ed, listed, and labeled in accordance with ASTM E152, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assem- blies by nationally recognized independent testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Temperature Rise Rating: At stairwell enclosures, provide doors which have Temperature Rise Rating of max. 450 deg. F in 30 minutes of fire exposure. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data : Submit manufacturer ' s technical product data substantiating products comply with requirements . B. Shop Drawings : 1 . Submit for fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames . 2. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types , conditions at opening, details of construction, location and installation require- ments of finish hardware and reinforcements , and details of joints and connections . 3. Show anchorage and accessory items . 000k 4. Provide Schedule of doors and frames using same re- ference numbers for details and openings as on 8632 08100-1 Metal Doors and VA Frames DIVISION 8 DOORS and WINDOWS 3. 04 PROTECTION A. Cure sealants to manufacturer ' s instructions to obtain maximum bond to surfaces , cohesive strength, and dura- bility at earliest possible date. B. Advise concerning proper procedures for protection of sealants during remainder of construction period. C. Repair and replace sealants damaged or showing evidence of deterioration before time of Final Acceptance. D. Protect weep holes against clogging during construc- tion. - END OF SECTION - 8632 07900-5 Joint Sealers VA 3. 03 INSTALLATION A. General : 1 . Prime or seal bonding joint surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer, taking care to avoid mi - gration of primer or sealer onto adjoining surf- aces ; remove spillage promptly. 2. Install bond breaker to prevent bonding of sealant to surfaces where bond might impair performance of sealant . 3. Do not puncture surface of skin of compressible rod type bond breaker . 4. Comply with manufacturer' s printed instructions , except as otherwise directed and recorded by manu- facturer ' s representative. 5. Provide weep holes as required. B. Sealant Depth : 1 . Apply sealant to depth shown or, if not shown, apply to manufacturer ' s recommendations and following general proportions and limitations . 2. Horizontal Joints , Sidewalks , and Pavement : Depth equal to 75 percent of joint width, min. 3/8 in. , max. 3/4 in. 3. Non-Traffic or Non-Abrasion Surfaces : Depth equal to 50 percent of joint width, min. 1/4 in. , max. 1/2 in. C. Joint Sealant Placement : 1 . Apply compounds in continuous beads or rivers , filling joint from bottom without openings , voids , or air pockets . 2. Force compounds to sides of joint so as to care- fully and thoroughly "wet " opposite joint bond surfaces , forming equal areas of contact with seal - ant. 3. Confine compound to joint areas indicated by use of masking tapes or other precautions to prevent spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces . 4. Compress joints accurately so that excess compound will not exude from joint . 5. Tool exposed surfaces to compress sealant to pro- files indicated or, if none is shown, tool surface slightly concave except: provide a slight wash on horizontal joints where horizontal and vertical surfaces meet . 6. Pour self- leveling grade compounds in horizontal joints to level indicated or , if none is shown, to level 1/16 in. bellow adjoining surface. 7. Against rough surfaces or in joints of uneven widths , avoid appearance of excess sealant by loca- ting sealant well back into joint where possible. S. Remove excess sealant promptly as Work progresses . 9. Clean adjoining surfaces as necessary to eliminate any evidence of spi 1 late. 8632 07900-4 Joint Sealers VA mended by manufacturer of sealant for specific joint surface and condition. 3. Bond Breaker Tape: Pressure-sensitive polyethylene tape. 4. Provide weep hole form fillers to meet requirements and manufacturer ' s recommendations . PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 INSPECTION A. Examine substrates , adjoining construction, and condi - tions under which Work is to be installed. B. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory condi - tions have been corrected. C. Clean surfaces and remove protective coatings which might interfere with bond of compound. 3. 02 PREPARATION A. General : 1 . Do not apply sealants to joint surfaces previously painted or treated with sealer , curing compound, water repellant , or other coating unless laboratory durability test of bond-cohesion has been performed to demonstrate bond will be durable. 2. Comply with test method procedures applicable to particular sealant . ' 3. Do not apply paint and other coatings or substances to surfaces adjoining joint surfaces until sealants are installed and nominally cured to prevent im- pairment by migration of such substances into joint surfaces . B. Coated Metal Joint Surfaces : 1 . Clean bonding surfaces unless coated metal joint surfaces have been successfully tested for bond- cohesion of sealant . 2. Clean bonding surfaces to base, non-oxidized metal by sanding, wire brushing, or clean with Toluol , Zylol , Xylene, MEK, or other process recommended by sealant manufacturer . 3. Clean immediately before sealant installation. C. Concrete and Masonry Joint Surfaces : 1 . Etch bonding surfaces with 5 percent solution of muriatic acid to remove? excess alkalinity. 2. Rinse thoroughly with diluted ammonia solution and then with clean water. 3. Insure surfaces are dry before sealant installa- tion. D. Ceramic Tile and Similar Joint Surfaces : Abrade edge surfaces to be bonded with sealants to remove glassy surface. 8632 07900-3 Joint Sealers VA b. Exposed Joints : Use sealant as selected from manufacturer ' s standard colors unless special colors are shown or specified. B. Below-Grade or Pavement Locations : 1 . Description : FS TT-S-00227E, Type I or II , Class A two-part , non-sag modified polyurethane polymer formulated with built- in adhesion additives for self-priming suitable for usage and substrate. 2. Joint Movement Range: 25 to 40 percent . 3. Service Life : Min. 20 years . 4. Ultimate Tensile Strength : 150 to 400 psi . 5. Shore A Hardness : 50 to 100 @ 75 deg. F. and 50 percent rh. 6. Color : As selected. 7. Manufacturer : Pecora Corp. , Mameco International , Williams Products Inc. , Sonneborn, W.R. Meadows . C. General Building: 1 . Description : FS TT-S-001543, Class A one-part non- sag silicone rubber sealant , with modulus suite to application. 2. Joint Movement Range : 12 to 50 percent . 3. Service Life : Min. 20 years . 4. Ultimate Tensile Strength : 250 to 450 psi . 5. Shore A Hardness : 30 to 50 @ 75 deg. F. and 50 percent rh. 6. Color : As selected. 7. Manufacturer : Pecora Corp. , W. R. Meadows , Rhone- Poulene Chemical Co. , General Electric Co. , Dow Chemical Corp. D. Interior Wet Locations : 1 . Description : FS TT-S-001543, one-part non-sag low modulus sanitary silicone rubber sealant . 2. Joint Movement Range : 12 to 50 percent . 3. Service Life : Min. 20 years . 4. Ultimate Tensile Strength : 250 to 450 psi . 5. Shore A Hardness : 30 to 50 @ 75 deg. F. and 50 percent rh. 6. Color : White. 7. Manufacturer : General Electric Co. , Dow Chemical Corp. E. Joint Filler Materials : 1 . Compressible Rod: Use for proper performance of joint , compatible with sealant and as recommended by sealant manufacturer . 2. Joint Filler : Select shape and size of joint fil - ler in consultation with sealant manufacturer for proper performance in specific condition of use. F. Miscellaneous Materials : 1 . Joint Cleaner : Provide cleaner recommended by man- ufacturer of sealant for specific joint surface and condition. 2. Joint Primer and 'Sealer : Provide compounds recom- 8632 07900-2 Joint Sealers VA SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Sealants . 2. Joint Filler Materials . 3. Miscellaneous Materials . 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications : 1 . Before installation of sealants , and at Contrac- tor ' s direction, meet at Project site to review material selections , joint preparations , instal - lation procedures , and Work sequencing. 2. Examine sample application to determine and record whether all parties agree proposed installations will perform as required. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer ' s Data: 1 . Published data or manufacturer ' s letter , clearly indicating each product to be furnished complies with Specifications , recommended for application shown, and compatible with each other material in joint system. 2. Complete instructions for handling, storage, mix- ing, priming, installation, curing, and protection of each type of compound and sealant. B. Sample : 1 . Submit for each type of exposed sealant compound, except those required to be black. 2. Provide 12 in. length installed between two samples of materials to be sealed, fully cured. 3. Samples will be reviewed for texture and color by Architect . PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. Bulk Compounds : 1 . General : Use self- leveling compounds for horizon- tal joints and non-sag compounds for all other areas , except as indicated or specified. 2. Sealant Color : a. Concealed Joints : Use sealant with manufac- turer ' s standard color having best overall per- formance qualities for indicated application. 8632 07900-1 Joint Sealers VA 4. Secure exposed edges to underlying materials using clips or tabs-edge strips . 5. Make seams in direction of water flow. 6. Hem exposed edges 1/2 in. 7. Perform cutting, fitting, punching for related Work and provide necessary accessories . C. Flashings : 1 . Install to provide watertight protection as de- tailed. 2. Use base and counter type or cap type unless In- dicated. 3. Extend min. 4 in. around corners . 4. Nail max. 3 in. o. c. unless clips or cleats are used. S. Make continuous straight runs in max. 24 ft. length except where manufacturer has more stringent re- quirements . 6. Expansion Joints : a. 3 in. loose lock, sealed watertight with seal - ant . b. Max. 10 ft . from any external or internal cor- ner. C. Max. 34 ft . , min. 7:0 ft . on straight runs , cen- tered. d. Lock and lap and rivet running Joints . D. Separate dissimilar metals by painting with SSPC 12 bituminous mastic or by using bitumen saturated and coated felt . E. Specific Items : Refer to SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Specifications and comply with details indicated. 3. 02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed surfaces to manufacturer ' s recommenda- tions . B. Provide protection to insure Work remains undamaged until time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION - 8632 07700-4 Roof Specialties and VA Accessories a. 18 ga. , aluminum with mill finish and 3 in. beaded flange, neatly welded. b. Fit with 1 in. fiberglass insulation fully covered and protected by 18 ga. metal liner of aluminum. 2. Curb: a. 12 in. high, 11 ga. aluminum formed with 3-1/2 in. flange with holes provided for securing to roof deck. b. Equip with integral, metal cap flashing of same gage and material its curb, fully welded at corners . C. Fit 1 in. rigid fiberboard insulation on exter- ior of curb. 3. Fittings and Hardware : a. Hinges : Heavy pintle. b. Lifting Mechanism: Compression spring opera- tors enclosed in telescopic tubes . C. Latch: Positive snap with handles and padlock hasps inside and o»tside. d. Neoprene draft seal fitted to cover . e. Equip with automatic hold-open arm with red vinyl grip handle, one hand release. f . Hardware Finish : Cadmium plated. 4. Manufacturer : Bilco Co. , Dur-Red Products . D. Smoke Vent : 1 . Cover : a. 18 ga. , aluminum with mill finish and 3 in. beaded flange, neatly welded. b. Fit with 1 in. fiberglass insulation fully covered and protected by 18 ga. aluminum metal I iner. 2. Curb : a. 12 in. high, 11 ga. aluminum formed with 3-1/2 in. flange with holes provided for securing to roof deck. 3. Hardware : Safety stops , heavy duty aluminum pivot hinges , chrome torsion springs and lifting arms , control and 212 deg. F. fusible link. 4. Manufacturer : Bilco Co. , Dur-Red Products . PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 INSTALLATION A. General : 1 . Comply with SMACNA requirements unless indicated. 2. Refer to Section 07900, Joint Sealers , for sealant installation. 3. Do not proceed with Work until curb and substrate construction is completed. B. Application : 1 . Make joints tight . 2. Conceal nails and fasteners where possible. 3. Do not use face nailing on exposed surfaces . 8632 07700-3 Roof Specialties and VA Accessories finish, except as indicated. b. Extrusions : 6063-T52, clear anodized finish, min. 0. 080 in. thickness . B. Fasteners : 1 . Use fasteners of type and size suited for location and substrate. 2. Aluminum: Use stainless steel or aluminum alloy. C. Accessories : 1 . Roofing Felt : Asphalt saturated, 15 lb. unperfor- ated type. 2. Building Paper : Rosin sized, unsaturated, 6 lb. per 100 sq. ft . 3. Sealants : Refer to Section 07900, Joint Sealers . 2. 02 FABRICATION A. Fabricated Flashing and Sheet Metal : 1 . General : a. Comply with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and Drawings for size, location, and fabrication of items . b. Material : Aluminum. 2. Forming: a. Accurately reproduce profiles and bends. b. Make intersections sharp, even, and true. C. Make plain surfaces free from buckles and waves with minimal joints . d. Reinforce Work as required for strength and appearance. e. Bend to minimum radius recommended by manufac- turer with radius riot less than metal thick- ness . B. Prefabricated Roof Specialities : 1 . General : Refer to Drawings for size, profile, and location of items . 2. Copings : a. Two-part press- locking composite with concealed fasteners , raised edge sloping away from front edge of wall , and compression cleat or pad spaced to manufacturer ' s recommendations . b. Material : 0. 050 in. aluminum. C. Product : Standard Metal Products Model Press- Lock Coping, Construction Specialties Model Snap-Lock Coping. 3. Gravel Stop/Fascia : a. Two-part press- locking composite with concealed fasteners . b. Material : 0. 050 in. aluminum. C. Product : Standard Metal Products Model MRP Fascia System, Construction Specialties Model Snap-On Gravel Stop. C. Roof Hatch : 1 . Cover : 8632 07700-2 Roof Specialties and VA Accessories SECTION 07700 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Fabricated Flashing and Sheet Metal . 2. Manufactured Roof Specialties . 3. Roof Hatches . 4. Smoke Vent . B. Related Sections : 1 . 07500, Membrane Roofing;. 2. 07900, Joint Sealers . 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria: 1 . Heat/Smoke Vent : a. Provide units tested, listed, and labeled for construction and operation by UL. b. Lid Fire Resistance: UL Class A. B. Reference Standards : 1 . SMACNA, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual . 2. NRCA, Roofing and Waterproofing Manual . 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data : Submit manufacturer ' s technical product data, rough- in diagrams , details , installation instruc- tions , and general product recommendations for all items . B. Shop Drawings : Submit for fabricated items indicating layout , joining, profiles , accessories , anchorages , flashing connections , and ;relationship to supporting structure and adjoining roof and wall construction. C. Samples : 1 . Submit for items exposed to view in completed in- stallation, complete with finishes for review and acceptance by Architect . 2. Submit 8 In. sq. !sheet materials with finishes . 3. Submit 24 in. length extruded materials . PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. Metals : 1 . Aluminum: a. Sheet : ASTM B209, 3003-H14, clear anodized 8632 07700- 1 Roof Specialties and VA Accessories seams and accommodate contours of roof deck and proper drainage across shingled laps of sheets . 3. Loose/Ballasted FSR: a. Install membrane by unrolling over prepared "+ substrate, nail only at perimeter and at roof- ing penetrations . b. Lap adjoining sheets as recommended by FSR manufacturer ; bond as recommended by manufac- turer , cover top edges of each sheet at seams with uniform fillet of sealant . C. Install ( lashings and counterflashings as shown and recommended by manufacturer. d. Apply ballast course in uniform thickness 10 lbs . per square foot , spread with care to minimize damage to membrane. 4. Walkway Protection Boards : a. Install boards at locations shown and required for access to roof-mounted equipment . b. Place boards carefully to avoid damage to mem- brane, lay over additional layer of roof mem- brane material , loosely applied, for additional protection. - END OF SECTION - 8632 07500-6 Membrane Roofing VA 2. Walkway Protection Boards : Prefabricated concrete pavers containing no asphalt or coal -tar deriv- atives , suitable for use without cracking or break- ing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 PREPARATION A. General : 1 . Comply with manufacturer ' s instructions for pre- paration of substrate to receive FSR system. 2. Clean substrate of dust , debris , and other sub- stances detrimental to FSR system work. 3. Remove sharp projections . 4. Install cant strips , flashings , and accessory items as shown and as recommended by manufacturer . 5. Prime substrate where recommended by manufacturer of materials being installed. B. Prevent compounds from entering and clogging drains and conductors , and from spilling or migrating onto surf- aces of other work. 3. 02 INSTALLATION A. General : Comply with manufacturers ' instructions , except where more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Insulation Installation : 1 . General : a. Extend insulation full thickness as single layer over entire surface to be insulated ; cut and fit 'tightly around obstructions . b. Form cant strips , crickets , saddles , and tap- ered areas with additional material as shown and required for ,proper drainage of membrane. 2. Do not install more insulation each day than can be covered with membrane before end of day and before start of inclement weather . 3. Set units in adhesive applied in accordance with requirements of applicable fire and insurance ratings . 4. Nail roof insulation to substrate with mechanical anchors of type and spacing Indicated ; provide min. 1 anchor per 4 sq. ft , of surface area or minimum anchorage than required by FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28. 5. Set insulation units loose on substrate and cover immediately with loose membrane for ballasted installation. 6. Limit joints between ,adjacent units max. 1/4 in. C. FSR Membrane: 1 . General : Start installation only in presence of manufacturer ' s technical representative. 2. Cut sheets to maximum size possible to minimize 8632 07500-5 Membrane Roofing VA lisle Syntec Systems , Firestone Building Products Co. , Goodyear Tire & Rubber Co. C. Miscellaneous Materials for FSR: 1 . Sheet Seaming System: Manufacturer ' s standard mat- erials for sealing; lapped joints , including edge sealer to cover exposed spliced edges as recommen- ded by manufacturer of FSR system. 2. Cant Strips and Flashing Accessories : Types rec- ommended by manufacturer of FSR material ; provi - vid at locations indicated and recommended by manufacturer , Including adhesive tapes , flashing cements , and sealants . 3. Slip Sheet : Type recommended by manufacturer of FSR material for protection of sheet from incom- patible substrates . 4. Aggregate Surface Ballast : Washed, rounded, riv- erbed gravel or other acceptable smooth-faced stone ranging in size from 3/4 to 1-1/2 in. dia. which will withstand weather exposure without significant deterioration. 5. Protective Coating: Liquid-applied Hypalon finish coat for application to exposed membrane in color selected by Architect from manufacturer ' s standard colors . 6. Mechanical Fasteners : Metal plates , caps , battens , accessory components , fastening devices , and adhe- sives to suit substrate and as recommended by FSR membrane manufacturer . 7. Membrane Adhesive : As recommended by FSR membrane manufacturer for particular substrate and Project conditions , formulated to withstand min. 60 psf uplift force. D. Insulation : 1 . Description : FS IHH-1- 1972, phenolic foam board with glass facers overlapped with 1/2 in. wood fiberboard or 3/4 in. perlite board. 2. Fire Resistance : ASTM E84 to following standards : a. Flame Spread : 0 to 25. b. Smoke Developed : 0 to 25. 3. Density : 2. 5 lbs . per cu. ft . 4. Thermal Resistance : R-value = 8. 33 @ 1 in. per RIC/TIMA Bulletin 281-1 . 5. Product : Koppers Co. Model RX. E. Miscellaneous Insulation Materials : 1 . Mastic Sealer : Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for bonding edge joints and filling voids . 2. Mechanical Anchors : Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for deck type and complying with fire and insurance rating requirements . F. Miscellaneous Roofing Accessories : ,. 1 . Flashing Material : Manufacturer ' s standard system compatible with flexible sheet membrane. 8632 07500-4 Membrane Roofing VA formed in accordance with manufacturer ' s recommenda- tions and warranty requirements . 1 . 05 WARRANTY A. Special Project Warranty : 1 . Provide written Warranty, signed by Manufacturer of primary roofing materials and authorized Installer , agreeing to replace/repair defective materials and installation. 2. Repairs and replacements required because of events beyond Contractor " s/ Installer ' s/Manufacturer ' s control , and which exceed performance requirements , shall be completed by Contractor/ Installer and paid for by Owner . 3. Warranty period is 10 years after date of Substan- tial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. General : 1 . Performance : Provide roofing materials of generic type indicated and tested to show compliance with indicated performances , or provide other similar materials certified in writing by manufacturer to be equal or better than specified in every signi - ficant respect , and acceptable to Architect . 2. Compatibility : Provide products recommended by manufacturers fully compatible with indicated sub- strates , or provide separation materials as re- quired to eliminate contact between incompatible materials . B. EPDM FSR Membrane : 1 . General : a. Ethylene propylene diene monomers formed into uniform, flexible sheets . b. Tensile Strength : ASTM D412, 1400 psi . C. Ultimate Elongation: ASTM D412, 300 percent . d. Brittleness Temperature : ASTM D746, -75 deg. F. e. Tear Resistance : ASTM D624, 125 lbs . per lin. in. f . Resistance to Ozone Aging: ASTM D1149, no cracks after 168 hours exposure of 50 percent elongated samples at 104 deg. F and 100 pphm ozone. g. Resistance to Heat Aging: ASTM D573, max. 30 percent reduction in elongation, max. 15 per- cent loss of tensile strength, 168 hours at 240 deg. F. h. Thickness : 45 mils , nominal . i . Exposed Face Color : Black. 2. Manufacturer : a. Loose Laid and Ballasted EPDM Membrane: Car- 8632 07500-3 Membrane Roofing VA fire and extended coverage insurance on roofing and associated Work. 2. UL Listing: a. Provide labeled materials tested and listed by UL for application indicated. b. Rating: Class A. 3. Thermal Resistance : Where thermal resistance pro- perties of insulating materials are designated by R-values , they represent rate of heat flow through material of thickness indicated, measured by test method included in referenced standard or indicat- ed; expressed by temperature difference in degrees F between two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through 1 sq. ft . per hour at mean temperatures indicated. 4. Fire Performance Characteristics : a. Provide insulation materials identical to those whose fire performance characteristiccs , as listed for each material or assembly, have been determined by testing by methods indicated, UL, or other testing and inspecting agency accept- able to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Surface Burning Characteristics : ASTM E84. C. Fire Resistance Ratings : ASTM E119. d. Combustibility Characteristics : ASTM E136. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data : 1 . Submit specifications , installation instructions and general recommendations from manufacturers of flexible sheet roofing system materials for types of roofing required. 2. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements . B. Samples : 1 . Submit 12 in. square samples of finished roofing sheets , including "T-shaped" side/end- lap seam. 2. Submit 3 lb. samples of aggregate surfacing mat- erial . 3. Submit 12 in. square samples of required insula- tion. C. Shop Drawings : 1 . Submit complete shop drawings showing roof confi - guration and sheet layout , details at perimeter , and special conditions. 2. Indicate layout of tapered insulation materials . D. Pre-Roofing Conference : Submit copies of Pre-Roofing Conference records . 1 . 04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Weather : Proceed with roofing work when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit Work to be per- 8632 07500-2 Membrane Roofing VA SECTION 07500 MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Loosely Installed and Ballasted Elastomeric Sheet . 2. Roof Insulation. B. Related Sections : 1 . 06100, Rough Carpentry. 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Quality Control : 1 . Obtain primary flexible sheet roofing from single manufacturer . 2. Provide secondary materials as recommended by man- ufacturer of primary materials . 3. Manufacturer shall send qualified technical repre- sentative to Project site for purposes of advising Installer of procedures and precautions in use of roofing materials . B. Qualification : 1 . Installer : a. Firm having min. 3 years successful experience in installation of roofing systems similar to those required for Project , acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer of primary roofing materials . b. Assign work closely associated with flexible sheet roofing, including vapor barriers , insu- lation, flashing and counterflashing, expansion joints , and joint sealers , to Installer of flexible sheet roofing. C. Pre-Roofing Conference : 1 . Before installation of roofing and associated Work, meet at Project site with Installer, roofing manu- facturer , installers of related Work, and other persons concerned with roofing performance, inclu- ding, where applicable, Owner ' s insurer, test agen- cies , governing authorities , Architect , and Owner . 2. Record discussions and agreements and furnish copy to each participant . 3. Provide min. 72 hours advance notice to partici - pants before convening Pre-Roofing Conference. D. Special Requirements : 1 . Insurance Certification: Assist Owner in prepar- ation and submittal of roof installation accept- ance Certification necessary in connection with 8632 07500-1 Membrane Roofing VA ow C. Protection : 1 . Protect fireproofing according to advice of fire- proofing manufacturer and installer from damage re- sulting from construction operations or other cau- A0M* ses so fireproofing will be without damage or de- terioration at time of Substantial Completion. 2. Coordinate installation of fireproofing with other Work to minimize need for other trades to cut or remove fireproofing. 3. As other trades successively complete installation of Work, maintain protection of structure afforded by fireproofing by patching any areas which have been removed or damaged before concealment of fire- proofing by other Work. 4. Repair or replace work which has not been success- fully protected. - END OF SECTION - 8632 07250-5 Fireproofing VA of each substrate to be protected. 2. Unless otherwise recommended by fireproofing manu- facturer , install body of fireproof covering in single course. .,: 3. Apply fireproofing; in thicknesses and densities in- dicated, but not less than that required to achieve fire resistance ratings designated for each con- dition, unless greater thicknesses and densities are indicated. 4. Steel beams and bracing: Provide min. 1 in. thick- ness . 5. Metal floor or roof decks : Provide min. 1/2 in. thickness . 6. Apply fireproofing materials by sprayed-on method to maximum extent possible. 3. 03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: 1 . Testing Laboratory : Owner will employ and pay independent testing laboratory to perform field quality control testing. 2. Extent and Testing Methodology : a. Arrange for testing of completed fireproofing in successive stages in areas described below. b. Do not proceed with fireproofing of next area until test results for previously completed Work show compliance with requirements. C. Extent of Each Test Area : Max. one floor or 10, 000 sq. ft . , whichever produces greatest number of test areas . d. Within each area, testing laboratory shall ran- domly select typical bay, and test each fire- proofed structural element for thickness and density per ASTM E605. e. Within each area, testing laboratory shall ran- domly select one typical structural element of each type and test fireproofing for cohesion/ adhesion per ASTM E736. 3. Testing Laboratory shall report test results prom- ptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect . 4. Repair or replace fireproofing within areas where test results indicate fireproofing does not comply with requirements . 3. 04 CLEANING, REPAIR, AND, PROTECTION A. Cleaning: Immediately upon completion of spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove overspray and fallout of materials from surfaces of other Work and clean exposed surfaces to remove evi - dence of soiling. B. Cure exposed cementitious fireproofing materials in compliance with fireproofing manufacturers recommenda- tions to prevent premature drying. 8632 07250-4 Fireproofing VA B. Auxiliary Fireproofing Materials : 1 . General : Provide auxiliary fireproofing materials compatible with sprayed-on fireproofing products and substrates , approved for use indicated by man- ufacturer of sprayed-on fireproofing, which have been approved by UL or other acceptable testing and inspecting agency for use in fire-resistance rated designs indicated. 2. Substrate Primers : Type approved by manufacturer of sprayed-on fireproofing for substrate and condi - tions of exposure indicated. 3. - Adhesive for Bonding Fireproofing: Type recommend- ed by manufacturer of sprayed-on fireproofing manu- facturer . PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate and remove coatings and other substan- ces which might interfere with bond of fireproofing. B. Equipment and Materials : 1 . Verify clips , hangers , supports , sleeves , and other items required to penetrate fireproofing are in- stalled. 2. Verify ducts , piping, equipment , and other items which interfere with application of fireproofing in new construction are not positioned until fire- !00k proofing is completed. 3. Verify roofing application is complete and roof traffic has ceased before applying to roof decks . 4. Verify concrete Work is completed before applying to steel decks . 5. For existing Work;, mask equipment and materials not to receive fireproofing. C. Close off and seal ductwork in areas of fireproofing application. 3. 02 INSTALLATION A. General : 1 . Comply with fireproofing manufacturer ' s instruct- ions for mixing materials , application procedures , and types of equipment used to convey and spray on fireproofing materials ; as applicable to particular condiitons of installation and required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Coat substrates with adhesive before application of fireproofing where required to achieve fire-resis- tance rating or recommended by fireproofing manu- facturer for material and application indicated. B. Fireproofing: 1 . Extend fireproofing full thickness over entire area 8632 07250-3 Fireproofing VA primer manufacturer . 4. Sprayed-on fireproofing manufacturer' s certifica- tion that product complies with Specification re- quirements and are suitable for use indicated. 1 . 04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements : 1 . Provide ventilation in areas to receive fireproof- ing during and 24 hrs . after application, to dry material and maintain nontoxic, unpolluted working area. 2. Provide temporary enclosure to prevent spray from contaminating air . 3. Do not apply spray fireproofing when temperature of substrate, material , and surrounding air is below 40 deg. F. 4. Maintain temperature 24 hrs . before and 24 hrs . after application of fireproofing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. Concealed Sprayed-On Fireproofing Materials : 1 . General : For concealed applications of sprayed-on fireproofing, provide manufacturer ' s standard pro- ducts complying with requirements indicated below for material composition and physical properties representative of installed products. 2. Cementitious Fireproofing: Factory-mixed dry for- mulation of inorganic binders and lightweight mi - neral aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form slurry for pumping and for dispersal by compressed air introduced at spray nozzle. 3. Physical Properties : a. Bond Strength : 80 lbf . per sq. ft . , ASTM E736. b. Compressive Strength : 3. 47 lbf . per sq. in. , ASTM E761 . C. Corrosion Resistance : No evidence of corro- sion, ASTM E937. d. Deflection : No cracking, spalling, delamina- tion or like, ASTM E759. e. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, delamination or like, ASTM E760. f . Air Erosion : Maximum weight loss of 0. 025 grams per sq. ft . , ASTM E859. g. Dry Density : Values for average and Individual densities as required for fire-resistance rat- ings indicated, ASTM E605. h. Hardness : Max. 0. 50 in. penetration, ASTM C569. I . Surface Burning Characteristics : Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 10 and 0, respectively. 4. Product : Grace Construction Products Div. Model Monokote. 8632 07250-2 Fireproofing VA SECTION 07250 FIREPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Fireproofing Material . 2. Sealer. B. Related Sections : 1 . 05120, Structural Steel . 2. 05500, Metal Fabrications . 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria : 1 . Flame Spread : Rating as specified elsewhere in Contract Documents , tested to ASTM E84. 2. Corrosion Resistance : Test to ASTM B117 for 240 hrs . , demonstrate it inhibits corrosion of steel when applied to unpainted steel . 3. Deflection : Material shall not crack or delamin- ate when backing to which it is applied is sub- jected to downward deflection of 1/120th of span. 4. Bond Impact Test : ASTM E760. 5. Bond Strength : ASTM E736. 6. Dusting: ASTM E859. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data : Submit manufacturer' s product data for each sprayed-on fireproofing product indicated. B. Test Reports : 1 . Certified test results from independent testing laboratory indicating compliance of sprayed-on fireproofing products with performance requirements indicated, Including asbestos content where appli - cable. 2. Test results of in-place performance as required under Part 3 of Section for Field Quality Control . C. Certificates : 1 . Where primers are applied to steel in shop or field, submit statement from primer manufacturers , certifying primers are compatible with sprayed-on fireproofing and will not impair its performance under fire exposure for applications indicated, as proved by ASTM E119 test . 2. Include test and other data as evidence; distribute data to sprayed-on fireproofing manufacturer . 3. Acceptance of steel primers by sprayed-on fire- proofing manufacturer , based on data submitted by 8632 07250-1 Fireproofing VA tegrity of vapor barrier . 5. Foundations : a. Extend around entire perimeter underslab of conditioned spaces to 24 in. from foundation ru, w a 1 1 . b. Extend down foundation wall to footings on inside of foundation wall around entire peri - meter of conditioned spaces . C. Batt or Blanket : 1 . Non-Flanged Blankets - Metal Studs : a. Install between studs from interior side of wall . b. Attach to gypsum sheathing using 9/16 in. staples with divergent points placed at each corner and in center of each blanket . C. Hold blanket tightly against metal lath back- ing with taut horizontal tie-wires spaced max. 36 in. o. c,. D. Vapor Barrier : 1 . Extend to perimeter of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. 2. Secure in place and seal all joints by lapping min. 2 in. and sealing all joints . 3. Repair any tears or penetrations . 4. Location : Apply on subgrade before placement of concrete slab and on all interior warm side of perimeter insulation. - END OF SECTION - 8632 07200-3 Insulation VA UC Industries Model Foamular 250 TG, Amoco Corp. B. Fibrous - Batt or Blanket Glass Fiber : 1 . Description : ASTM C665, glass fiber blanket thermal and acoustical insulation. 2. Fire Resistance : ASTM E84 to following standards : a. Flame Spread : 0 - 25. b. Fuel Contributed : 0 - 50. C. Smoke Developed : 0 - 50. 3. Density : 0. 50 to 4 lbs. per cu. ft . 4. Thermal Resistance : R-value = 3. 16 @ 1 in. 5. Manufacturer : Owens Corning Fiberglas Corp. , Cer- tainteed Corp. , Manville. C. Miscellaneous Materials : 1 . Vapor Barrier Tape: 2 mil , dead soft aluminum foil backing with transparent synthetic rubber adhesive, rated UL Class 1 . 2. Supports and Anchors : a. Rigid Insulation : One-piece nylon spindle with perforated base plate, washer , and suitable adhesive to attach skewer to substrate. b. Blanket Insulation : Metal skewers or mechani - cally attached clips . D. Vapor Barrier : 1 . Cross laminated high strength, high density poly sheeting. 2. Product : Sto Cote Products Inc. Model Tu-Tuf 4. *` PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 INSTALLATION A. General : 1 . Extend insulation full thickness over entire area to be covered unless indicated otherwise. 2. Cut and fit insulation, where required, tightly around all obstructions so no voids exist in in- sulation course. 3. Comply with manufacturer ' s instructions for parti - cular condition of use and type of insulation and accessory items . 4. Consult manufacturer ' s representative for specific Instructions if instructions are not applicable to conditions of use. B. Rigid Board : 1 . Stagger end joint locations in single layer in- stallation. 2. Coat edges of insulation boards with adhesive at joints when insulation system is set in adhesive. 3. Shove boards into place so that compound seals joints . 4. Apply vapor barrier tape to all seams , joints , penetrations , and terminations where shown to receive vapor barrier facing to achieve full In- 8632 07200-2 Insulation VA SECTION 07200 INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Rigid Board Insulation. 2. Fibrous Batt or Blanket Insulation. 3. Vapor Barrier . B. Related Sections : 1 . 02200, Earthwork. 2. 03300, Cast- In-•Place Concrete. 3. 04200, Unit Masonry. 4. 09250, Gypsum Board. 1 . 02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data : Submit manufacturer ' s product specifica- tions and installation instructions for each type of insulation and vapor barrier material required. B. Certified Tests : With product data, submit copies of certified test report showing compliance with specified performance values „ including k-values - aged values for plastic insulations - densities, compression strengths , burning characteristics , perm ratings , water absorption ratings „ and similar ratings . 1 . 03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANI) HANDLING A. Protection : 1 . Protect insulation materials from weather and con- struction processes . 2. Do not allow insulation to become wet or soiled. 3. Comply with precautions and recommendations of manufacturer . PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. Rigid Board - Foamed Polystyrene : 1 . Description : ASTM C578, extruded polystyrene foam insulation. 2. Fire Resistance : ASTM E84 to following standards : a. Flame Spread: 0 - 25. b. Fuel Contributed : 0. C. Smoke Developed : 0 - 160. 3. Density : 1 . 6 to 3. 4. Water Vapor Permeance : ASTM E96, max. 1 . 0 perm. '* 5. Thermal Resistance : R-value = 4 to 6 @ 1 in. 6. Product : Dow Chemical U. S. A. Model Styrofoam TG, 8632 07200-1 Insulation VA 1 . Install separate flashings and corner protection stripping as recommended by prime materials manu- facturer , where indicated to precede application of dampproofing. 2. Comply with details shown and manufacturer ' s recom- mendations. 3. Give particular attention to requirements at build- ing expansion joints , if any. C. Application : 1 . Brush/Spray-Applied Liquid Emulsion : 2 gal . per 100 sq. ft . ; min. 15 mils thick. 2. Brush/Spray-Applied Semi -Fibrated Emulsion : 5 gal . per 100 sq. ft . ; min. 30 mils thick. 3. Trowel -Applied Fibrated Emulsion : 7 gal . per 100 sq. ft . ; min. 30 mils thick. D. Protection Course : 1 . Where indicated, install protection course of type Indicated, over completed and cured dampproofing treatment . 2. Comply with dampproofing materials manufacturer ' s recommendations for method of support or attachment of protection materials . 3. Support with spot-application of plastic cement where not otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION - 8632 07160-3 Bituminous Dampproofing VA C. Above Grade : Semi -fibrated type semi -mastic emulsion, except where otherwise indicated ; ASTM D1227„ Type II . 2. Bond-Coat Type ; Where asphalt emulsion damp- '00k proofing is shown as bond-coat for bonding of plaster or other materials to substrate, provide tacky-surfaced material recommended by manufacturer for application shown. 3. Manufacturer : Celotex Corporation, Karnak Chemical Corp. Koppers Company Inc. , Tamko Asphalt Prod- ucts Inc. B. Miscellaneous Materials : 1 . General : If specific manufacturers of miscella- neous dampproofing; materials are not indicated below, provide materials acceptable to manufac- turer of primary dampproofing materials , bitumens . 2. Bituminous Grout : ASTM D147. 3. Protection Course,, Board Type: Asphalt impregnated and coated organic; fiberboard, 1/4 in. thick. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 INSTALLATION A. General : 1 . Except as otherwise indicated, apply dampproofing to all exterior below-grade surfaces of exterior underground walls in contact with earthwork or other backfill , in any situation where space of any 000* kind is enclosed on opposite side. 2. Extend vertical dampproofing down walls from fin- ished grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and turn down min. 6 in. over out- side face of footing. 3. Extend 12 in. onto intersecting walls , and footings but do not extend onto surfaces which will be ex- posed to view when Project is completed. 4. Comply with manufacturer ' s instructions , except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where Project conditions re- quire extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of Work. 5. Mask or otherwise protect adjoining Work to prevent spillage or migration of dampproofing materials onto other surfaces of Work. 6. Do not allow dampproofing materials to enter drains or conductors . 7. Install 2 in. x 2 in. cant strip of bituminous grout at base of vertical dampproofing where it meets horizontal surface. 8. Fill voids , seal joints , and apply bond breakers , if any, as recommended by prime materials manu- facturer , with particular attention at construction joints . B. Flashing: 8632 07160-2 Bituminous Dampproofing VA SECTION 07160 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Asphalt Emulsion. B. Related Sections : 1 . 02200, Earthwork. 2. 03300, Cast- In--Place Concrete. 3. 04200, Unit Masonry. 1 . 02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data : 1 . Submit manufacturer ' s technical product data, in- stallation instructions, and recommendations for each dampproofing material required. 2. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements . 1 . 03 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Substrate : Proceed with dampproofing Work only after substrate construction and penetrating Work have been completed. B. Weather : Proceed with dampproofing Work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit Work to be performed in accordance with manufacturer' s recommendations . C. Ventilation : Provide adequate ventilation to prevent accumulation of hazardous fumes during application of solvent-based components in enclosed spaces , and main- tain ventilation until coatings have thoroughly cured. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing : 1 . Asphalt Emulsion: a. Manufacturer' s standard asphalt and water emul - sion, recommended for below-grade exterior and for above-grade interior applications to either damp, green, or dry substrates , compounded to penetrate substrate and build to moisture-re- sistant but breathing type of firm, elastic coating. b. Below Grade : Heavy fibrated type mastic emul - sion ; except where otherwise indicated. 8632 07160-1 Bituminous Dampproofing VA completely fill voids , holes , cracks , leaving no pinholes or uncovered areas . - END OF SECTION - 6632 07145-3 Cementitious Water- VA proofing 3. Color : Cement gray or white. 4. Product : Thoro Systems Products Model Thoroseal . PART 3 EXECUTION #PIK 3. 01 INSPECTION A. Inspect all surfaces to receive waterproofing and ver- ify : 1 . Surfaces are free of dirt , grease, oil , curing compounds , form release agents , paints , impregna- tions , all loose material , and foreign matter like- ly to affect bond or performance of waterproofing. 2. For provisions for cants , coves , fillets , penetra- tions , and construction joint strips refer to Sec- tion 03300, Cast- In-Place Concrete. 3. Provisions for expansion and control joints are consistent with Specifications and Drawings. 4. Set Concrete Surfaces : a. Surfaces are sufficiently rough to ensure good cement bond. b. Finish similar- to medium sandpaper or rougher is recommended[. C. Surfaces/substrates have completed min. 14 day curing period, are structurally sound, and all cracks have been repaired. 3. 02 INSTALLATION A. Cementitious Waterproofing : 1 . Cleaning and Roughening: Mechanically or chemi - cally clean and roughen surfaces by waterblasting, sandblasting, chipping, brushing, acid-etching, or using approved chemical detergent . 2. Repairing Cracks, Spalled Areas , and Patching Holes : a. Rout cracks not subject to movement exceeding 1/10 in. width to min. 1 in. depth and patch with waterproofing. b. Treat all cracks subject to movement as indica- ted in Specifications and on Drawings . C. Seal all cracks and active leaks with water- proof plug. d. Patch honeycombed or spalled concrete areas and holes with waterproofing. 3. - Surface Wetdown : Wet all surfaces thoroughly saturated moist and remove all freestanding and excess water before applying waterproofing. 4. Application : a. Mix materials to consistency recommended by manufacturer. b. Thoroughly mix waterproofing using mortar mixer or electric drill mixer , leaving no lumps or unmixed materials . C. Add water to achieve desired consistency, not excluding manufacturer ' s recommendations . d. Apply in one coat , min. 1/8 in. thick, to 8632 07145-2 Cementitious Water- VA proofing SECTION 07145 CEMENTITIOUS WATERPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Cementitious Waterproofing. B. Related Sections : 1 . 02200, Earthwork. 1 . 02 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer ' s Review: 1 . Before delivering materials to Project site, submit statement signed by Contractor and installer indi - cating method specified has been reviewed with man- ufacturer . 2. Provide statement that manufacturer is in agreement with selected method and materials for application. 3. Provide by transmittal that manufacturer has re- received copy of statement . B. Manufacturer ' s Data : Submit technical data and instal - lation instructions . C. Certification : Executed by manufacturer for Project indicating acceptability of condition for use, license certificate for applicator issued by manufacturer . 1 . 03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver materials In manufacturer ' s unopened containers or bundles fully identified with brand, type, grade, class , and all other clualifiying information. 1 . 04 WARRANTY A. Submit for materials and application, jointly signed by applicator and manufacturer indicating materials and application shall resist water for min. 2 yr . period. B. Warranty shall include removal and replacement of all Work related to repair or replacement of waterproofing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. Cementitious Waterproofing : 1 . Composition : Prepackaged, dry, nonflammable and nontoxic waterproof cement . 2. Compressive Strength : ASTM C109, min. 6, 000 psi . 8632 07145-1 Cementitious Water- VA proofing DIVISION 7 THERMAL and MOISTURE PROTECTION B. Cleaning : 1 . Clean all surfaces . 2. Provide protection and maintain installed condition until Substantial Completion. - END OF SECTION - 8632 06400-6 Architectural Wood- VA work PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 PREPARATION A. Examine substrates and adjoining construction, and con- ditions under which Work will be installed. B. Do not proceed with Work until conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of Work have been corrected. 3. 02 INSTALLATION A. General : 1 . Verify dimensions before proceeding and obtain measurements at site for Work required to be accurately fitted to other construction. 2. Coordinate Work with other trades affected by this installation. 3. Give particular attention to work of supporting and attachment items so as not to delay progress . 4. Backprime lumber for painted finish exposed on exterior , or in moisture or humidity locations on interior , to requirements of Section 09900, Paint- ing. 5. Discard material which is unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, Improperly treated, too small to fabricate work with minimum joints , or of defective fabrica- tion with respect to surface, size, or pattern. 6. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces . B. Casework : 1 . Install without distortion for proper opening and accurate alignment: of doors and drawers . 2. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers . 3. Anchor tops to base units and other support sys- tems . C. Finishes : Refer to Section 09900, Painting, for field finished items . 3. 03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tolerances : 1 . Plumb and Level : 1/8 in. in 8 ft . 2. Offset in Surface Alignment : Max. 1/16 in. 3. Offset in Revealed Adjoining Surface: Max. 1/8 in. 3. 04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjustments : 1 . Repair damaged Work or replace with new to elimin- ate defects . 2. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. fir, 3. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. 8632 06400-5 Architectural Wood- VA work 4. Pulls : As selected. C. Countertops and Vanities : 1 . AWI 400C, Custom Grade for quality of fabrication. 2. Finish : Plastic laminate surfaced and edged. 3. Core : Particleboard. 4. Thickness : As detailed. D. Window and Storefront Framing: 1 . AWI 900, Custom Grade for fabrication and mat- erials . 2. Joinery : a. Tightness of Joints : Max. 0. 015 in. x 8 in. and not within 48 in. of similar gap for longi - tudinal joints and max. 0. 025 in. opening at intersecting joints . b. Frame Members : Connect with dadoes or rabbet joints . C. Connection Between Stiles and Rails of Window Sash : Slot mortise and tenon, glue and pin. d. Bar and Muntin Connections : Mortise and tenon, and cope ; glue and cope, and nail on radius members . E. Storefront Doors : Refer to Section 08210, Wood Doors . F. Fasteners and Anchors : 1 . Screws : a. Select material , type, size, and finish re- quired for each use. b. Comply with FS FF-SO111 for applicable require- ments . C. For metal framing supports , provide screws as recommended by metal framing manufacturer . 2. Nails : a. Select material , type, size, and finish re- quired for each use. b. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable require- ments . C. Provide stainless steel or aluminum nails for exposed exterior woodwork which is to receive transparent; finish, if any. d. Provide any type of non-corrosive nail for other exterior woodwork. 3. Anchors : a. Select material , type, size, and finish re- quired by each substrate for secure anchorage. b. Provide non-ferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion-resist- ance. C. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled- in-place anchors . d. Furnish inserts and anchors , as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for subse- quent woodwork. anchorage. 8632 06400-4 Architectural Wood- VA work 1 . Wood Screws : ANSI B18, type, size, and material as required for condition of use. 2. Bolts and Nuts : ANSI B18 and ASTM A307 type, size, and material as required. ' G. Adhesives : Melanine, phenol -resin, or seasoned-resin to AWI standards and manufacturer ' s recommendations suited for purpose. 2. 02 FABRICATION A. Architectural Cabinets - Laminate Clad : 1 . Quality Standard: AWI Section 400 and Division 400B. 2. Laminate Clad Cabinets : a. Grade : Custom. b. Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. C. Laminate Cladding: High pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3. d. Colors , Pattern and Finishes : As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer ' s standard products . 3. Laminate Grade - Exposed Surfaces : a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops : GP-50, 0. 050 in. nominal thickness . b. Postformed Surfaces : PF-42, 0. 042 in. nominal thickness . C. Vertical Surfaces : GP-50, 0. 050 in. nominal thickness . d. Edges : GP--50, 0. 050 in. nominal thickness . e. Semi -Exposed Surfaces : High pressure laminate, GP-28. f . Dust Panels : 1/4 in. plywood or tempered . hard- board above compartments and drawers except where located directly under tops . B. Cabinet Hardware and Accessory Materials : 1 . Hardware Finishes : a. Comply with BHMA 1301 for finishes indicated by BHMA Code Numbers . b. 613, dark oxidized satin bronze, oil rubbed ; bronze base. C. 626, satin chromium plated, brass or bronze base. d. 652, satin chromium plated, steel base. e. 630, satin stainless steel . f . Concealed Hardware : Provide manufacturer ' s standard finish complying with product class requirements of ANSI /BHMA A156. 9. 2. Hinges : a. Concealed, self-closing, 180 deg. operation. b. Product : ,Stanley Model 1503-2. 3. Drawer Slides : a. Full extension, side mount , stay-close, self- closing. b. Capacity : 100 lb. C. Manufacturer : Knapp & Vogt , Grant Hardware Co. 8632 06400-3 Architectural Wood- VA work 2. Store woodwork in weathertight , well ventilated area. 3. Do not install woodwork in any space until plaster , masonry, and other wet work in space is sufficient- ly dry. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. Solid Lumber Stock : 1 . General : a. Comply with AWI 100, plain sawn, S4S and work to shapes indicated, unless otherwise indica- ted. b. Exposed - Painted Finish: Grade Ii , birch for hardwood, white pine or white wood for soft- wood. C. Exposed, Transparent Finish: Red oak, Grade I . 2. Preservative Treatment - Exterior Woodwork : Refer to Section 06100, Rough Carpentry. B. Plywood : 1 . Comply with AWI 200, veneer core. 2. Face Veneer : a. Softwood : Douglas fir . 3. Cut : Plain sliced, smooth. C. Particleboard : 1 . Comply with AWI 200 and CS236, mat formed. 2. Density : Medium density, 37 to 50 lbs . per cu. ft . 3. Surface Bearing Characteristics : ASTM E64. a. Flame Spread: 25. b. Fuel Contributed : 10. C. Smoke Developed : 25. 4. Finish : a. Paint or varnish all surfaces and edges not covered with plastic laminate. b. At cutouts made for particleboard countertops , seal all edges to prevent water damage or swel - ling of material . 5. Product : Duraflakke Division Model Duraflake FR, Wilamette Industries , Inc. D. Hardboard : 1 . Comply with AWI 200, Grade 1 , tempered smooth two sides for both side exposure, smooth one side for one side concealed. 2. 1/4 in. thick tempered for use as substitute for 1/4 in. plywood when surfaces are painted. E. Plastic Laminate: 1 . NEMA LD3 General :Purpose Type 0. 05 in. thick, finish and color as selected. 2. Backing sheets on shelves 0. 02 in. thick. F. Fasteners : 8632 06400-2 Architectural Wood- VA work SECTION 06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Casework. 2. Countertops . 3. Vanities . 4. Storefront Framing; and Doors . B. Related Sections : 1 . 06100, Rough Carpentry. 2. 08210, Wood Doors ., 3. 09900, Painting. 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications : 1 . Manufacturer : Provide millwork only from manufac- turers complying with AWI Standards producing sim- ilar Work for min„ 5 yrs . 2. Installer : Employ only experienced personnel for fabrication and installation of millwork. B. Design Criteria : 1 . Reference Standards : a. Refer to AWI Quality Standards for definition of Premium, Custom, or Economy. b. Any item not given specific quality grade shall be Custom Grade. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings : 1 . Submit shop drawings showing detail construction of woodwork, based on Drawings , and modified or revi - sed as may be required to achieve intended struc- tural character . 2. Elevations : Draw at scale of min. 1/2 in. = 1 ft. 3. Details : Draw at scale of min. 3 in. = 1 ft . B. Manufacturer ' s Data : Submit literature of specialty items not manufactured by millwork manufacturer . C. Samples : Submit one sample of each item of hardware for review. 1 . 04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection and Storage : 1 . Deliver woodwork fully protected from weather and damage. 8632 06400- 1 Architectural Wood- VA work clear width of stair. 5. Fabricate stair framing to following variations be- tween treads and risers for each flight of stairs . a. Adjacent Treads and Risers : 3/16 in. b. Between Largest and Smallest Treads and Risers : 3/8 in. D. Construction Panels : 11 General : Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form No. E 30D, APA Design/Construc- tion Guide Residential & Commercial , for types of construction panels and applications indicated. 2. Fastening Methods : a. Plywood Backing Panels : Nail to supports . 3. 03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Maintain premises in neat , safe, and orderly condition during execution of Work. B. Maintain free of accumulations of sawdust , cut ends , and debris . - END OF SECTION - e0*` 8632 06100-4 Rough Carpentry VA C. Where rough carpentry is fitted to other Work, obtain measurements of other Work, verify dimensions shown on shop drawing details . D. Apply heavy brush coat of same chemical treatment mat- erial to surfaces exposed by sawing, cutting, or drill- Ing. 3. 02 ERECTION A. General : 1 . Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of Work, and units which are too small to use in fabricating Work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement . 2. Set carpentry Work to required levels and lines , members plumb and true to line, cut and fitted. 3. Securely attach carpentry Work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards . 4. Use common wire? nails , except as otherwise indica- ted. 5. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials . 6. Make tight connections between members . 7. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre- drill as required. B. Wood Grounds , Nailers , Blocking, and Sleepers : 1 . Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other Work. 2. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of Work to be attached. 3. Coordinate location with other Work involved. 4. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. 5. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces , unless otherwise indicated. 6. Build into masonry during installation of masonry Work. 7. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement . S. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-beveled lumber min. 1-1/2 in. wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved. 9. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. C. Rough Stair Framing: 1 . Provide stair framing members of size, space, and configuration Indicated or , if not otherwise in- dicated, to comply with following requirements . 2. Stringer Size : Min. 2 in. x 12 in. 3. Notch stringer:, to receive treads , risers , and supports ; leave min. 3-1/2 in. of effective depth. 4. Stringer Spacing: Min. 3 stringers for each 36 in. 6632 061C10-3 Rough Carpentry VA Performance Standard and Policies for Structural Use Panels , Form No. E445. 2. Trademark : Factory-mark each construction panel with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements . 3. Plywood Backing Panels : For mounting electrical or telephone equipment , provide fire-retardant treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA CD PLUGGED INT with exterior glue, in thickness indi - cated or , if not otherwise indicated, min. 1/2 in. C. Preservative Treatment : 1 . Treated Wood : a. Wood embedded in or in contact with either con- crete, masonry, or plaster . b. Wood plates , cants , curbs, cleats , and nailing strips in connection with waterproofing, roof- ing, and flashing. 2. Preservative Material : One of following: a. Water-borne : AWPB LP-2 above grade and AWPB LP-22 at grade. b. Oil -borne: AWPB LP-4 above grade and AWPB LP-44 at grade. 3. Treatment : a. Pressure treat in closed retort by vacuum pressure process . b. AWPA C2 for lumber . C. AWPA C9 for plywood. 4. Do not use creosote preservative. D. Miscellaneous Materials : 1 . Fasteners and Anchorages : a. Provide size, type, material , and finish and as recommended by applicable standards , complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails , staples , screws , bolts , nuts , washers , and anchoring devices . b. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommended nails . C. Where rough carpentry Work is exposed to wea- ther, in ground contact , or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners and an- chorages with hot-dip zinc, ASTM A153. 2. Building Paper : ASTM D226, Type I ; asphalt satur- ated felt , nonperforated, 15 lb. type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 PREPARATION A. Examine substrates ;, adjoining construction, and condi - tions under which Work is to be installed. B. Do not proceed with Work where unsatisfactory condi - tions exist . 8632 106100-2 Rough Carpentry VA SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Wood Grounds , Nailers , and Blocking. 2. Equipment Backer Panels . B. Related Sections : 1 . 04200, Unit Masonry. 2. 05500, Metal Fabrications . 3. 06400, Architectural Woodwork. 4. 07500, Membrane Roofing. 5. 09250, Gypsum Board. 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards : 1 . PS 20, American Softwood Lumber Standard. 2. SPIB, Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lum- ber . 1 . 03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANI) HANDLING A. Keep rough carpentry Work dry during delivery, storage, and installation. B. Provide for air circulation in stack of wood materials . PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. Lumber : 1 . General : a. Lumber Grading: Comply with Product Standard PS20. b. Grade Marking:: Grade mark each piece of lumber with identifying mill and agency signifying lumber conforms to type, size, grade, and seasoning provisions . C. Size and Pattern : Provide lumber dressed S4S and marked to such patterns as indicated. d. Moisture Content : Provide lumber seasoned by air drying or kiln drying to moisture content not to exceed 19 percent . B. Construction Panels : 1 . Construction Panel Standards : Comply with PS 1 , U. S. Product Standard for Construction and Indus- trial Plywood for plywood panels and, for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions , with APA 8632 06100- 1 Rough Carpentry VA DIVISION 6 WOOD and PLASTIC B. Galvanized Surfaces : Clean field welds , bolted connec- tions and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A780. - END OF SECTION - 8632 05500-10 Metal Fabrications VA necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to inplace construction. b. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts , toggle bolts , through bolts , lag bolts , wood screws and other connectors as required. 2. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding Work. B. Bar Gratings : 1 . Comply with recommendations of NAAMM Metal Bar Grating Manual for installation of grating, Includ- ing installation clearances and standard anchoring details . 2. Secure removable units to supporting members with type and size clips and fasteners indicated, or if not indicated as recommended by grating manufactu- rer for type of installation conditions shown. 3. Secure non-removable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are same, otherwise fasten by bolting as indicated above. C. Railings and Handrails : 1 . Adjust railing before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints . 2. Space posts at spacing indicated, or if not indi - cated, as required by design loadings . 3. Plumb posts in each direction. 4. Rail Ends : a. Anchor into, concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored into wall construction with lead expansion shields and bolts . b. Anchor rail ends to steel with steel oval or round flanges welded to rail ends and bolted to structural steel members , unless otherwise Indicated. 5. Wall Mounted Handrails : a. Secure handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings . b. Provide bracket with min. 1-1/2 in. clearance from inside? face of handrail and finished wall surface. C. Locate brackets as indicated, or if not indica- ted, at spacing required for design loading. 3. 03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touch-Up Painting: 1 . Immediately after erection, clean field welds , bolted connections , and abraded areas of shop paint , and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. 2. Apply by brush or spray to provide min. 2. 0 mil DFT. 8632 105500-9 Metal Fabrications VA h. Product : American Stair Corp. Inc. Model Speedstair . 4. Subplatforms : a. Provide Subplatforms of configuration and construction indicated, or if not indicated, of same metal as risers and subtreads and in thicknesses required to support design loading. b. Attach subplatform to platform framing members with welds . S. Stair Railings and Handrails : a. Comply with applicable requirements specified elsewhere in this section for steel pipe rail - ings and handrails , and as follows : b. Fabricate newels of steel tubing and provide newel caps of gray Iron castings , as shown. C. Railings may be bent at corners , rail returns and wall returns , instead of using prefabrica- ted fittings. d. Connect railing posts to stair framing by direct welding;, unless otherwise indicated. J . Concrete Filled Bollards : 1 . Set steel pipe in vertical position, plumb and in alignment detailed, in concrete in hole of diameter four times largest: cross section of pipe. 2. Depth of hole min. 24 in. plus additional 3 in. for each 12 in. increase in length of pipe over 48 in. above finished grade. 3. Fill pipe with min. 2500 psi concrete and dome top to shed water . 4. Finish : Galvanized, shop primer , field paint . PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements : 1 . Take field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. 2. Do not delay job progress . 3. Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay Work. B. Coordination : 1 . Coordinate and furnish anchorages , setting draw- ings , diagrams , templates , instructions , and direc- tions for Installation of anchorages, such as con- crete inserts , sleeves , anchor bolts and miscella- neous items having integral anchors , which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. 2. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 3. 02 INSTALLATION A. General : 1 . Fastening to In-Place Construction: a. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where 8632 05500-8 Metal Fabrications VA before welding. 5. Steel Finish : Shop prime paint applied in accord- ance with manufacturer ' s standard practice. H. Balcony Railing System: Provide railings and handrails members of wrought steel , min. required to support design loading. I . Steel Framed Stairs : 1 . General : a. Construct stairs to conform to sizes and arran- gements indicated. b. Join pieces together by welding unless other- wise indicated. C. Provide complete stair assemblies including metal framing, hangers , columns , railings , newels, balusters , struts , clips , brackets , bearing plates and other components necessary for support of stairs and platforms and as required to anchor and contain stairs on supporting structure. 2. Stair Framing: a. Fabricate stringers of structural steel chan- nels , or plates , or combination as indicated. b. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers. C. Construct platforms of structural steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as indicated. d. Bolt or weld headers to stringers and newels ' and framing members to stringers and headers . e. Fabricate and join so that bolts , if used, do not appear on finish surfaces . f . Where masonry walls support steel stairs , pro- vide temporary supporting struts designed for erection of steel stair components before installation of masonry. 3. Metal Pan Risers, Subtreads : a. Shape metal pans for risers and subtreads to conform to configuration shown. b. Provide thicknesses of structural steel sheet for metal pans indicated but not less than that required to support total design loading. C. Form metal pans of hot-rolled or cold-rolled carbon steel sheet , unless otherwise indicated. d. Directly weld risers and subtreads to string- ers , locate welds on side of metal pans to be concealed by concrete fill . e. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers by means of brackets made of steel angles or bars . f . Weld brackets to strings and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting or bolting. g. At Contractor ' s option, provide prefilled treads consisting of prepoured concrete fill , with non-slip aggregate finish in welded sheet metal pan designed and fabricated for attach- ment to installed stringers using manufactur- er ' s standard connection detail . 8632 05500-7 Metal Fabrications VA handholds are provided. d. If adjacent structure does not extend above top rung, gooseneck extended rails back to struc- ture to provide secure ladder access . '` 6. Provide nonslip surface on top of each rung, either by coating run, with aluminum oxide granules set in epoxy resin adhesive, or by using type of manufactured rung which is filled with aluminum oxide grout . E. Loose Steel Lintels : 1 . Provide loose structural steel lintels for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions as shown. 2. Weld adjoining members together to form single unit where indicated. 3. Provide min. 8 in. bearing at each side of open- ings , unless otherwise indicated. 4. Finish : Galvanize, shop prime, field paint . F. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports : 1 . Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work. 2. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes , shapes and profiles indicated or , if not indicated, of requi - red dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. 3. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate from structural steel shapes , plates and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. 4. Cut , drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. 5. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. 6. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. 7. Except as otherwise indicated, anchors 24 in. o. c. and provide anchor units min. 1-1/4 in. x 1/4 in. x 8 in. steel straps . 8. Galvanize after fabrication. G. Metal Bar Grating: 1 . Provide metal bar gratings using bars of type, material , sizes , spacing and construction indica- ted, or if not indicated, to support design load- ings indicated. 2. Comply with Standard Specifications for Metal Bar Grating and Metal Bar Grating Treads and NAAMM Metal Bar Grating Manual . 3. Material : Galvanized steel . 4. Type : a. Welded. b. Cross Bars : Twisted or hexagonal . C. Provide true alignment and equal spacing of rectangular cross bars by notching bearing bars 8632 05500-6 Metal Fabrications VA specified to be galvanized. b. ASTM A153: Galvanizing iron and steel hard- ware. C. ASTM A123 : Iron and steel products . 10. Exposure to Weather : Fabricate joints which will be exposed to weather in manner to exclude water or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. B. Shop Painting : 1 . General : a. Apply shop primer to surfaces of metal fabrica- tions except those which are galvanized or as Indicated to be embedded in concrete or mas- onry, unless otherwise indicated, and in com- pliance with requirements of SSPC-PA1 Paint Application Specification No. 1 for shop draw- ings . b. Strip paint: all edges , corners , crevices , bolts , welds and sharp edges . C. Rough Hardware : 1 . Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts , plates , anchors. , hangers , dowels and other miscel - laneous steel and iron shapes as required for fra- ming and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures . 2. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in Section 06100, Rough Carpentry. 3. Fabricate items to sizes , shapes and dimensions required. 4. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections ; else- where, furnish steel washers . D. Ladders : 1 . Fabricate ladders for locations shown, with dimen- sions, spacings , details , and anchorages as indi - cated. 2. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14. 3, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Unless otherwise shown, provide 1/2 in. x 2-1/2 in. continuous structural steel flat bar side rails with eased edges, max 18 in. o. c. apart . 4. Rungs : a. 3/4 in. dia. solid structural steel bar rungs , 12 in. o. c. b. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails , plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces . 5. Supports : a. Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points max. 60 in. o. c. b. Use welded or bolted steel brackets , designed for adequate support and anchorage, and to hold ladder clear of wall surface min. 7 in. clear- ance from wall to centerline of rungs . C. Extend rails Al2 in. above top rung, and return rails to wall or structure unless other secure 8632 05500-5 Metal Fabrications VA b. Comply with Military Specifications MIL-P-21035 (Ships ) or SSPC 20. E. Concrete Fill : Pft 1 . Concrete Materials and Properties : a. Comply with requirements of Section 03310, Concrete Work, for normal weight , ready-mix concrete b. Compressive Strength: 2500 psi at 28 days . C. Mixture : Min. 440 lbs . per sq. ft . cement and max. 0. 65 W/C ratio unless higher strengths indicated. 2. 02 FABRICATION A. General : 1 . Use materials of size and thickness indicated or , if not indicated, as required to produce strength and durability in finished product for use inten- ded. 2. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings , using; proven details of fabrication and support . 3. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of work. 4. Exposed Work : a. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges . b. Ease exposed edges to radius of approximately 1/32 in. unless otherwise indicated. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius pos- sible without causing grain separation or otherwise :impairing work. 5. Welding: a. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS recommendations . b. At exposed connections , grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces . 6. Exposed Connections : a. Form exposed connections with hairline joints , flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. b. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated„ Phillips flathead (countersunk ) screws or bolts . 7. Anchorage: a. Provide for anchorage of type indicated, coor- dinated with supporting structure. b. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to pro- vide adequate support for intended use. 8. Surfaces to Receive Hardware : Cut , reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indic- ated. 9. Galvanizing : a. Provide zinc coating for those items shown or 8632 05500-4 Metal Fabrications VA C. Standard weight , Schedule 40, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Gray Iron Castings : ASTM A48, Class 30. 8. Brackets , Flanges and Anchors : Cast or formed metal of same type material and finish as support- ed rails , unless otherwise indicated. 9. Concrete Inserts : a. Threaded or wedge type ; galvanized ferrous castings , either malleable iron, ASTM A47, or cast steel , ASTM A27. b. Provide bolts , washers and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized, ASTM A153. 10. Railing Posts and Assemblies : ASTM A702, wrought steel . B. Grout : 1 . Non-Shrink Non--Metallic Grout : a. Premixed, factory packaged, nonstaining, non- corrosive, nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C621 . b. Provide grout specifically recommended by manu- facturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this Section. C. Fasteners : 1 . General : a. Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built: into exterior walls . b. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 2. Bolts and Nuts : Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A307, Grade A. 3. Lag Bolts : Square head type, FS-FF-B-561 . 4. Machine Screws : Cadmium plated steel , FS- FF-S-92. 5. Wood Screws : Flat: head carbon steel , FS-FF-S-111 . 6. Plain Washers : Round, carbon steel , FS-FF-W-92. 7. Masonry Anchorage Devices : Expansion shields , FS- FF-S-325. 8. Toggle Bolts : Tumble-wing type, FS-FF-B-588, type, class , and style as required. 9. Lock Washers : Helical spring type carbon steel , FS-FF-W-84. D. Finish Coatings : 1 . Shop Primer - Ferrous Metal : a. Manufacturer 's or Fabricator ' s standard, fast- curing, lead-free, universal primer ; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric cor- rosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide sound foundation for field-applied top-coats despite prolonged exposure. b. Comply with performance requirements of FS- TT-P-645. 2. Galvanizing Repair Paint : a. High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel . 8632 05500-3 Metal Fabrications VA and handling limitations . 3. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer' s specifications , anchor details and installation instructions for prod- ucts used in miscellaneous metal fabrications , includ- ing paint products and grout . B. Shop Drawings : 1 . Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous metal fabrications . 2. Include plans , elevations and details of sections and connections . 3. Show anchorage and accessory items . 4. Provide templates for anchor and bolt installation by others. 5. Where materials or fabrications are indicated to comply with certain requirements for design load- ings include structural computations, material properties and other information needed for struc- tural analysis . 6. Provide shop drawings signed and sealed by regis- tered Professional Engineer licensed in State of Massachusetts . C. Samples : Submit 2 sets of representative samples of materials and finished products as may be requested by Architect . PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. Ferrous Metals : 1 . Metal Surfaces - General : For fabrication of mis- cellaneous metal work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks , roller marks , rolled trade names and roughness . 2. Steel Plates , Shapes and Bars : ASTM A36. 3. Steel Bar Grating: ASTM A569 or ASTM A36. 4. Structural Steel Sheet : Hot-rolled, ASTM A570 or cold-rolled ASTM A611 , Class 1 ; of grade required for design loading. 5. Galvanized Structural Steel Sheet : a. ASTM A446, of grade required for design load- ing. b. Coating Designation : As indicated, or if not indicated, G90. 6. Steel Pipe : a. ASTM A53 ; Type and grade, if applicable, as selected by fabricator and as required for design loading. b. Black finish unless galvanizing is indicated. 8632 05500-2 Metal Fabrications VA SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : I . Rough Hardware. 2. Ladders . 3. Loose Steel Lintels . 4. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports . 5. Metal Bar Gratings . 6. Steel Pipe Railings . 7. Metal Stairs . 8. Wrought Iron Railings . 9. Pipe Bollards . B. Related Sections : 1 . 03300, Cast- In•-Place Concrete. 2. 04200, Unit Masonry. 3. 06100, Rough Carpentry 4. 09900, Painting. 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria : 1 . Treads and Platforms - Steel Stairs : Capable of withstanding uniform load of 100 psf or concen- trated load of 300 lbf located to produce maximum stress conditions . 2. Handrails and Toprails : a. Capable of withstanding following loads applied as indicated when tested per ASTM E935. b. Concentrated Loads : 200 lbf applied at any point in any direction. C. Uniform Load: 50 lbf per linear ft . applied simultaneously in both vertical and horizontal directions . d. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Guards : a. Intermediate rails , balusters and panel fillers capable of withstanding uniform load of 25 lbf per sq. ft . of gross area of guard, including any open areas , of which they are part . b. Above load need not be assumed to be acting concurrently with uniform horizontal loads on toprails of railing assembly in determining stress on guard supporting members . B. Shop Assembly: 1 . Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possi - ble to minimize field splicing and assembly. 2. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping 8632 05500-1 Metal Fabrications VA erection personnel who will perform field welding to Architect before erection commences. G Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting fabrication errors. Do not cut or alter any members in the field without written approval of Architect. Apply to Architect for all corrective measures. H Where required, furnish inserts, anchors, etc. for installation in masonry and concrete under Sections 03000 and 04000. Unless otherwise noted, secure surface-mounted items ,to masonry or concrete using toggle or expansion-type stainless steel, cadmium plated or galvanized steel anchors, minimum 1/4 inch in diameter, 24 inches o.c. Power-driven pins may be used at concrete. I Touch-up of painted steel surfaces: 1 . After all structural steel is installed, all welds, bolts,, and all bare, rusted and abraded areas of structural steel, except those to be covered with concrete, shall be touched up using same paint as specified for shop paint. 2 . Items mentioned in sub-paragraph 1. which are located at top flanges of beams shall be touched up before any steel decking is installed. J Remove from installed work all crayon marks, weld spatter, dirt and other foreign materials, leaving steel surfaces properly prepared for finish painting. 0`5120--5 A Stored materials shall be placed on skids and not on the ground. They shall be piled and blocked up so that they will not become bent or otherwise damaged. B Materials shall be handled with cranes or derricks as far as practicable. Steel shall not be dumped off trucks, nor in any other way treated in a manner likely to cause damage. C All materials shall be delivered promptly so as to cause no delay with other parts of the work. 3.02 ERECTION A The erection of -all steel work shall be in strict accordance with applicable provisions of the listed reference standards . B Members which are bent or damaged during fabrication, transportation or erection operations shall not be incorporated into the structure. C The structural frame shall be erected true and plumb. Provide temporary bracing wherever necessary to resist all forces to which the structure may be subjected, including the effect of erection equipment and operation of same. Such bracing shall remain in place as long as may be required for safety. Temporary bracing shall be removed by the Contractor as part of his equipment after all permanent structural connections have been completed. D As erection progresses, the work shall be securely connected with sufficient bolts to resist all construction load, wind and erection stresses. E Make all field bolted connections with high strength bolts. Bolts shall be 3/4 inch diameter or larger if shown on the approved shop drawings as required. Connections shall develop the full capacity of the parts connected. Bolts shall be tightened using the calibrated wrench method. Wrenches shall be calibrated each day in a device kept at the job site. Threads of bolts shall be excluded from shear planes. Provide washers under element (nut or bolt head) turned in tightening. F All field welding shall be performed by experienced welders who have been prequalified and certified by AWS test procedures for each specific weld process and position required. Submit welding certificates of 05120-4 of shop paint. Do not apply shop paint within 3 inches of steel surfaces which will be field welded. 2. Before painting, all rust, loose mill scale, foreign material and dirt shall be removed with SP-3. All crease and oil shall be removed by washing with solvent. 3. A representative of the paint manufacturer shall inspect painting operations in the shop at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. 02 FABRICATION A Fabrication and workmanship shall be in accordance with all applicable provisions of the listed reference standards. B Shop fabricate to the greatest extent possible. Arrange members to be shop welded and field bolted wherever possible. C All welding shall be performed by experienced welders who have. been prequalified and certified by AWS test procedures for each specific weld process and position required. D No holes shall be punched or cut without approval by the Architect. Provide all necessary reinforcement. E Connections shall be welded or bolted with 3/4 inch diameter high strength bolts, unless larger bolts are required. Connections shall develop the full capacity of the parts connected. F All steel shall be detailed in accordance with the "Manual of Steel Construction" of the AISC. Welds smaller than 1/4 inch fillet shall not be used, except in secondary members where approved by Architect. G Anchors required in connection with work done under other Sections will be furnished under those Sections. Under this Section, provide any holes in the structural steel work necessary for their installation. H Channel door frames shall be accurately squared, mitered, fully welded, visible surfaces ground smooth. 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 0_`120--3 E Listed standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials. 1.04 The Architect reserves the right for him or his representative to .inspect and perform tests on the steel during its fabrication and erection at any stage. 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A All structural steel shapes and plates shall conform to ASTM A36, except tubular columns, which shall conform to ASTM A500. B Connection bolts, nuts and washers shall conform with the "Standard Specification for High Strength Steel Bolts for Structural Joints" (ASTM A325) , with threads excluded from shear planes. C Anchor bolts shall conform to ASTM A307 . D Welding electrodes shall be AWS A5.1, E70XX series electrodes with proper rod to produce optimum weld joints considering material , weld position and size. E Steel embedded in exterior masonry walls or encased in foundation concrete shall either be galvanized or protected with a 1/8 inch minimum thickness of trowel applied asphalt mastic, as part of work under this Section. F Galvanize all steel items noted on drawings after materials are fabricated, in accordance with ASTM A123 and ASTM A153. Chromate all items after galvanizing by dipping in a 0. 2 percent chromic acid solution. Stamp galvanized materials indicating galvanizer, AST14 number, weight of zinc coating in oz./sq. ft. G Shop paint shall. be alkyd modified oil base type, gray Tnemec 1009, :Pratt ,& Lambert Noxide gray primer, or approved equal. 1. All structural steel, except steel to be galvanized or encased in concrete, shall receive one coat of shop paint, 2 dry mils thick, in accordance with the paint manufacturer' s printed instructions, :before leaving the shop. Parts not in contact but inaccessible after assembly shall be painted before assembly with two coats A 05120-2 SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 1 GENERAL 1.01 The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 , General Requirements, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 Submit complete shop drawings: A Shop drawings shall include all information necessary for the fabrication and erection of the component parts of the structure. They shall indicate the location, size and weight of each member, type and location of shop and field connections, and type, size and extent of all welds. The welding symbols used on the shop drawings shall be those adopted by the American Welding Society. B Each piece shall be marked plainly with suitable erection marks which shall also be shown on the erection drawings. The piece mark numbering system shall be properly cross referenced between erection and detail drawings such that details can be easily located from erection plans and members can be easily located on erection plans from the detail drawings. 1.03 Except as otherwise modified herein, perform all design, fabrication and erection work in strict accordance with applicable provisions of the latest edition of the following reference standards: A American Institute of Steel Construction Standard "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. " B American Institute of Steel Construction Standard "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. " C American Welding Society Standard "Structural Welding Code. " D American Institute of Steel Construction Standard "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts. " 05120-1 DIVISION 5 METALS in. 3. Variation from Plane of Wall : 1/4 in. in 10 ft . and 1/2 in. in 20 ft . or more. 4. Variation from Plumb : 1/4 in. per story non-cumu- lative, 1/2 in., in two stories or more. 5. Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 in. in 3 ft . , 1/4 in. in 10 ft . , max. 1/2 in. 6. Variation of Joint; Thickness : 1/8 in. in 3 ft. 7. Variation from Cross Sectional Wall Thickness : +/_ max. 1/4 in. 3. 04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Cut out any defective joints and holes in exposed mas- onry and repoint with mortar. B. Clean all exposed unglazed masonry as follows : 1 . Follow brick manufacturer ' s recommendations . 2. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations . 3. Submit wash down procedures complete with materials to be used for review at Pre-Construction Meeting. - END OF SECTION - 8632 042;00-10 Unit Masonry VA insure against wind damage to felt . 3. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement : a. Install in every other course. b. Place in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings and extend min. 16 in. beyond each side of opening. C. Place continuously in first and second joint below tops of wall and lap ends min. 6 in. E. Grouting: 1 . General : a. Maintain grout core clean of mortar and drop- pings . b. Vibrate or agitate during and after placement . C. Stop grouting 1-1/2 in. below top of masonry if stopping grouting for i hr. or more except when completing Work. 2. Low Lift Grouting: a. Grout spaces having width less than 2 in. at max. 24 in. intervals in lifts of 6 to 8 in. as wall is built . b. Grout spaces having width larger than 2 in. place or float brick in grout with min. 3/8 in. of grout between brick. 3. Do not used mortar mixes for grout . F. Control Joints : 1 . Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcing across control joints . 2. Install resilient control joint in continuous length by heat or solvent weld to manufacturer ' s instructions . 3. Refer to Section 07900, Joint Sealers , and size joint as specified for sealant performance. 4. Place wall ties at each side of vertical control joint to spacing detailed and specified. 5. Use min. 36 in„ long spacer to maintain alignment in control joint void. G. Built- In Work : 1 . As Work progresses , build- in items supplied by other Sections ., 2. Place items plumb and level . 3. Metal Door Frames : a. Bed anchors in mortar joints . b. Fill frame voids solid with mortar . C. Fill masonry cores with grout min. 12 in. from framed openings . 4. Do not build- in organic materials subject to deter- ioration. 3. 03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tolerances : 1 . Alignment of Columns and Pilasters : Max. 1/4 in. from true line. 2. Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit : Max. 1/32 8632 0420-9 Unit Masonry VA masonry Work. 5. Veneer Construction - Gypsum Sheathing: a. Coordinate placement of flexible sheet flashing with Work of Section 09250, Gypsum Board. b. Observe installation of 12 in. wide horizontal starter strip of gypsum sheathing. C. As starter strip is completed in continuous wall plane, bed flexible flashing in mastic on relieving angle and extend over surface of starter strip onto studs and run min. 6 in. up face of studs . d. Scure flashing in place and observe continued installation of gypsum sheathing to insure no damage occurs to flashing. e. Repair all damage to flashing before start of masonry laying. C. Placing and Bonding: 1 . Lay in full bed of mortar with full head joints , properly jointed with adjacent Work. 2. Do not butter corners of joints or furrow mortar joints excessively. 3. Fully bond intersections , and external and internal corners , except at; control joints . 4. Perform jobsite cutting with proper tools to pro- vide straight unchipped edges . 5. Take care to prevent breaking corners or edges . 6. Rock closures into place with head joints thrown against two adjacent bricks in place. 7. Do not pound corners and jambs to fit stretcher units after set in position. 8. If adjustments are made after mortar has started to harden, remove mortar and replace with fresh. D. Reinforcement and Anchorages : 1 . General : a. Refer to details for arrangement of ties and anchors . b. Coat heads of fasteners for ties and anchors with mastic after placement . C. Apply zinc rich paint to all fasteners and frames at point of penetrations through framing after installation to prevent leaking or future rusting of fastener or framing. 2. Veneer Anchors - Drywall Construction : a. Install first course of ties with bottom edge of channel max. 2 in. above relieving angle. b. Install last course of ties with top edge of channel max. 2 in. below relieving angle. C. Install anchors in field area of wall to have max. 2. 67 sq. ft . spacing per anchor . d. Coordinate with Construction Schedule for placement of anchors . e. As felt is place on gypsum sheathing as de- tailed in Section 09250, Gypsum Board, install anchors to insure felt is solidly anchored. f . Do not delay placement anchors over felt to 8632 04200-8 Unit Masonry VA joints of decorative CMU to be rag cleaned. 4. Tooling: a. Tool exposed joints where "thumb-print " hard with jointer slightly larger than width of joint . b. Flush cut all joints not tooled. 5. Tuck Pointing -• Joint Repairs : a. Rake min. 1/2 in. to max. 3/4 in. deep. b. Saturate joints with clean water . C. Fill solidly with pointing mortar and tool joints . 6. Cord Weep Holes : a. Provide in head joints in first course imme- diately above all flashing. b. Place wick in joint max. 24 in. o. c. C. Keep weep holes and area above flashing free of mortar droppings . 7. Sealant Recesses : a. Leave joints around outside perimeters of frames and other wall openings . b. Recess Size: Uniform 3/4 in. deep x 1/4 to 3/8 in. wide. B. Flashing of Masonry Work : 1 . General : a. Provide concealed flashing in masonry Work at , or above, .shelf angles , lintels , ledges , and other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall so as to divert such water to exterior . b. Prepare masonry surfaces smooth and free from projections which could puncture flashing. C. Place through--wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. d. Seal penetrations in flashing with mastic be- fore covering with mortar. e. Extend flashings through exterior face of masonry and turn down to form drip. f . Extend flashing full length of lintels and shelf angles, min. 4 in. in masonry each end. g. Extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through outer wythe, turned up min. 4 in. ., and through inner wythe to within 1/2 In . of interior face of wall in exposed Work. h. Where interior surface of inner wythe is con- cealed by furring, carry flashing completely through inner wythe and turn up approximately 2 in. I . Heads and Sills : Turn up ends min. 2 in. to form pan. 2. Sheet Metal Flashing: Interlock end joints of de- formed metal flashings by overlapping deformations min. 1-1/2 in. and seal lap with elastic sealant . 3. Proprietary Flashing: Install flashing to comply with manufacturer ' s instructions . 4. Reglets : Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related Work where shown to be built into 8632 04200-7 Unit Masonry VA 3. Pigments : a. Select and proportion pigments with other in- gredients to produce mortar color indicated. b. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1 : 10 by weight . 4. Machine mix to match Architect ' s sample for color . B. Grout : 1 . ASTM C476, 1 : 3 ratio. 2. Do not use pea gravel in grout . 3. Do not use mortar where grout is required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 PREPARATION A. Verify items provided by other Sections of Work are properly sized and located. B. Establish lines , level , and coursing and protect from disturbance. C. Provide temporary bracing during masonry Work and main- tain in place until building structure provides perman- ent bracing. D. Wetting Brick : 1 . Wet brick having absorption rate in excess of 20 grams per 30 sq. in. per minute to ASTM C67 so absorption rate does not exceed this amount . 2. Comply with cold weather requirements using heated water to reduce brick suction. E. Clean reinforcement before placing, remove loose rust, ice, and other coatings . 3. 02 ERECTION A. General : 1 . Coursing : a. Place masonry in lines and levels indicated. b. Maintain courses to uniform width. C. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal and uniformly thick. d. Pattern Bond : Running, unless otherwise noted. e. Bond unexposed masonry units in wythe by lap- ping min. 2 in. 2. Joining Work : a. Remove loose brick and mortar, clean and light- ly wet exposed surface of wet masonry where fresh masonry joins partially set masonry. b. Stop off horizontal run by racking back 1/2 length of unit in each course. C. Do not tooth masonry without written accept- ance. 3. Mortar Joints : Concave for brick and CMU, deep rack horizontal joints at decorative CMU, vertical 8632 04200-6 Unit Masonry VA C. Product : AA Wire Products Co. Model Blok-Trus AA600. 2. Adjustable Wall Ties - Multiwythe : a. Type : Eye and pintel , rectangular . b. Size : 3/16 in. hot-dipped galvanized wire, length as required for location. c. Manufacturer : Hohmann & Barnard Inc. 3. Veneer Anchor -• Drywall Construction : a. Anchor : 16 ga . hot-dipped galvanized. b. Tie : 3/16 in. dia. , length as required drip tie, no play. C. Fasteners : Stainless steel , Type S10 drywall screws . d. Product : Hohmann & Barnard Inc. Model DW10, no substitutions . 4. Reinforcing Steel : ASTM A615, deformed billet bars , galvanized finish. E. Flashing: 1 . Flexible Flashing : a. Plastic : 20 mil polyethylene. 2. Sheet Metal : Refer to Section 07700, Roof Special - ties and Accessories . F. Accessories : 1 . Top Joint : a. Masonry to Relieving Angles : Non-bitumen, semi -rigid glass fiber , min. 5/8 in. thick to fill joint space, width 3/4 in. less than wall thickness . b. Masonry to Overhead Deck: ASTM C665, mineral fiber safing. 2. Control Joint Filler : a. ASTM D2287, Type PVC 654-4, width as required for location, premolded. b. Product : AA Wire Products Co. Model Blok-Tite AA2000. 3. Nailing Strips : Refer to Section 06100, Rough Car- pentry. 4. Rope Wick: Cotton rope, min. 1/4 in. dia. G. Sealant and Joint Fillers : Refer to Section 07900, Joint Sealers. 2. 02 MIXES A. Mortar : 1 . Types : a. Use Type M mortar for masonry below grade and in contact with earth. b. Use Type S mortar for reinforced masonry and where indicated. C. Use Type N mortar for exterior , above-grade load-bearing and non- loadbearing walls , and for other applications where another type is not 40%, indicated. 2. Do not add admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 8632 04200-5 Unit Masonry VA PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. Brick Units : 1 . Face Brick : a. ASTM C216, Grade SW for brick in contact with earth and MW for all other locations , Type FBS. b. Size : Standard modular. C. Color Range? and Texture : As selected by Architect . d. Test and Result : Test Result Compressive Strength 16, 400 psi , average +/-10 percent Cold Absorption 3. 7 average +/-10 percent in 24 hr Boil Absorption 4. 4 average +/-10 percent in 5 hr Efflorescence None Saturation Coefficient 0. 83 average +/-10 percent Freeze-Thaw Loss 0 percent e. Product : Webster Brick Co. Model Webster Standard 1•-204-1 . B. Concrete Masonry Units : 1 . Non-Load Bearing: ASTM C129, Type 1, hollow normal weight . 2. Hollow Load Bearing: ASTM C90, Type 1 , Grade N-1 , normal weight . 3. Decorative CMU: Foster Model Split Face Rose Tan. C. Mortar Materials and Mixes : 1 . General : Provide mortar complying with ASTM C270, Proportion Specification, for materials and mortar types of composition indicated below. 2. Cementitious Material : Portland cement , Type I or Type III , white or natural color as required to produce mortar color indicated, combined with hydrated lime. 3. Aggregate : Natural or manufactured sand. 4. Colored Mortar Pigments : a. Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides compounded for mortar . b. Brick: Flamingo C69. C. Decorative CMU: Flamingo C106. D. Reinforcement , Anchorages , and Ties : 1 . Horizontal Joint ;Reinforcement : a. ASTM A82, continuous cold-drawn steel wire consisting of two 9 ga. deformed longitudinal side wires welded 16 in. o. c. to continuous 9 ga. diagonal cross wires with side wire spacing 2 in. less than nominal wall thickness . b. Wire Finish : ASTM A116, Class 3 galvanized coating on cross wires . 8632 04200-4 Unit Masonry VA D. Shop Drawings : 1 . Indicate bar sizes , spacings , locations , and quan- tity of reinforcing steel with bending and cutting schedules , and supporting and spacing devices . 2. Prepare shop drawings under seal of professional Structural Engineer registered in State of Massa- chusetts . 1 . 04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store brick on pallets off ground to prevent contamina- tion, staining, or defects . B. Cover materials to protect from elements. 1 . 05 SITE CONDITIONS A. Cold Weather Requirement : 1 . Comply with IMIAC requirements . 2. Protect in-place masonry construction when air temperature is below 40 deg. F. as follows . 3. Average Daily Air Temperature 40 deg. F. to 32 deg. F: Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hrs . after erection. 4. Average Daily ,Air Temperature 32 deg. F. to 25 deg. F: Cover masonry for 24 hrs . after erection. 5. Average Daily Air Temperature 25 deg. F. to 20 deg. F: a. Furnish heat sources on both sides of masonry construction. b. Furnish wind breaks for wind velocity in excess of 15 mph. C. Cover masonry with insulating blankets for 24 hrs . after erection. 6. Average Daily Air Temperature Below 20 deg. F: a. Furnish enclosures and heat to maintain air temperature above 32 deg. F. b. Maintain constructed masonry temperature above 32 deg. F. for 24 hrs . after erection with enclosures and supplemental heat. B. Hot Weather Conditions : Protect masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun when erected in ambient air temperature of 99 deg. F. in shade with relative humidity less than 50 percent . C. Sequencing : Coordinate placement of items specified in other Sections to be placed with Work of this Section. D. Protection : 1 . Maintain protective boards at exposed corner where damage may occur due to construction activities . 2. Provide protection without damaging completed Work. 3. At days ' end, cover unfinished walls to prevent moisture infiltration. 8632 04200-3 Unit Masonry VA same material . 6. Do not destroy or move panel until Owner acceptance of Work. C. Reference Standards : 1 . NCMA, Specification for Design and Construction of Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry. 2. BIA, Building Code Requirements for Engineered Brick Masonry. 3. ASTM C780, Preconstruction and Construction Evalu- ation of Mortar for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. D. Fire-Resistance Rated Masonry: Comply with require- ements for materials and installation established by governing authorities for construction and fire-resist- ance rating indicated.. E. Testing Laboratory Service Requirements : 1 . Masonry Preconstruction Testing Service : a. Owner will engage a testing laboratory comply- ing with ASTM E329 for performing preconstruct- ion masonry tests indicated in this Section. b. Contractor shall coordinate and accommodate testing of masonry to be performed by independ- ent laboratory retained by Owner and make site fabricated samples . 2. Brick : a. Test each type and grade of brick per ASTM C67. b. Perform testing to comply with ASTM C67 for modulus of rupture ( flexure test ) , compressive strength, absorption, freezing and thawing, initial rate of absorption ( suction) , efflores- cence, measurement of size, measurement of warpage, measurement of length change. C. If coefficient of variation of compression sam- ples tested exceeds 12 percent , obtain compres- sive strengths by multiplying average compres- sive strengths by ( 1 - 1 . 5 x [ (0. 01 x coeffi - cient of variation ) - 0. 121 ) . 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples : 1 . Brick : Min. 5 individual brick showing color and texture extreme variations . 2. Peastone : Provide bucket of peastone for washout testing at end joint weeps . B. Test Reports : 1 . Manufacturer Certificate indicating compliance with ASTM C67. 2. Prism Test Report for Load-Bearing Masonry. C. Certificates : Provide before delivery attesting com- pliance with Specifications for grade, types , or classes . 8632 04200-2 Unit Masonry VA SECTION! 04200 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Mortar and Grout. 2. Anchors , Reinforcing, and Flashing. 3. Brick Masonry Units . 4. Concrete Masonry Units . B. Related Sections : 1 . 03300, Cast- In•-Place Concrete. 2. 05500, Metal Fabrications . 3. 06100, Rough Carpentry. 4. 08100, Metal Doors and Frames . 5. 09250, Gypsum ]Board. 6. Division 15, Mechanical . 7. Division 16, Electrical . 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications : 1 . Manufacturer : Provide test reports for each type of brick with report max. 3 yrs . old, developed by independent testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM C67, indicating compressive strength, 24 hr. cold water absorption, 5 hr . boil absorption, sat- uration coefficient , and initial rate of absorp- tion. 2. Installer : Insure all masonry Work is directed by skilled mason. 3. Pre-Construction Conference: a. Before start of masonry Work, meet at Project site to review materials , installation proce- dures , and Work sequencing. b. Insure all Submittals are submitted before conference to allow sufficient time for review to allow discussion of Submittals at confer- ence. B. Job Mock-Up : 1 . Size : 4 ft . long x 3 ft . high indicating proposed color range, texture, bond, mortar , control joint vertical and horizontal , shelf angle, and installa- tion with all brick shipped for sample Installed in panel . 2. Erect panel in, presence of Architect before start- ing actual installation on Project . 3. As required, erect separate panel for each type of brick or mortar . 4. Do not begin Work until sample panel is accepted. 5. Use panel as standard for all masonry Work built of 8632 04200-1 Unit Masonry VA DIVISION 4 MASONRY B Keep units at right angles to the supports . C Where planks with differential camber or warped planks are installed, such that the surfaces are not sufficiently smooth and level for carpet installation, this Sub- contractor shall grout level with concrete to achieve ( n acceptable surface . D Install reinforcing steel in side and end joints as detailed and grout the side and end joints of all units . E Use shims approved by the Architect as required. Saw cut units to fit job conditions where required. F Do not install any cracked , warped or broken units . G Plug all open cores at slab openings . H Marking: All precast prestressed concrete units shall be marked to identify the top side of the unit , the length, size and type of reinforcement and shall be identified for placement on the setting drawings . 3. 2 Patching: A Patch chipped or broken concrete surfaces using methods approved by the Architect . PRECAST CONCRETE PLANK/3B-4 H Grout : Grout mix in accordance with ASTM 476 fine mix , without lime . 2 . 2 Fabrication : A Comply with PCI MNL-116- 70 "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Precast , Prestressed Concrete Products" for methods , materials and workmanship not otherwise specified. B Manufacture units in an approved plant in smooth rigid forms , to produce a top surface smooth enough for carpet installation with- out honeycomb , cracks or chipping and a bottom surface free of cracks or chipping which would be visible in the completed project . Fabricate special square edge planks with solid core around the entire perimeter of the building where the slab edge is exposed. C Mold or cut and test at least (3) standard compression cylinders for each 5000 s . f. of plank. Conform to ASTM C-172 , C-31 and C- 39 . Report all test results to the Architect promptly. D Accurately position all reinforcing steel , inserts , cut-outs , prestressing strands and anchorage provisions in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings . E Fill the ends of plank in the shop or field where shown , to transfer •hearing wall loads . F Cast units to the total tolerances listed on page 76 of the PCI MNL-116-70 "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Product of Precast,•Prestressed Concrete Products" . Position strands to provide minimum concrete cover of 3/4 inch. Increase cover at soffit to achieve a fire rating of 2 hours consider- ing the plank to be unrestrained at the ends . G Planks shall have (2) Hour Fire Rating . Ends to be considered as restrained. 3 EXECUTION 3 . 1 Erection: A Install units on 1/8" bearing strips with minimum bearing distance of 3 . 0 inches . PRECAST CONCRETE PLANK/3B-3 1 . 4 Shop drawings: A Submit complete shop drawings and setting plans to the Architect for approval prior to fabrication. B Include a complete layout plan for each floor and roof level showing location and dimensions of all units , the location of all necessary mechanical holes and other openings , cut-outs , and notches required by the architectural , structural and mechanical drawings; and the approved shop drawings of other trades . Show clearly any areas of the floor or roof to be cast on the site , or which require site cutting or coring. C Detail each unit showing all prestressing and reinforcing steel , cut-outs and notches , thickness , profile of the unit , and built- in anchors . Details around openings including standard. manufacturer ' s loading chart data for the specific span as well as resisting moment and manufacturer ' s specifications . D Detail all steel header supports for cut-off planks . 2 PRODUCTS 2 . 1 Materials : A Cement : ASTM C-150 , Type III or Type TI B Aggregate : ASTM C-33 C Prestressing Tendons : ASTM A-416 D Bar Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A-615 E Wire for Reinforcement : ASTM A-82 F Concrete Strength : Minimum 3500 PSI at the time of initial prestressing and 5000 PSI at 28 days when tested in accordance with ASTM methods . Precast lintels to be 4000 PSI at 28 days . G Water : Water shall be clean, fresh and free from injurious amounts of mineral or organic substances . PRECAST CONCRETE PLANK/3B-2 SECTION 3B PRECAST CONCRETE PLANK 1 GENERAL 1 . 1 The general provisions of the Contract , including General and Supplementary Conditions and applicable portions of Division 1 - General Requirements , apply to the work specified in this Section. 1 . 2 Description of work: A. Perform all work required to complete the work of this Section as indicated. Such work includes , but is not limited to , the following: 1 . Furnish and erect all prestressed precast floor and roof units . Include all planks , steel lintels , precast lintels , and saddles supporting planks together, grout between planks and be- tween plank and shear walls , all labor materials , appliances and services necessary for the design, detailing , shop drawings , coordination with other trades , provisions for openings , fabri- cation , transporting , and erection of the units . 2 . Work in this Section shall conform with applicable requirements of Section-3A CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE , except as noted. 1 . 3 Design : A Design all units in accordance with ACI 318- 71 to support the superimposed loads indicated on the Drawings . Provide reinforcing as required. to resist all handling and erection loads . B Submit detailed calculations sealed by a Massachusetts Registered Engineer of typical units and all special conditions and anchor- age details to the Architect for approval with the! shop drawings . PRECAST CONCRETE PLANK/3B-1 C In hot weather be adequately prepared to protect the concrete from the adverse influence of heat before placement of any concrete . Take special precautions to avoid cracking of the concrete from rapid drying during placement of concrete when air temperature exceeds 70 degrees F. , particularly when the work is exposed to direct sunlight. D Surface Conditioners : 1 Floor Hardener - "Lapidolith" by Sonneborn Building Products; "Hornolith" by A. C. Horn Company; "Saniseal 50" by Master Builders Company; or equal, approved by the Architect, applied in accordance with manufacturer ' s recommendations. 2 Apply moist curing as soon as possible, after placement of concrete , to inhibit the development of shrinkage cracks, due to the rapid drying of the surface. 03300-6 x C Install waterstops at joints as indicated on drawings. 3.06 Placing: A Do not place concrete until soil bottoms, reinforcing steel, inserts, sleeves and other work to be built-into the concrete have been inspected and approved by the Architect and by all trades concerned. B Conveying: Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable by methods which will prevent separation or loss of ingredients and in a manner which will assure that the required quality of the concrete is retained. C Depositing: ]Delivery and placement of concrete shall be programmed so that the time lapse between batch:ing and placement shall not exceed 1 1/2 hours. D Concrete shall be deposited continuously, in horizontal layers, of such thickness (not deeper than 18 inches) that no concrete will be OOW deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently -to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. E Concrete shall be compacted thoroughly by vibrating to produce a dense, homogeneous mass, without voids or pockets. 3.07 Curing and Protection : A Protect newly placed concrete against low and high temperature effects and against rapid loss of moisture. Moist cure all concrete for, at least, (7) days at a temperature of, at least, 50 degrees F. , by curing methods approved by the Architect. B For vertical or near vertical surfaces, moist cure by keeping the form in contact with the concrete, or by other effective means approved by the Architect. Intermittent wetting and drying does not provide acceptable curing. AM*- 03300--5 C Materials which are judged not acceptable for this project shall not be stored on the site but shall be immediately removed from the site. 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Forming: A Forms shall be constructed to conform to shapes, lines and dimensions shown, plumb and straight and shall be maintained sufficiently rigid to prevent deformation under load. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of grout. Securely brace and shore forms. B Formwork shall conform to ACI 347. C Treat forms and form linings with a form release agent applied according to manufacturer' s instructions. 3. 02 Mixing Process : A Use Ready-Mix Process ASTM C-94 . 3 .03 Reinforcing: A Reinforcing shall be securely tied and supported to maintain proper spacing and cover during placing operations. 3.04 Embedded Items: A Coordinate the installation of all inserts required by other trades. Such inserts, normally, are to be in-place prior to placing of reinforcing steel. 3.05 Joints: A Provide construction joints as shown on the drawings but., in any case, limit the maximum dimensions for placement of concrete in any one pour to 60 feet. B Construction joints shall be formed with keyed bulkheads. Reinforcement shall continue through the joint and additional reinforcement; shall be placed as indicated on the drawings. 03300-4 2 Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM Specification A-185 in flat sheets. 3 Bar supports, metal accessories and other devices necessary for proper assembly of concrete reinforcing shall be of standardized factory-made bar supports. All items shall be galvanized. Wire for tying shall. be 18 gauge black annealed wire conforming to ASTM Specification A-82. F Formwork: 1 Forms - Concrete surfaces without special finish shall be "Plyform" Class 1 , B-B, EXT-DFPA or as approved by the Architect. 2 Form Oil - Oil shall be of a non-staining type, specifically manufactured for concrete forms. 3 Form Ties - Factory fabricated, removable or snap--back of approved design. Wire shall be at. least back 1-1/2" from the surface and leave a hole less than 1" in diameter after snapped. 4 Metal Floor Deck - See Section 05310. 2.02 Storage of Materials A All materials shall be stored to prevent damage from the elements and other causes. Cement and aggregates shall be stored in such manner as to prevent deterioration or intrusion of foreign matter. Any materials which have deteriorated or which have been damaged shall not be used for concrete. Store reinforcement steel on wood skids to protect it from weather, oil, earth and damage from trucking, or other construction operations. Reinforcement shall be free from loose mill scale, rust, form oil, concrete spatter and other extraneous coatings at the time it is embedded in the concrete. B All forms shall be stored in a neat manner and orderly fashion, protected from the weather and abuse. 03300-3 1. 05 Testing and Control for Concrete : A The Owner will retain and pay for the Services of a qualified testing agency for strength of concrete specified. Mix shall be adjusted as recommended by testing agency to achieve proper strength. 1. 06 Notification of Related Trades : A Notify all other trades responsible for installing gutter, piping, sleeves, anchors , etc. , when ready for such installation, and for final checking immediately before concrete is placed. Cooperate with such trades to obtain proper installation. 2 PRODUCTS 2 . 01 Materials A Portland Cement: ASTM Specification C-150. Type 1 , or Type II . B Aggregate : Coarse aggregate shall conform to ASTM Specification C-33 . Coarse aggregate shall pass through sieves 3/4 inch. C Water: Shall be from local municipal supply. D Admixtures : 1 Concrete densifier - Anti-hydro 2 Air-entraining agent: "Aerololith" by Sonneborn Building Products; "Darex" by W. R. Grace & Co. ; "MB-VR" by Master Builders Co. ; or equal, approved by the Architect, conforming to ASTM C-260. 3 No other admixtures may be used without .Architect ' s approval . Calcium Chloride will not be permitted. E Concrete Reinforcement: 1 Reinforcing steel shall conform to ASTM Specification A-615, Grade 60, deformed bars . 03300-2 SECTION 03300 - CAST-•IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1 GENERAL 1 .01 The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 , General Requirements, apply to work specified in this Section.. 1.02 Work Performed under this Section: A Furnish labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for proper and complete fabrication, installation and removal of all concrete formwork, fabrication ,and installation of concrete reinforcement; and proper and complete placement of cast-in-place concrete and relat.ed. items as shown on the drawings and specified herein. B Finishing, curing, hardening, protecting and cleaning of surfaces of all cast-in-place concrete. 1.03 Submit complete shop drawings: A Shop drawings shall be provided for fabricating and placing reinforcing steel. Show all required information for cutting, bending and placing reinforcing bars and show all accessories and support bars on placing on the drawings. .' 1.04 Except as otherwise modified herein, perform all concrete work in strict accordance with applicable provisions of the latest edition of the following reference standards: A "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" by the American Concrete Institute (ACI-301) . B "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" (ACI-318) . 0330CI-1 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 5. Repair damaged coatings in shop or during field erection by recoating with hot-applied repair com- pound applied per manufacturer ' s recommendations . 6. Stretcher Bars : Thread through or clamp fabric 4 in. o. c. , secure to posts with metal bands spaced 15 in. o. c. 7. Tie Wires : a. Use U-shaped wire, clasping fabric firmly with ends twisted min. 2 full turns . b. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing. 8. Fasteners : a. Install nuts for tension band and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite fabric side. b. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts . - END OF SECTION - 8632 028130-4 Fences and Gates VA 1 . Diameter : Excavate holes to min. 12 in. or greater as recommended by manufacturer . 2. Depth : a. Excavate holes approximately 4 in. lower than AOW post bottom, with bottom of posts set min. 36 in. below surface when in firm, undisturbed soil . b. Excavate deeper as required for adequate sup- port in soft and loose soils , and for posts with heavy lateral loads . B. Setting Posts : 1 . Remove all loose and foreign materials from sides and bottoms of holes , moisten soil before placing concrete. 2. Center and align posts in holes 4 in. above bottom of excavation. 3. Place concrete around posts in continuous pour, vibrate or tamp for consolidation. 4. Check each post for vertical and top alignment , hold in position during placement and finishing operations . 5. Trowel finish tops of footings , slope or dome to direct water away from posts . 6. Extend footings for gate posts to underside of bottom hinge. 7. Set keeps , stops , sleeves , and other accessories into concrete as required. 8. Space line posts at 10 ft . o. c. intervals . C. Concrete Strength : 1 . Allow concrete to attain min. 75 percent of 2500 psi min. 28-day compressive strength min. 7 days after placement before rails , tension wires , barbed wire, or fabric are installed. 2. Do not stretch and tension fabric and wires or hang gates until concrete has attained full design strength. 3. Bell shaped footings extending min. 4 in. below bottom end of posts . D. Component Installation : 1 . Top Rails : Run rail continuously through post caps with expansion couplings as recommended by fencing manufacturer . 2. Brace Assemblies : Install braces so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension. 3. Tension Wire : Install tension wire by weaving through fabric and tying to each post with min. 6 ga. galvanized wire, or by securing wire to fabric. 4. Fabric : a. Leave max. 2 in. space below bottom selvage with fabric taut and tied to posts , rails , and tension wires ,. b. Install fabric on security side of fence, and anchor to framework so fabric remains in ten- sion after pulling force is released. 8632 02830-3 Fences and Gates VA 2. End, Corner , and Pull Posts : 2-7/8 in. o. d. weigh- ing 5. 79 lbs . per Iin. ft . 3. Gate Posts : Min. 4 in. o. d. weighing 9. 11 lbs . per Iin. ft . 00W D. Top Rail : 1 . Furnish in longest: lengths joined with 6 in. long expansion type couplings . 2. Attach securely to each gate, corner, pull , and end post . 3. Pipe: 1-5/8 in. o. d. weighing 2. 27 lbs . per lin. f t . E. Post Brace Assembly : 1 . Brace at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts with horizontal brace located at mid-height of fabric. 2. Use 1-7/8 in. o. d. pipe weighing 2. 72 lbs . per lin. ft . for horizontal brace and 3/8 in. dia. rod with turnbuckle for diagonal truss. F. Tension Wire: 7 ga. galvanized coiled spring wire at bottom of fabric only,. G. Stretcher Bars and Bands : 1 . Provide one-piece length for each gate and end post , two for each corner and pull post . 2. Secure with steel bands spaced max. 15 in. o. c. 3. Size : 3/16 in. x 3/4 in. H. Post Caps and Guard : 1 . Caps : Malleable iron, drive fitting on outside of post to exclude moisture. I . Miscellaneous Materials : 1 . Wire Ties : 9 ga. spaced 12 in. o. c. for line posts and 24 in. o. c. for rails and braces . 2. Hog Rings : 9 ga. spaced max. 24 in. o. c. for tying fabric to tension wire. 3. Concrete : Refer to Section 03300, Cast- In-Place Concrete. J. Vinyl Coating: 1 . Fabric : CLFMI , Class 1 bonded PVC coated wire coated with aluminum by hot-dip process before being coated with PVC. 2. Framework : Resin clad by electrostatically applied powder fusion process , 10 - 14 mil thickness accor- ding to pipe diameter . 3. Color : Manufacturer ' s standard color range as selected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 INSTALLATION A. Excavation : 8632 02830-2 Fences and Gates VA SECTION 02830 FENCES AND GATES ROW, PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Chain Link Fences and Accessories . B. Related Sections : 1 . 02200, Earthwork. 2. 03300, Cast- in-Place Concrete. 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications : 1 . Manufacturer : Min. 5 years in manufacture of mat- erials specified in this Section and active member of CLFMI . B. Reference Standards : 1 . CLFMI Product Manual . 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings : Indicate plan layout and details indi - cating fence height ; ;location and sizes of posts , rails , braces , gates, and footings ; hardware lists , and erection procedues . B. Certificates : Provide testing reports indicating com- pliance with manufacturing requirements of CLFMI . PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. Chain Link Fence Fabric : 1 . Wire : 9 ga. commercial quality steel wire with breaking load of 1 , 290 lbs . 2. Zinc Coating: AsTM A392, hot-dip process after fabrication, min. 1 . 2 oz. per sq. ft . , Designation B6. 3. Fabric Size : Max. 2 in. mesh with fabric 60 in. high and under knuckled at both selvages and fabric 72 in. high and over knuckled at one selvage and twisted and barbed at other selvage. B. Steel Fence Components : ASTM A120 or A123, hot-dip galvanized with zinc coating 1 . 8 oz. per sq. ft . C. Posts : 1 . Line Posts : 2-3/8 in. o. d. weighing 3. 65 lbs . per lin. ft . 8632 02830-1 Fences and Gates VA be at required finished grade. 6. Apply coating of 2 percent adhesive applied by mop- ping, squeegeeing, or troweling to top surface of setting bed to provide bond for paver . 7. Use max. 1/16 in. serrations if trowel is used. S. Carefully place paver by hand into adhesive in required pattern in stright courses with handtight joints and uniform top surface. 9. Joint Treatment : a. Joint Width : 0 in. to max. 1/6 in. for con- crete pavers . b. Sweep dry mixture of 1 part colored portland cement to match color of pavers and 3 parts sand until joints are filled. C. Fog lightly with water . d. Remove cement stains . F. Stone Dust Application : 1 . Place setting bed stone dust and compact by dampening or wetting. 2. Do not allow irregular area drying. 3. Screen stone dust to depth required to provide setting of paver. 4. Set pavers in required pattern tightly against each other . 5. Sweep fine stone dust over surface to fill joints . - END OF SECTION 8632 02500-5 Paving and Surfacing VA and free from hollows , transverse imperfec- tions , and other irregularities . d. Limit allowable deficiency in bituminous con- crete binder course thickness to 1/8 in. 4. Bituminous Tack. Coat : a. Materials , equipment , and construction methods for tack coat shall be same as specified above for "Prime Coat" and shall be applied uniformly at max. 0. 08 gal . per sq. yd. b. Where previously primed base course or tacked binder course as specified above does not exhibit sufficient viscous qualities to secure proper adhesion of surface course, apply tack coat of Grade RC-70 as specified uniformly at 0. 08 gal . per sq. yd. 5. Bituminous Concrete Surface Course: Construct bituminous concrete surface course in same manner as specified bituminous concrete binder course. B. Portland Cement Concrete Paving: 1 . Base Course : a. Construct in layers max. 4 in. compacted thick- ness . b. Deposit directly on prepared subgrade or pre- ceeding layer. C. Compact each layer with water. d. Roll top layer- to 200 lbs . min. or 375 lb. per in. of width of roller . 2. Concrete : Conform to Section 03300, Cast- In-Place Concrete for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete '* placement . C. Pavement Marking: 1 . Apply to specified dimensions with clean, true edges , and no breaks in alignment . 2. Rate of Application : 4 in. wide solid strip to 15 mil min. thickness . D. Unit Paver Coordination : 1 . Paver Base : a. Place 4 in. thick concrete slab with integral french drains placed in 2 in. dia. sleeves . b. Place sleeves at low point of slab while slab is being poured. C. Fill sleeves with gravel to prevent filling with concrete.. d. Slope: Min. I in. in 10 ft . E. Bituminous Setting Bed : 1 . Place setting bed over substrate to nom. 3/4 in. thickness . 2. Set wood chocks under depth control bars to proper grade if grade must be adjusted. 3. Set depth control bars carefully to bring pavers to proper grade. 4. Roll setting bed with power roller while still hot . ' 5. Adjust thickness so that top surface of pavers will 8632 02500-4 Paving and Surfacing VA jections or depressions exceeding 1/8 in. C. Size : 5 in . x 16 in. d. Shapes : Vertical with no batter , straight sections , true radius sections , 36 in. long driveway and handicapped ramp transitions . PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 PREPARATION A. Prepare subgrade as specified in Section 02200, Earth- work. B. Insure all utility mains and structures occurring in area to be paved have been installed. C. Place curbs where indicated before start of paving con- struction. D. Insure fine grading; of prepared subgrade to final shaping and compaction is complete before constructing base course. 3. 02 INSTALLATION A. Asphaltic Concrete Paving: 1 . Base Course : a. Spread base? course of proper and uniform thick- nesses and compact in layers min. 4 in. on pre- pared subgrade. b. Immediately after placing, compact to density min. 98 percent of max. density as determined according to AASHTO T 180 Method C. C. Test surface of finished base course with 10 ft . straightedge at selected locations . d. Do not exceed 1/4 in. in surface variation from testing edge of straightedge between any two contacts with surface. e. Compact to thickness and cross section as shown not to vary max. 3/16 in. from required eleva- tion. f . Correct all humps , depressions , and thickness deficiencies exceeding specified tolerances by removing defective Work or by adding new mat- erials as directed. 2. Bituminous Prime Croat : Apply prime coat at rate between 0. 2 and 0. 55 gallons per sq. yd. 3. Bituminous Concrete Binder Course : a. Spread and finish bituminous mixture true to form and grade by automatically controlled bituminous paver . b. Use hand methods only where machine methods are impractical as determined by Architect . C. Automatically controlled paver shall spread bituminous mixture without tearing surface and shall strike finish that is smooth, true to cross section„ uniform in density and texture, 8632 02500-3 Paving and Surfacing VA asphaltic material , plant-mixed, hot- laid, and compacted in layers . 4. Bituminous Tack Coat : AASHTO M82, Grade MC-30 or RC-70. 5. Bituminous Concrete Surface Course: Mixture of fine and coarse aggregate, mineral filler and hot asphaltic material , plant-mixed, hot- laid, and com- pacted in layers as indicated. a. Comply with requirements of binder course. b. In areas inaccessible to mechanical rolling, hand methods may be employed to produce re- quired density. B. Portland Cement Concrete Paving: 1 . Concrete: Refer to Section 03300, Cast- In-Place Concrete. a. Strength : 3500 psi at 28 days for paving and 4000 psi at 28 days for curbs . b. Admixtures : ASTM C494, Types A, B, and D. C. Aggregate : ASTM C33, Size 467. d. Do not use hardener for exterior concrete pave- ments . e. Slump : 1- 1/2 in. to 2 in. max. for slip form paving and 3 in. max. for other types of pav- i ng. 2. Reinforcing: Refer to Section 03300, Cast- In-Place Concrete. 3. Form Materials : Refer to Section 03300, Cast- In- Place Concrete. 4. Base Course Aggregate: Crushed stone or crushed gravel . C. Concrete Pavers : 1 . Precast concrete composition of sand, aggregate, and cement hydraulically pressed into slabs under 460 tons of pressure. 2. Compressive Strength : ASTM C42, min. 4, 500 psi . 3. Thickness : ASTM C42, 2 in. +/- 1/16 in. 4. Size : 9 in. x 4-1/2 in. x 3-1/8 in. 5. Color : Beacon Hill Blend, Boston Colonial . 6. Manufacturer : Ideal Concrete Block Co. D. Granite Pavers : 1 . Size: 18 in. x 113 in. x 2 in. 2. Product : Fletcher Groton Road west , Chelmsford. E. Pavement Accessories : 1 . Pavement Marking : a. Modified alkyd paint , flat sheen white or yellow where indicated. b. Product : Sherwin Williams Model Pro-Mar Traffic Marking Paint , or approved equal . 2. Granite Curb: a. Front Face : Smooth quarry split with no drill holes , projections exceeding 3/4 in. , or dep- ressions exceeding 1/2 in. to paving line. b. Top Surface : Sawed top to true plane, no pro- 8632 02500-2 Paving and Surfacing VA SECTION 02500 PAVING AND SURFACING PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Asphaltic Concrete, Paving. 2. Portland Cement Concrete Paving. 3. Concrete Unit Pavers . 4. Pavement Marking. 5. Granite Curbs . 6. Granite Pavers . B. Related Sections : 1 . 02200, Earthwork. 2. 02490, Planting. 3. 03300, Cast- In-Place Concrete. 4. 07900, Joint Sealers . 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria : 1 . Asphalt Concrete Paving : a. Comply with State Department of Transportation Standard specifications for road and bridge construction. b. Sub-Base : Min. 12 in. stabilized soil , compac- ted to 98 percent density. C. Base : Min. 8 in. crushed aggregate, compacted to 98 percent density. d. Wearing Course : Min. 1-1/2 in. asphaltic con- crete over binder course ; min. 2-1/2 in. over- all compacted thickness . 1 . 03 SITE CONDITIONS A. Protection : 1 . Clean pavement before opening. 2. Repair or replace pavement sections damaged before Final Acceptance as required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. Asphaltic Concrete, Paving : 1 . Aggregate Base! Course : Coarse and fine aggregate and stone screenings , AASHTO M75, Size 3, crushed stone. 2. Bituminous Prime Coat : AASHTO M82, Grade MC-30, sprayed on substrate. 3. Bituminous Concrete Binder Course : Mixture of fine and coarse aggregate, mineral filler and hot 8632 02500- 1 Paving and Surfacing VA Planting 1. Planted areas will be accepted provided all requirements, including maintenance, have been compiled with and plant materials are alive and in a healthy, vigorous condition. C. Upon acceptance, the Owner wii assume plant maintenance. 3.06 CLEANING A. Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work. Remove from site all excess materials, soil, debris, and equipment. Repair damage resulting from planting operations. END OF SECTION Planting 02490 - 12 Planting plants free of insects and disease. 1. Re-set settled plants to proper grade and position. Restore planting saucer and adjacent material and remove dead material . 2. Tighten and repair guy wires and stakes as required. 3. Correct defective work as soon as possible after deficiencies become apparent and weather and season permit. 4. Water trees, plants, and ground cover beds within the first 24 hours of initial planting, and not less than twice per week until final acceptance. 3.05 ACCEPTANCE A. Planted areas will be inspected at completion of installation and accepted subject to compliance with specified materials and installation requirements. B. Inspection to determine acceptance of planted areas will be made by the Landscape Architect, upon Contractors request. Provide notification at least 10 working days before requested inspection date. Planting 02490 - 11 Planting broken, damaged, and unsymmetrical growth of new wood. 2. Multiple leader plants: Preserve the leader which will best promote; the symmetry of the plant. Cut branches flush with the trunk or main branch, at a point• beyond a lateral shoot or bud a distance of not less than 1/2 the diameter of the supporting branch. Make cut on an angle. G. Care of existing trees: 1. Selectively prune existing trees in designated areas, under Landscape Architect's direction. Remove sucker shoots, dead, rubbing, and damaged branchina. 2. Fertilize designated existing trees with 2 to 3 lbs. of Type "A" plant fertilizer per inch of trunk diameter, for trees less than 6" diameter and 3 to 5 lbs. for trees greater than 6" diameter. a. Fertilize in early spring before growth begins or in late October. b. Fertilize at 21 to 31 on center in a triangular pattern to a depth of 18" within the dripiine. c. Injection or drilling fertilization methods, when used, shall be acceptable subject to Landscape Architect's approval . 3. Water existing trees every 2 weeks until acceptance. Water thoroughly with a fine mist sprinkler head, soaker hose, or hose at a low flow rate over the entire drip line area as required to allow water to penetrate to a depth of 12" to 18". 3.04 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain plantings until completion and acceptance of the entire project. - B. Maintenance shall include pruning, cultivating, weeding, watering, and application of appropriate insecticides and fungicides necessary to maintain Planting 02490 - 10 Planting mulched areas. After watering, rake mulch to provide a uniform finished surface. 2. Mulch ground cover beds with mulch 1" to 1-1/2" deep immediately after planting. E. Wrapping, guying, staking: 1. Inspect trees for injury to trunks, evidence of insect infestation, and improper pruning before wrapping. 2. Wrap trunks of all trees spirally from bottom to top with specified tree wrap and secure in place. a. Overlap 1/2 the width of the tree wrap strip and cover the trunk from the ground to the height of the second branch. b. Secure tree wrap in place with twine wound spirally downward in opposite direction, tied around the tree in at least 3 places in adcltion to the top and bottom. 3. Staking/Guying: a. Stake/guy all trees prior to lawn seeding or sodding operations and acceptance. When high winds or other conditions which may effect tree survival or appearance occur, the Landscape Architect may require immediate staking/guying. b. Stake deciduous trees under 3" caliper. c. Guy deciduous trees 3" caliper and larger. 4. All work shall be acceptable to the Landscape Architect. F. Pruning: 1 . Prune branches of deciduous stock, after planting, to balance the loss of roots and preserve the natural character appropriate to the particular plant requirements. in general, remove 1/4 to 1/3 of the leaf bearing buds, proportion shall i'n all cases be acceptable to AOW*- the Landscape Architect. Remove or cut back Planting 02490 - 9 Planting the root system. Scarify the bottom of the pit to a depth of 411. Remove excavated materials from the site. E. Provide pre-mixed planting mixture for use around the balls and roots of the plants consisting of 5 parts planting topsoil to 11 part peat moss and 1/2 lb. plant fertilizer Type "A" for each cu. yd. of mixture. F. Provide pre-mixed ground cover bed planting mixture consisting of 3 parts planting topsoil to 1 part peat moss and 1/2 lb. plant fertilizer Type "A" per cu. yd. Provide beds a minimum of 8" deep. If slopes are greater than 4 to 1 increase depth to 12". 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Set plant material in the planting pit to proper grade and alignment. Set plants upright, plumb, and faced to give the best appearance or relationship to each other or adjacent structure. Set plant material 2"-3" above the finish grade. No filling will be permitted around trunks or stems. Backfill the pit with planting mixture. Do not use frozen or muddy mixtures for backfiliing. Form a ring of soil around the edge of each planting pit to retain water. B. After balled and burlapped plants are set, muddle planting soil mixture around bases of balls and fill all voids. 1 . Remove all burlap, ropes, and wires from the tops of balls. C. Space ground cover plants in accordance with indicated dimensions. Adjust spacing as necessary to evenly fill planting bed with indicated quantity of plants. Plant to within 12'" of the trunks of trees and shrubs within planting bed and to within 6" of edge of bed. D. Mulching: 1 . Mulch tree and shrub planting pits and shrub beds with required mulching material 2" deep immediately after planting. Thoroughly water Planting 02490 - 8 Planting paper, 2-1/2" wide, made of 2 layers of crepe kraft paper weighing not less than 30 lbs. per ream, cemented together with asphalt. K. Twine: Two-ply jute material . PSI EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine proposed planting areas and conditions of installation. Do not start planting work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Time of planting: 1 . Evergreen material : Plant evergreen materials between September 1 and November 1 or in spring before new growth begins. If project requirements require planting at other times, plants shall be sprayed with anti-dessicant prior to planting operations. 2. Deciduous material : F'lani deciduous materials in a dormant condition. if deciduous trees are planted in-leaf, they shall be sprayed with an anti-desiccant prior to planting operation. 3. Planting times other than those indicated shall be only as acceptable to the Landscape Architect. B. Planting shall be performed only by experienced workmen familiar with planting procedures under the supervision of a qualified supervisor. C. Locate plants as indicated on plans or as approved in the field after staking by the Contractor. If obstructions are encountered that are not shown on the drawings, do not proceed with planting operations until alternate plant locations have been selected. D. Excavate circular plant pits with vertical sides, except for plants specifically indicated to be planted in beds. Provide shrub pits at least 12" greater than the diameter of the root system and 24" greater for trees. Depth of pit shall accommodate Planting 02490 - 7 Planting 1. Provide topsoil conditioned as necessary to be free of substances harmful to the plants which will be grown in the soil . B. Fertilizer: 1. Plant Fertilizer Type "A": Commercial type approved by the Landscape Architect, containing 12% nitrogen, 12% phosphoric acid, and 12% potash by weight. 1/4 of .nitrogen in the form of nitrates, 1/4 in form of ammonia salt, and 1/2 in form of organic nitrogen. Substitution of a different fertilizer mix based on local soil conditions or specific plant requirements will be subject to approval by the Landscape Architect. C. Anti-Desiccant: Protective film emulsion providing a protective film over plant surfaces; permeable to permit transpiration. Mixed and applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Mulch: Premium grade shredded pine bark 3/4" to i-1/2" diameter, or approved acceptable by the Landscape Architect. Furnish in 3 cu. ft. bags or bulk. E. Water: Free of substances harmful to plant growth. Hoses or other methods of transportation furnished by Contractor. Water shall be supplied by the Contractor. F. Stakes for Staking: Hardwood, 2" x 2" x 81-0" long. G. Stakes for Guying: Hardwood, 2" x 2" x 36" long. H. Guying/Staking Wire: Minimum size No. 10 or 12 gage galvanized wire. 1. Turnbuckles: Galvanized steel of size and gage required to provide tensile strength greater than that of the wire. Turnbuckle openings shall be at least 3". I. Staking and Guying Hose: Two--ply, reinforced black rubber garden hose not less than i/2" inside diameter. J. Tree Wrap: Standard waterproofed tree wrapping Planting 02490 - 6 Planting list may be used when acceptable to the Landscape Architect. a. if the use of larger plants is acceptable, increase the spread of roots or root bail in proportion to the size of the plant, as indicated in Americ:an Standard for Nursery Stock. 6. The height of the trees, measured from the crown of the roots to the top of the top branch, shall not be less than the mlinimum size designated in the plant list. 7. No pruning wounds shall be present with a diameter of more than i" and such wounds must show vigorous bark on all edges. 8. Evergreen trees shall be branched to the ground. 9. Shrubs and small plants shall meet the requirements for spread and height indicated in the plant list. a. The measurements for height shall be taken from the ground level to the average height of the top of the plant and not the longest branch. b. Single stemmed or -thin plants will not be accepted. c. Side branches shall be generous, well-twigged, and -the iplant as a whole well-bushed to the ground. d. Plants shall be in a moist, vigorous condition, free from dead wood, bruises, or other root or branch injuries. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Topsoil for Planting Beds: Topsoil provided by Owner shall be conditioned as necessary and shall be fertile, friable, natural topsoil of loamy character, without admixture of subsoil material, reasonably free from clay, lumps, coarse sands, stones, plants, roots, sticks, and other foreign materials, with acidity range of between pH 6.0 and 6.8. Planting 02490 - 5 Planting D. Remove and immediately replace all plants, as determined by the Landscape Architect, to be unsatisfactory during the initial planting installation. EAU 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Plants: Provide plants typical of their species or variety, with normal, densely-developed branches and vigorous, fibrous root systems. Provide only sound, healthy, vigorous plants free from defects, disfiguring knots, sunscaled injuries, frost cracks, abrasions of the bark, plant diseases, insect eggs, borers, and all forms of infestation. All plants shall have a fully developed form without voids and open spaces. Plants held in storage will be rejected if they show signs of growth during storage. 1 . Dig balled and burlapped plants with firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the fibrous and feeding root system necessary for full recovery of the plant. Provide ball sizes complying with the latest edition of the "American Standard for Nursery Stock". Broken or mushroomed balls are not acceptable. 2. Container-grown stock: Grown in a container for sufficient length of time for the root system to have developed to hold its soil together, firm and whole. a. No plants shall be loose in the container. r b. Container stock shall not be pot bound. 3. Provide tree species that mature at heights over 251-0" with a single main trunk. Trees that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape are not acceptable. 4. Plants planted in rows shall be matched in form. 5. Plants larger than those specified in the plant Planting 02490 - .4 Planting C. Cover plants transported on open vehicles with a protective covering to prevent wind burn. D. Provide dry, loose topsoil for planting bed mixes. Topsoil will be provided by the Owner. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Work notification: Notify Landscape Architect at least 7 working days prior to Ifnstallation of plant material . B. Protect existing utilities, paving, and other facilities from damage caused by landscaping operations. C. A complete list of plants, Including a schedule of sizes, quantities, and other requirements is shown on the drawings. In the event that quantity discrepancies or material omissions occur in the plant materials list, the planting plans shall govern. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warrant plant material to remain alive and be in healthy, vigorous condition for a period of 1 year after completion and acceptance of entire project. Inspection of plants for start of guarantee will be made by the Landscape Architect at completion of planting. B. Replace, at the direction of the Landscape Architect and in accordance with thet drawings and specifications, all plants. that are dead, plants that are in an unhealthy or unsightly condition, plants that have lost their natural shape due to dead branches, or other causes due to the Contractor's negligence. The cost of such replacement(s) is at Contractor's expense: Warrant all replacement plants in accordance with this specification, for 1 year after installation. C. Warranty shall not include damage or loss of trees, plants, or ground covers caused by fires, floods, freezing rains, lightning storms, or winds over 75 miles per hour, winter kill caused by extreme cold and severe winter conditions not typical of planting area; or by acts of vandalism or negligence on the part of the Owner. Planting 02490 - 3 NOW Planting E. Provide "specimen" plants with a special height, shape, or character of growth. Tag specimen trees or shrubs at the source of supply. The Landscape Architect will inspect specimen selections at the source of supply for suitability and adaptability 'to selected location. When specimen plants cannot be purchased locally, provide sufficient photographs of the proposed specimen plants for approval . P. Plants may be inspected and approved at the place of growth, for compliance with specification requirements for quality, size, and variety. Such approval shall not impair the right of inspection and rejection upon delivery at the site or during the progress of the work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following material samples: 1. Mulch. 2. Planting accessories. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver fertilizer materials in original, unopened, and undamaged containers showing weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer. Store in manner to prevent wetting and deterioration. B. Take all precautions customary in good trade practice in preparing plants for moving. Workmanship that fails to meet the highest standards will be rejected. Spray deciduous plants in foliage with an approved "Anti-Desiccant" immediately after digging to prevent dehydration. Dig, pack, transport, and handle plants with care to ensure protection against injury. Inspection certificates required by law shall accompany each shipment invoice or order to stock and on arrival, the certificate shall be filed with the Landscape Architect. Protect all plants from drying out. if plants cannot be planted immediately upon delivery, properly protect them with soil, wet peat moss, or in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Water heeled-in plantings daily. No plant shall be bound with rope or wire in a manner that could damage or break the branches. AVW Planting 02490 - 2 Planting SECTION 02490 PLANTING BAK 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide trees, plants, and ground covers as shown and specified. The work includes: 1. Soil preparation. 2. Trees, shrubs, and ground covers. 3. Planting mixes. 4. Mulch and planting accessories. 5. Existing tree care. 6. Maintenance. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Plant names indicated comply with "Standardized Plant Names" as adopted by the latest edition of the American Joint Committee of Horticultural Nomenclature. Names of varieties not listed conform generally with names accepted by the nursery trade. Provide stock true to botanical name and legibly tagged. B. Comply with sizing and grading standards of the latest edition of "American Standard for Nursery Stock." A plant shall be dimensioned as it stands in its natural position. T C. All plants shall be nursery grown under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of the project for a minimum of 2 years. D. Stock furnished shall be at least the minimum size indicated. Larger stock is acceptable, at no additional cost, and providing that the larger plants will not be cut back to size indicated. Provide plants indicated by two measurements so that at least 50% of the material shall be closer in size to the maximum size indicated. Planting 02490 - 1 1 . Do not backfill against foundation until completion of supporting floor construction to top of backfill or to first level above top of backfill . 2. Place backfill so as to prevent any damage to sub- ,, soil drainage systems . 3. Place drainage fill from top of felt above footing subsoil drains to 16 in. of finish grade. G. Backfilling in Utility Trenches : 1 . Do not backfill trenches until all testing and in- spections are finished and written authorization is granted. 2. Backfilling Pipe - To 12 in. Above : a. From 12 in., above barrel of pipe to bottom of trench, do not allow organic materials , lumps of soil , or rocks unable to pass through 1 in. sieve. b. Place backfill in 6 in. layers around pipe, compacted simultaneously on each side of pipe. 3. Backfilling Pipe -• 12 in. and Above : a. From 12 in.. above pipe to final grade, do not allow organic materials , lumps of soil , or rocks unable to pass through 6 in. ring. b. Place backfill, in max. 9 in. layers . C. Tamp using mechanical equipment . d. For pipe located under paved areas , compact backfill to min. 100 percent of maximum den- sity complyint; with AASHTO T99. - END OF SECTION - 8632 02200-5 Earthwork VA 1 . Fill Materials : Provide general fill , obtained from excavation on site, if acceptable, or from borrow sources . 2. Fill Classification : a. Building and 5 ft . Beyond : GW, coarse and fine gravel . b. Paved Areas : Refer to Section 02500, Paving and Surfacing, for aggregate base course with GW, coarse as general fill below base course. C. Landscaped Areas : SW, coarse and medium sand. d. Utility Excavations : GP and SP, coarse and medium sand and gravel . e. Other Areas : GP, coarse and fine gravel . 3. Borrow: a. Provide additional material required, at no additional cost . b. Borrow shall consist of suitable material . 4. Placing : a. Place fill materials in horizontal loose layers to produce uniform thickness of material . b. Start placement in deepest area and progress approximately parallel to finished grade. C. Thickness of Layers Before Compaction : 8 in. for cohesive soils , 12 in. for cohesionless soils . d. Do not place fill material on areas where free water is standing or on surfaces which have not been approved„ D. Compaction : 1 . Compact each layer of fill with equipment to ach- ieve following percentages of maximum density at optimum moisture. 2. Cohesive Soils Test : ASTM D1557. 3. Cohesionless Soils Test : ASTM D2049. Location ASTM D1557 ASTM D2049 a. Under Building Slabs on Grade 95 75 b. Under Paved Areas 95 75 C. General Grading 85 50 4. Do not compact cohesive soil when moisture content varies more than 3 percent from optimum moisture content . 5. Suspend compaction operation because of rain or other unsatisfactory conditions . E. Drainage Fill for Building Slabs : 1 . Drainage Fill : SW, medium and fine sand. 2. Provide specified drainage fill beneath all con- crete building slabs on grade and as shown else- where. 3. Place drainage fill to depth shown and in no case less than 6 in. deep. 4. Compact fill with vibratory or tamping methods to firm base; except hand tamp over subsoil drains . F. Backfilling Against Foundation Walls : 8632 02200-4 Earthwork VA 3. 01 PREPARATION A. Clear and grub shrubs , stumps , roots , brush, vegeta- tion, rubbish, and debris within construction limit lines , except as designated to remain or relocate. 3. 02 APPLICATION A. Excavation : 1 . General : a. Excavate to lines and elevations as required. b. Make excavations sufficiently large to permit placing and removal of forms , installation of waterproofing, dampproofing, and utilities ; and to allow inspection. 2. Excavation for Footings : a. Architect to approve footing subgrades before proceeding with construction of piers and footings . b. Found bottoms of footings on rock or firm understructure at elevations indicated or as shown. C. Subgrade oil footings shall be level and free of loose rock„ dirt , debris , and standing water before acceptance for placing concrete. 3. Excavation for Paved Areas , Building Slabs , and Structural Members : a. Structural Members : Frame slabs and grade beams . b. Architect to approve subgrade before proceeding with construction of pavements , slabs , or structural members . 4. Excavation for General Grading: Fill and compact excavations made below elevations shown or speci - fied for filling and compacting. 5. Trench Excavation : a. Provide trenches for piping and utilities 14 in. wider than o. d. of pipe to be laid. b. Grade bottoms of trenches with bell holes scooped to provide uniform bearing and support of pipe and utilities on undisturbed soil throughout their entire length except where other means of supporting pipe are indicated. C. Excavate rock materials to 6 in. below pipe invert and bed backfilled with drainage fill , well tamped in place. B. Underground Precast Concrete Reservoir : 1 . Place to requirements of manufacturer and coordin- ate placement of piping system to connect reserv- oir . 2. Install below freezing line under arcade between Columns 4 and 5. 3. Coordinate placement of cement waterproofing. low C. Filling: 8632 02200-3 Earthwork VA 3. Assume responsibility for strength and adequacy of retaining structures ; for safety and support of such construction utilities , to guard against move- ment , settlement , damage, or injury. A C. Pumping and Drainage : 1 . Excavate areas to afford adequate drainage. 2. Control grading to prevent water running into excavated areas until Work is complete. 3. Remove water that may interfere with proper perfor- mance of Work or cause ponding. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 MATERIALS A. Fill Materials : ASTM D2487. 1 . Gravel. : a. Coarse: Passes 3 In. sieve and retained on 3/4 In. sieve. b. Fine : Passes 3/4 in. sieve and retained on No. 4 sieve. 2. Sand : a. Coarse : Passes No. 4 sieve and retained on No. 10 sieve. b. Medium: Passes No. 10 sieve and retained on No. 40 sieve. C. Fine : Passes No. 40 sieve and retained on No. 200 sieve. 3. Soil Classifications : a. GW Group : Max. 5 percent fines , max. 15 per- cent sand, well graded gravel . b. GP Group : Max. 5 percent fines , max. 15 per- cent sand, poorly graded gravel . C. SW Group : Max . 5 percent fines , max. 15 per- cent gravel. , well graded sand. d. SP Group: Max. 5 percent fines , max. 15 per- cent gravel, , poorly graded sand. B. Underground Precast: Concrete Reservoir : 1 . Provide septic tank of dimensions and capacity as Indicated. 2. Construction: Precast reinforced concrete, with bituminous coating; extending min. 4 in. below water line and covering all internal area above that point . 3. Construction : Welded steel , min. 12 gage, with bituminous coating; both externally and internally. 4. Manhole : Provide min. 24 in. dia. access lid with lift rings in center of septic tank top. 5. Inlet and Outlet Access : Provide min. 12 in. dia. access lids centered over inlet and outlet , with lift ring. 6. Capacity : 10, 000 gal . 7. Manufacturer : Rolando, American Precast . PART 3 EXECUTION 8632 02200-2 Earthwork VA SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Existing Utilities Protection. 2. Retaining Structures . 3. Site Clearing. 4. Excavation. 5. Filling and Compaction. B. Underground Precast Concrete Reservoir. B. Related Sections : 1 . 02500, Paving and Surfacing. 2. 02900, Landscaping. 3. 07145, Cementitious Waterproofing. 4. 07160, Bituminous Dampproofing. 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria : Grade areas to smooth finished sur- faces with uniform levels or slopes between elevations shown, or between such points and existing grades with- in following tolerances : 1 . Pavements and Walks : Finish areas under pavements and walks 1/2 in. below required sub-base. 2. Footings : Finish surfaces 5/8 in. below required grade. 3. Slabs on Grade and Structural Members : Finish sur- faces 1/4 in. above or below required grade. 4 . Other Areas : Finish areas to 0. 1 ft . above or be- low required elevations , grade, and cross section. 1 . 03 SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities : 1 . Safeguard, protect from damage, and support exist- ing service lines , utilities , and utility struc- tures to remain in service uncovered or encountered during operations . 2. Remove existing piping, subsoil drainage systems , conduit , manholes , and other facilities to be aban- doned within limits of excavations , and plug open ends with concrete. B. Retaining Structures : 1 . Take precaution to guard against movement or set- tlement of existing or new construction, utilities , paving, walks , light standards , piping, conduit , and other facilities . 2. Provide bracing, shoring, sheeting, sheet piling, underpinning, or other retaining structures . 8632 02200-1 Earthwork VA EMPLOYEE RELEASE FORM A Employee Name : Employee Address : Employee Telephone No. : _ Union Card Number : Classification of Worker : _ Have you had in the past , or present , any respiratory prob- lems? Yes No _ The project you will be working on involves the use of asbes- tos and the removal of the asbestos from the building. Asbes- tos is considered a health hazard. The company is supplying all necessary safety clothing and working conditions required and necessary for your protection from asbestos hazard. You shall be instructed at commencement of the job on the required use of safety equipment , clothing, working conditions and procedures . These must be rigidly adhered to. Smoking is not permitted in the work areas . Disregarding of safety instructions shall result in instant dismissal . I acknowledge that safety instructions have been given to me by the company at my work commencement and I am thoroughly conversant with them and have answered the above questions truthfully. Signed Employee Date _ 8632 02080 Asbestos Removal VA Employee Release Form FINAL INSPECTION Form Time: Date : Name of Job Name of Contractor Location of Job Address City _ State Zip I have inspected the job-site and found it to be clean, orderly and dust-free. All work contracted for has apparently been performed in an acceptable manner in complete accordance with the specifications . There is no obvious damage to the structure. Comments : Contracting Agent SEAL ( If applicable) 8632 02080 Asbestos Removal VA Final Inspection Form ASBESTOS DISPOSAL FORM , Date : Owner or Operator of Landfill Name Address City _ State Zip Phone ( ) Name of Landfill Name Address City _ State Zip Phone ( ) Hauler Approximate Volume of Asbestos Received AOW- Type of Container Asbestos in Asbestos Containers Labeled? YES NO I certify that the above statements are true and that the landfill has been approved for the disposal of asbestos . The delivered material will be covered with 6 inches ( 15cm) of non-asbestos material within 24 hours . Landfill Owner-Operator 8632 02080 Asbestos Removal VA Asbestos Disposal Form TEN DAN' NOTICE FORM This form is to be filled in and filed with both state and regional EPA officials min. 20 days before starting of asbestos abatement contract . Contractor Name Address City _ State Zip Phone ( ) Building Owner or Operator _ Name Address City _ State Zip Phone ( ) Building Information Age of Building Use of Building Address City _ State Zip Amount of Asbestos ( ft . ) Abatement Technique Amount of Asbestos ( ft . ) Abatement Technique Contract Dates : Start Finish Disposal Site Site Name _ Operator-Owner Name Address City _ State Zip Phone ( ) Phone ( ) 4001*- 8632 02080 Asbestos Removal VA Ten-Day Notice Form D. Hauling and Disposal : 1 . Comply with regulatory requirements . 2. Dump sealed plastic bags from drums into burial site unless bags have been broken or damaged. 3. Leave damaged bags in drums , and bury entire con- taminated drum and! contents . 4. Recycle uncontaminated drums . 5. Equip workers with appropriate respirators and per- sonal protective equipment when handling asbestos materials and unloading sealed drums at disposal site. 6. Dispose of waste asbestos material by burial in accordance with instructions and regulations of governing authorties . - END OF SECTION - 8632 02080-11 Asbestos Removal VA a. Provide area monitoring of asbestos fibers and establish TWA max. 0. 5 fibers/cc after final clean-up but before removal of enclusure of asbestos control area. b. Provide area monitoring and establish TWA 2 days , 5 days , 15 days , and 30 days after enclo- sure of asbestos control area is removed ; or after final. clean-up when enclosure is not re- quired. C. Fiber counts from these samples shall be max. 0. 5 fibers/cc or be not greater than reference TWA, whichever is less . d. Should any of final samplings indicate higher value, take appropriate actions to re-clean area and repeat monitoring. 3. 02 CLEAN-UP AND DISP013AL A. Housekeeping: 1 . Maintain surfaces of asbestos control area free of accumulations of asbestos fibers . 2. Restrict spread of dust and debris ; keep waste from being distributed over general area. 3. Do not blow down space with compressed air . 4. When asbestos removal is complete, remove asbestos debris from worksite, complete final clean-up, and certify area as safe before signs are removed. 5. After final clean--up, remove filters on building HVAC system and provide new filters of same type and efficiency . 6. Dispose of removed filters as asbestos-contaminated materials . 7. Reestablish HVAC, mechanical , and electrical sys- tems in acceptable working order . 8. Inspect affected .surfaces for residual asbestos material and accumulated dust . 9. Reclean areas showing dust or residual asbestos materials . 10. After re-cleaning is required, monitor asbestos airborne concentration after recleaning. 11 . Owner shall have option to perform monitoring to certify areas are safe before entry in permitted. B. Disposal of Asbestos : 1 . Collect asbestos waste, scrap, debris , bags , con- tainers , equipment , and asbestos-contaminated clo- thing which may produce airborne concentrations of asbestos fibers and place in sealed impermeable bags . 2. Affix caution label to each bag. C. Temporary Storage : 1 . Store sealed impermeable bags in asbestos waste drums or other suitable closed containers . 2. Place drums in interim storage area indicated on .,, drawings . 8632 02080-10 Asbestos Removal VA 2. Remove material and immediately place in plastic disposal bags . 3. Where unusual circumstances prohibit use of plastic bags , alternate measures for containment of asbes- tos fibers may be required. 4. In case where both piping and insulation are to be removed, Contractor may elect to wet insulation and wrap pipes and insulation in plastic and remove pipe by sections. 5. Comply with requirements of governing authorities . E. Sealing and Removal of Asbestos-Contaminated Items Designated for Disposal : 1 . Remove contaminated architectural , mechanical , and electrical appurtenances such as venetian blinds , full -height partitions , carpeting, duct work, pipes and fittings , radiators, light fixtures , conduit , panels , and other contaminated items designated for removal by completely coating items with asbestos sealer before removing items from asbestos control area. 2. Remaining asbestos residue shall not be of such size so as to allow dislodging by means other than vacuuming. 3. These items need not be vacuumed. 4. Spray-apply asbestos sealer by airless method ; visually gauge thoroughness of sealing operation by extent of colored coating on exposed surfaces . F. Monitoring: 1 . General : Monitor airborne concentrations of asbes- tos fibers in accordance with regulatory require- ments and as specified. 2. Monitoring Prior Ito Asbestos Removal Work : Provide area monitoring and establish reference Time- Weighted Average (TWA) one day before masking and sealing operations for each work site. 3. Monitoring During Asbestos Removal Work : a. Provide personal and area monitoring and esta- blish TWA during first exposure to airborne concentrations of asbestos . b. Provided same type of work is being performed, provide area monitoring once every 4 hours during work shift inside asbestos control area, outside entrance to asbestos control area, and at exhaust opening of local exhaust system. C. If monitoring outside asbestos control area shows airborne concentrations have reached spe- cified TWA, stop work, and correnct conditions causing increase. d. In areas where construction of asbestos control area is not required, after initial TWA' s are established, and provided same type of work is being performed, provide monitoring at designa- ted limits of asbestos work area at such fre- quency as recommended by Industrial Hygienist . 4. Monitoring After Final Clean-Up : 8632 02080-9 Asbestos Removal VA 5. Do not expose personnel of other trades , not en- gaged in removal and demolition of asbestos, at any time to airborne concentrations of asbestos. 6. Provide temporary heating, ventilation, and air Awk conditioning as required in areas of asbestos re- moval operations . 7. Disconnect electrical service in areas of asbestos removal operations when wet removal is performed ; provide temporary electrical service. B. Asbestos Control Area Requirements - Enclosure Areas : 1 . Seal openings in areas where release of airborne asbestos fibers is expected. 2. Establish asbestos control area with use of cur- tains , portable partitions , or other enclosures in order to prevent escape of asbestos fibers from contaminated asbestos control area. 3. Include protective covering of walls and ceilings with plastic film sealed with tape to prevent water or other damage. 4. Provide plastic film over floors and extend min. 12 in. up walls . 5. Seal joints with tape. 6. Provide local exhaust system in asbestos control area. 7. Openings will 'be allowed in enclosures of asbestos control areas for supply and exhaust of air for lo- cal exhaust system. 8. Replace filters as required to maintain efficiency of system. C. Asbestos Control Area Requirements - Open Areas : 1 . Where indicated as impractical to construct enclo- sure, establish designated limits for asbestos work area. 2. With use of rope or other continuous barriers main- tain all other requirements for asbestos control areas . 3. Also, where enclosure is not provided, conduct area monitoring of airborne asbestos fibers during work shift at designated limits downwind of asbestos work area at such frequency as recommended by Industrial Hygienist . 4. If quantity of airborne asbestos fibers monitored at designated limits at any time reaches time- weighted average specified, evacuate personnel in adjacent aras or provide personnel with approved protective equipment . 5. If adjacent areas are contaminated, clean contami- nated areas , monitor , and visually inspect area as specified. D. Asbestos Handling Procedures : 1 . Sufficiently wet asbestos material with fine spray of amended water during removal , cutting, or other handling so as to readuce emission of airborne fibers . 8632 02080-8 Asbestos Removal VA Do Not Remain in Area Unless Your Work Requires it 1/4 in. Gothic. Oft Breathing Asbestos Dust; May Be Hazardous To Your Health 14 Point Gothic. Provide Spacing between lines at least equial to height of upper case letters . C. Caution Labels : Provide labels , min. 3 in. x 5 In. , with pressure-sensitive adhesive, displaying the following legend. CAUTION CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS AVOID CREATING DUST BREATHING ASBESTOS DUST MAY CAUSE SERIOUS BODILY HARM. 2. 03 MATERIALS A. Plastic Film: 1 . 4-mil polyethylene for walls . 2. 6-mil poilyethylene for sealing off corridors and used for chambers . 3. 6-mil double-thickness for floors . B. Plastic Bags : 6-mil polyethylene, of sufficient size for application. C. Tape : Duct tape. D. Runners : Paper , of sufficient width and length to pro- tect floors , from building entrances to work areas . E. Asbestos Sealer : Provide EPA-approved asbestos sealer , tinted contrasting color to asbestos surfaces , and suitable to be spray-applied by airless method. PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 WORK PROCEDURE A. General : 1 . Perform asbestos related work in accordance with regulatory requirements and as specified. 2. Use wet or dry removal procedures . 3. Personnel shall wear and utilize protective cloth- ing and equipment . 4. Do not permit eating, smoking, or drinking in as- bestos control area. 8632 02080-7 Asbestos Removal VA keep work shoes in decontamination locker . 8. Do not allow employees to wear disposabel work clothing beyond decontamination room. 9. Locate showers between decontamination locker room and clean locker room and require that employees shower before changing into street clothes . 10. Clean asbestos contaminated work clothing before reuse. E. Eye Protection : Provide goggles to personnel engaged in asbestos operations when use of full face respirator is not required. F. Local Exhaust System: 1 . Provide local exhaust system in asbestos control area. 2. Equip exhaust with high efficiency particulate ab- solute (HEPA) filters . 3. Local exhaust equipment must be sufficient to main- tain minimum pressure differential of 0. 02 in. W. G. relative to adjacent , unsealed areas . 4. Provide continuous 24-hour/day monitoring of pres- sure differential with automatic recording instru- ment . 5. Do not use building ventilation system as local ex- haust system for asbestos control area. 2. 02 CAUTION SIGNS AND LABELS: A. General : 1 . Provide signs at approaches to asbestos control areas containing concentrations of airborne asbes- tos fibers . 2. Locate signs at such distance that personnel may read sign and take necessary protective steps re- quired before entering area. 3. Provide labels and affix to asbestos materials , scrap, waste, debris , and other products contami - nated with asbestos . B. Caution Sign : 1 . Vertical format , min 20 in. x 14 in. 2. Legend in lower panel : Legend Notation Asbestos 1 in. Sans Serif Gothic or Block. Dust Hazard 3/4 in. Sans Serif Gothic or Block. Avoid Breathing Dust 1/4 in. Gothic. Wear Assigned Protective Equipment 1/4 in. Gothic. 8632 02080-6 Asbestos Removal VA Safety and Health (NIOSH) , Department of Health and Human Services . 2. Provide personnel engaged in removal and demolition of asbestos materials with Type C supplied-air res- pirators , continuous flow or pressure demand class. 3. Use Type C continuous floww or pressure-demand, supplied-air respirators until average airborne concentrations of asbestos that employees will con- front will not exceed 100 times permissible expo- sure limits ; ie. , 8-hour time-weighted average (TWA) and ceiling limits . 4. Exposure Limits : a. When exposure limits are established, other respirators that afford adequate protection at such established upper concentrations of air- borne asbestos may be used. b. If respirators other than Type C continuous flow or pressure-demand, supplied-air respira- tors are provided, determine exposure of each employee to airborne asbestos during each type of removal operation. C. Determine both ceiling limit and 8-hour, time- weighted average concentration of asbestos to which each employee is exposed during each type of removal operation. C. Protective Clothing : 1 . Provide personnel exposed to airborned concentra- tions of asbestos fibers with disposable protective wholebody clothing, headcoverings , gloves , and foot coverings . 2. Provide disposable plastic or rubber gloves to pro- tect hands . 3. Cloth gloves may be worn inside plastic or rubber gloves for comfort: , but shall not be used alone. 4. Make sleeves secure at wrists and make foot cover- ings secure at ankles by use of tape. 5. Provide work clothes for wear under disposable pro- tective coveralls and foot coverings. D. Change Rooms : 1 . Provide temporary unit with seperate decontamina- tion locker room and clean locker room for person- nel required to wear whole body protective cloth- s ng. 2. Provide 2 lockers for each asbestos worker , one in each seperate locker room. 3. Keep street clothing and street shoes in clean locker. 4. Vacuum and remove asbestos contaminated disposable protective clothing while still wearing respirators at boundary of asbestos work area and seal in impermeable bags or containers for disposal . 5. Do not remove disposable protective clothing in de- contamination locker room. wr, 6. Remove work clothing in decontamination room. 7. Tag and bag cloth work clothes for laundering and 8632 02080-5 Asbestos Removal VA D. Monitoring Results : 1 . Submit monitoring results to Owner' s Representative within 3 working days . 2. Complete fiber counting and Industrial Hygienist ' s review of results within 16 hours . 3. Industrial Hygienist shall notify Contractor and Owner ' s Representative immediately of any exposures to asbestos fibers in excess of acceptable limits. 4. Submit copy of monitoring results of nonfriable asbestos , including description of Work procedure, at time of air monitoring. E. Notification : Notify Owner ' s Representative, Testing Laboratory and governing authorities min. 3 working days before start of asbestos removal work. F. Landfill : Submit written evidence that landfill for disposal is approved for asbestos disposal by USEPA and state or local regulatory agencies . G. Local Exhaust System: 1 . Submit pressure differential recordings for each work day to Industrial Hygienist for review, and then submit to Owner ' s Representative within 24 hours from end of each work day. 2. Industrial Hygienist shall notify Contractor and Owner ' s Representative immediately of any variance in pressure differential which could cause exposure of adjacent unsealed areas to asbestos fiber con- centrations in excess of acceptable time-weighted average. H. Training : 1 . Submit certificates , signed by each employee, that employee has received training in proper handling of materials that contain asbestos ; understands health implications and risks involved, including illnesses possible from exposure to airborne asbes- tos fibers ; understands use and limits of respira- tory equipment to be used ; and understands results of monitoring of airborne quantities of asbestos related to health and respiratory equipment . PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 01 EQUIPMENT A. Extra Equipment : Make available to Industrial Hygie- nist or Owner' s Representative 2 complete sets of per- sonal protective equipment as required herein for entry to asbestos control area for observation of asbestos control area. B. Respirators : 1 . Select respirators from those approved by Mines Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) , Department of Labor , or National Institute for Occupational 8632 02080-4 Asbestos Removal VA a. In addition to detailed requirements of this specification, comply with laws , ordinances , rules , and regulations of federal , state, re- gional , and local authorities regarding hand- ling, storing, transporting, and disposing of asbestos waste materials . b. Submit matters of interpretation of standards to appropriate administrative agency for re- solution before starting Work. C. Where requirements of this specification and referenced documents vary, comply with most stringent requirement . S. Exhaust Equipment : Conform to ANSI Z9. 2 Fundamen- tals Governing Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems for equipment required to contain airborne asbestos fibers , such as filter, vacuum, and ventilation equipment . 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Testing Laboratory : 1 . Submit name, address , and telephone number of test- ing laboratory selected for monitoring of airborne concentrations of asbestos fibers . 2. Provide certification that persons counting samples have been judged proficient by successful partici - pation in NIOSH Proficiency Analytical Testing (PAT) Program or have been certified by American Industrial Hygiene Association. B. Asbestos Removal Plan : 1 . Before start of asbestos work, submit detailed plan of Work procedures to be used in removal and dispo- sal of materials containing asbestos to governing authorities having; jurisdiction. 2. Plan must be approved by governing authorities be- fore start of Work. 3. Include in plan : a. Location of asbestos control areas . b. Change Rooms. C. Layout of Change Rooms . d. Interface of trades involved in construction. e. Sequencing of asbestos-related Work. f . Disposal Plan., g. Type of wetting agent and asbestos sealer to be used. h. Air monitoring. i . Detailed description of method to be employed in order to control pollution. C. Industrial Hygienist : 1 . Submit name, address , and telephone number of In- dustrial Hygienist selected to direct monitoring and training. 2. Certification that Industrial Hygienist Is certi - fied by American Board of Industrial Hygiene. 8632 02080-3 Asbestos Removal VA B. Regulatory Requirements : 1 . Medical Examinations : a. Before exposure to airborne asbestos fibers , provide workers with comprehensive medical ex- amination as required by regulatory require- ments . b. Examination is not required if records show em- ployee has been examined within past year be- fore start of Work. C. Provide same medical examination on annual ba- sis to employees engaged in occupation invol - ving asbestos fibers , and within 30 calendar days before or after termination of employment in such occupation. d. Specifically indentify x-ray films of asbestos workers to consulting radiologist and mark medical record jackets with word "ASBESTOS". 2. Medical Records : a. Maintain complete and accurate records of em- ployees ' medical examinations for period of 20 years after termination of employment . b. Make records of required medical examinations available for inspection and copying to: Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health, Director of National Insti - tute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) , authorized representatives of either of them, and employee' s physician upon request of employee or former employee. 3. Respirator Program: Establish program complying with ANSI Z88. 2 Practices for Respiratory Pro- tection. 4. Industrial Hygienist : Conduct monitoring and training under direction of Certified Industrial Hygienist certified by American Board of Industrial Hygiene. 5. Worker Training: a. Within 3 months before assignment to asbestos work, instruct: each employee with regard to hazards of asbestos , safety and health pre- cautions , and use and requirements for protec- tive clothing and equipment including respira- tors . b. Fully cover engineering and other hazard con- trol techniques and procedures. 6. Permits and Notifications : a. Secure necessary permits in conjunction with asbestos removal , hauling, and disposition and provide timely notification of such actions as may be required by federal , state, regional , and local authorities . b. Notify Regional Office - USEPA, and provide copies of notification to Owner ' s Representa- tive and State Environmental Regulatory Agency 20 days before start of Work. 7. Safety Compliace : 8632 02080-2 Asbestos Removal VA SECTION 02080 ASBESTOS REMOVAL PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Demolition or Removal of Friable Asbestos Materials : 1 . Include handling of friable materials containing asbestos encountered during removal and demolition operations . 2. Use procedures and equipment required to protect workers and occupants of building or area, or both, from contact with airborne asbestos fibers . 3. Dispose of removed asbestos-containing materials . B. Demolition or Removal of Nonfriable Asbestos Materials : 1 . Include handling of nonfriable materials containing asbestos which are encountered during removal and demolition operations . 2. Use incidental procedures and equipment required to protect workers and occupants of building or area, or both, from contract with airborne asbestos fibers . 3. include disposal of removed asbestos-containing materials . C. Location and Responsibilities : 1 . Asbestos Removal Work includes demolition and re- moval of asbestos materials identified and in loca- tions indicated. 2. Confine asbestos control area for removal of asbes- tos materials within limits as indicated. 3. Title to Materials : a. Materials resulting from demolition Work, ex- cept as otherwise indicated, shall become pro- perty of Contractor . b. Dispose of property as specified. 4. Protection of Existing Work to Remain : a. Perform demolition Work without damage or con- tamination of adjacent Work. b. Where such Work is damaged or contaminated, re- store to original condition. 1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications : 1 . Contractor ' s Qualifications : a. Firm specializing in safe removal of asbestos which has been successfully engaged in projects similar to this project min. 2 yrs . b. Firm must be licensed by governing authorities of State where asbestos removal project is fin,, located and have approved training program for workers . 8632 02080-1 Asbestos Removal VA 1 . Completely fill below-grade areas and voids re- sulting from demolition of structures . 2. Use satisfactory soil materials consisting of stone, gravel , and sand, free from debris , trash, frozen materials, roots and other organic matter. 3. Before placement of fill materials , ensure that areas to be filled are free of standing water , frost , frozen material , trash and debris . 4. Refer to Section 02200, Earthwork, for fill materials and compaction requirements . 5. Place fill materials in horizontal layers max. 6 In. in loose depth. 6. Compact each layer at optimum moisture content of fill material to a density equal to original adja- cent ground, unless subsequent excavation for new work is required. 7. After fill placement and compaction, grade surface to meet adjacent contours and to provide flow to surface drainage structures . 3. 02 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General : 1 . Remove from site debris , rubbish, and other mate- rials resulting from demolition operations . 2. Burning of removed materials from demolished struc- tures will not be permitted on site. B. Removal : Transport materials removed from demolished structures and dispose of off site. - END OF SECTION - 8632 02060-3 Building Demolition VA support to prevent movement , settlement or collapse of structures to tie demolished and adjacent facili - ties to remain. F. Damages : Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition operations at no cost to Owner . PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3. 01 DEMOLITION A. Pollution Controls : 1 . Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures , and other suitable methods to limit dust and dirt ri - sing and scattering in air to lowest practical level . 2. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 3. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, and pollution. 4. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust , dirt , and debris caused by demolition operations , as directed by Architect or governing authorities . 5. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of work. B. Building Demolition : 1 . Demolish buildings completely and remove from site. 2. Use such methods as required to complete work within limitations of governing regulations . 3. Proceed with demolition in a systematic manner , from top of structure to ground. 4. Complete demolition work above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on lower levels . 5. Break up and remove concrete slabs-on-grade, unless otherwise shown to remain. 6. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and remove materials so as to not impose excessive loads to supporting walls , floors or framing. C. Below-Grade Construction 1 . Demolish foundation walls to a depth min. 12 in. below existing ground surface. 2. Demolish and remove below-grade wood, metal con- struction, and floor construction except concrete slabs on grade. 3. Demolish and remove below-grade construction and concrete slabs on grade. D. Filling Voids : 6632 02060-2 Building Demolition VA SECTION 02060 BUILDING DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes : 1 . Building Demolition. 2. Demolition of below-grade construction. 3. Disposal of demolished materials . 4. Pollution control „ B. Related Sections : 1 . 02080, Asbestos Removal . 2. 02200, Earthwork. 1 . 02 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Occupancy : Structures to be demolished will be vacated and discontinued in use before start of work. B. Condition of Structures : 1 . Owner assumes no :responsibility for actual condi - tion of structures to be demolished. 2. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bid- ding purposes will be maintained by Owner in so far as practicable. 3. However , variations within structure may occur by Owner ' s removal and salvage operations before start of demolition work. C. Explosives : Use of explosives will not be permitted. D. Traffic : 1 . Conduct demolition operations and removal of debris to ensure minimum interference with roads , streets , walks , and other adjacent occupied or used facili- ties . 2. Do not close or obstruct streets , walks or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstruct- ed traffic ways if required by governing regula- tions . E. Protections : 1 . Ensure safe passage of persons around area of demolition. 2. Conduct operations to prevent injury to adjacent buildings , structures , other facilities , and persons . 3. Erect temporary covered passageways as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or 8632 02060-1 Building Demolition VA SECTION 02010 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 INVESTIGATION A. Site Information : 1 . Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representation or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. 2. It is expressly understood Owner will not be re- sponsibile for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by Contractor. 3. Data are made available for convenience of Contrac- tor. 4. Additional test borings and other exploratory oper- ations may be made by Contractor at no cost to Owner . - END OF SECTION - 8632 02010-1 Subsurface Investiga- VA tion DIVISION 2 SITE and CIVIL WORK item where changes or clarifications have not been made due to Architect ' s comments . PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. - END OF SECTION - 8632 01600-5 Material and Equipment VA by Architect . 2. Submit separate request for each Product in compli- ance with methods detailed in Section 01340, Shop Drawings , Product Data, and Samples , supported with complete data, drawings , and samples as appropri - ate, including: a. Comparison of qualities of proposed substitu- tion with that specified, with Contractor assu- ming responsibility to provide evidence that item submitted for substitution is "equal " to item specified or intended for Project . b. Changes required in other elements of Work be- cause of substitution. C. Effect on construction schedule. d. Cost data comparing proposed substitution with Product specified. e. Any required license fees or royalties . f . Availability of maintenance service, and source of replacement materials . 3. Architect will be judge of acceptability of pro- posed substitution. 4. Do not attempt to include as part of Base Bid, un- less specifically identified otherwise, any item to be treated as substitution request where potential rejection by Architect is possible due to unaccept- ability. C. Contractor ' s Representation : 1 . Request for substitution constitutes representation that Contractor : a. Has investigated proposed Product and determin- ed that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. b. Will provide same warranties or bonds for sub- stitution as for Product specified. C. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into Work, and make such other changes as may be required to make Work com- plete in all respects . d. Waives all claims for additional costs , under Contractor ' s responsibility, which may subse- quently become apparent . e. Agrees to install all material and equipment meeting Specifications at no additional cost to Owner if substitution is rejected by Architect due to unacceptability. D. Architect : 1 . Architect will review requests for substitutions with reasonable diligence and promptness , and notify Contractor , In writing, of decision to accept or reject requested substitution. 2. Any rejection of request for substitution is final and construed as directive to furnish specified product . 3. Architect shall not be subject to constant resub- mittals of rejected items or new requests for same 8632 01600-4 Material and Equipment VA D. Make periodic inspections of stored Products to assure maintenance under specified conditions , and free from damage or deterioration. 000%, E. Protection After Installation : 1 . Provide substantial coverings as necessary to pro- tect installed Products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations . 2. Remove when no longer needed. F. Spares : 1 . Collect spares during course of construction and package in protective containers as required. 2. Contact Owner' s Representative for designated stor- age location. 3. Before placing in storage, clearly label storage containers with fallowing information: a. Name of Project . b. Name of Product or Material . C. Name of Manufacturer and Model Number . d. Location where used. 1 . 05 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Contractor ' s Options : 1 . For Products specified only by reference standard, select any product: meeting that standard. 2. For Products specified by naming several products or manufacturer ' s , select any one of products or manufacturers names , which complies with speci - fications . 3. For Products specified by naming one or more Prod- ucts or manufacturers , Contractor must submit request as for substitutions for any Product or manufacturer not specifically named. 4. Notification of Unavailable Products : a. Notify Architect immediately during bidding process of unavailability of any product or manufacturer where only one product or manufac- turer is specified. b. Architect will issue addendum for acceptable alternate product or manufacturer for bid pro- cess . C. Arbitrary substitution is unacceptable. d. If Architect is not notified and item is not specifically excluded from bid or included as allowance or per unit cost , pay all costs to provide Architect generated alternate. B. Substitutions : 1 . Request Consideration : a. Construction ;Period : Requests for substitu- tions will be accepted during this phase up to 30 days before installation. b. Substitution requests due to late or out-of- schedule ordering may be subject to rejection 8632 01600-3 Material and Equipment VA 1 . Maintain one set of complete instructions at job site during installation and until completion. B. Handle, install , connect , clean, condition, and adjust products in strict accord with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements . 1 . Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer ' s instructions , consult with Architect for further instructions . 2. Do not proceed with Work without clear Instruc- tions . C. Perform Work in accord with manufacturer' s instruc- tions . D. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents . 1 . 03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Arrange deliveries of Products in accord with con- struction schedules , coordinate to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at site. 1 . Deliver Products In undamaged conditions , in manu- facturer ' s original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to ass- ure compliance with requirements of Contract Docu- ments and approved submittals, and Products are properly protected and undamaged. B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to Products or packaging. 1 . 04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store Products in accord with manufacturer ' s instruc- tions , with seals and labels intact and legible. 1 . Store products subject to damage by elements in weathertight enclosures . 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within ranges required by manufacturer ' s instructions . B. Exterior Storage : 1 . Store fabricated products above ground, on blocking or skids , prevent soiling or staining. 2. Cover products which are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings ; provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. 3. Store loose granular materials in well -drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter . C. Arrange storage in manner to provide easy access for inspection. 8632 01600-2 Material and Equipment VA SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 GENERAL A. Material and Equipment; Incorporated Into Work : 1 . Conform to applicable specifications and standards . 2. Comply with size, make, type, and quality speci - fied, or as specifically approved in writing by Architect . 3. Manufactured and Fabricated Products : a. Design, fabricate, and assemble in accord with best engineering and shop practices . b. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages , to be interchange- able. C. Two or more items of same kind to be identical , by same manufacturer . d. Products to be suitable for service conditions . e. Equipment capacities , sizes , and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to unless variations are approved in writing. 4. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or speci - fied. B. Related Sections : 1 . 01005, Summary of Work. 2. 01340, Shop Drawings , Product Data, and Samples . 3. Division 2 through 16, inclusive. C. Material and Installation : 1 . Unless otherwise specifically provided in Contract Documents , references to any equipment , material article, patented process , or installation and procedure by trade name, make or catalog number , shall be regarded as establishing standard of quality. 2. Previous statement shall not be construed as limit- ing competition, and Contractor may use any equip- ment , material , or process which complies with quality stated as part of this Contract Document . 3. Use of any equipment , material , or process not spe- cifically named shall comply with requirements of this Section for Substitutions and Product Options . 1 . 02 MANUFACTURER' S INSTRUCTIONS A. When Contract Documents require that installation of Work shall comply with manufacturer ' s printed Instruc- tions , obtain and distribute copies of such instruc- tions to parties involved in installation, including two copies to Architect . 8632 01600-1 Material and Equipment VA SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES SUBMITTAL FORM DATE: PREVIOUS SUBMISSION DATE: PROJECT NO: PROJECT: CONTRACTOR: SUPPLIER: MANUFACTURER: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION: MODEL NO: SECTION NO. AND TITLE: PRODUCT DEVIATIONS : REVISION/RESUBMITTAL IDENTIFICATION: ARCHITECT CONTRACTOR 8632 01.340 Shop Drawings , Product VA Data, and 'Samples Submittal Form Section ( 1 page) with each Submittal to include information as detailed and specified in this Sec- tion. 1 . 07 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make any corrections or changes in Submittals notated by Architect and resubmit until reviewed with no excep- tions taken. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data : 1 . Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for initial Submittal . 2. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested by Architect . C. Samples : Submit new samples as required for initial Submittal . 1 . 08 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute reproductions of Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data which carry Architect ' s stamp to: 1 . Job site file. 2. Record Documents file. 3. Other affected contractors . 4. Subcontractors . 5. Supplier or Fabricator . B. Distribute samples which carry Architect ' s stamp as directed by Architect . 1 . 09 ARCHITECT DUTIES A. Review Submittals in accord with Schedule. B. Affix stamp and initials or signature, and indicate requirements for resubmittal , or review of Submittal . C. Return Submittals to Contractor for distribution, or resubmission. D. Delays in returning Submittals does not authorize Con- tractor to start work detailed on Submittals . E. Time Extensions : 1 . Contractor may be entitled to time extensions only when necessary to maintain Schedules as detailed, if Submittals are not returned with reasonable promptness . 2. Extensions will not be authorized due to out-of-se- quence or last minute submission of Submittals necessary to perform Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. - END OF SECTION - 8632 01340-3 Shop Drawings , Product VA Data, and Samples 2. Full range of color, texture, and pattern. B. Field Samples and Mock-Ups : 1 . Erect at Project site at location acceptable to u Architect . 2. Size or Area : Refer to respective Specification Section. 3. Fabricate each sample and mockup complete and fin- ished. 4. Remove mock-ups at conclusion of Work or when acceptable to Architect . 1 . 05 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review and approve Shop Drawings , Product Data, and Samples from fabricators and installers before submis- sion to Architect . B. Determine and Verify: 1 . Field measurements . 2. Field construction criteria. 3. Catalog numbers and similar data. 4. Conformance with :specifications . C. Coordinate each Submittal with requirements of Work and of Contract Documents .. D. Notify Architect , in writing, at time of submission, of any deviations in Submittals and clearly mark any devi - ations from requirements of Contract Documents . E. Do not begin fabrication or work which requires Submit- tals until return of Submittals indicating action taken by Architect . 1 . For substitutions ;, comply with requirements of Sec- tion 01600, Material and Equipment . 2. Substitutions will be reviewed by Architect only for acceptance or rejection. F. Use only reviewed/stamped shop drawings for installa- tion and/or fabrication of items . 1 . 06 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make Submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such sequence as to cause no delay in Work or in work of any other contractor . B. Number of Submittals Required: 1 . Shop Drawings : Submit one reproducible transparen- cy and one opaque reproduction. 2. Product Data : Submit number of copies which Con- tractor requires plus one to be retained by Archi - tect . 3. Samples : Submit number stated in each Specifica- tion Section. 4. Include Submittal Form appended as part of this 8632 01340-2 Shop Drawings , Product VA Data, and Samples SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 GENERAL A. Submit Shop Drawings , Product Data, and Samples re- quired by Contract Documents allowing min. 10 work- ing days review time by Architect . B. Use only shop drawings , product data, and samples reviewed and stamped by Architect for field installa- tion of any work which is designated as requiring Submittals . C. Related Sections : 1 . 01005, Summary of Work. 2. 01600, Material and Equipment . 3. Division 2 through 16, inclusive. 1 . 02 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Present in clear and thorough manner. 1 . Identify by reference to sheet and detail , sched- ule, or room numbers shown on Contract Drawings . B. Minimum Sheet Size : 8-1/2 in. x 11 in. 1 . 03 PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation : 1 . Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent pro- ducts or models . 2. Show performance characteristics and capacities . 3. Show dimensions and clearances required. 4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls . B. Manufacturer ' s Standard Schematic Drawings and Dia- grams . 1 . Modify Drawings and Diagrams to delete information not applicable to Work. 2. Supplement standard information to provide Informa- tion specifically applicable to Work. C. Provide full range of manufacturer ' s standard colors for selection, except where custom colors are scheduled or specified. 1 . 04 SAMPLES A. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate : 1 . Functional characteristics of Products , with inte- grally related parts and attachment devices . 8632 01340-1 Shop Drawings , Product VA Data, and Samples this Project shall comply with edition date pub- lished in referenced edition of Building Code. 2. Non-Code Listing: Any reference to standards of any society, institute, association, or govern- ,1 mental agency which is not part of Building Code for this Project shall be edition in effect at time of opening of Bids , except as otherwise specific- ally stated in this Project Manual . 3. Project Manual Listing : Edition dates listed with reference standards in each Section of this Project Manual are included for reference only. C. If reference standards are revised before completion of any part of Work to which such revision would per- tain, Contractor may, if acceptable to Architect and if not in violation of Building Code, perform such Work in accordance with revised Specifications . 1 . 06 CODE ANALYSIS A. Design and construction of Project shall conform to codes , laws , regulations , and ordinances of any kind required by governmental authority or other regulatory agency having jurisdiction over this Project and not limited to specifically : 1 . Building : Massachusetts State Building Code - 1980. 2. Electrical : Massashusetts Electrical Code - 1984. 3. Fire Safety : Massachusetts State Building Code - 1984. 4. Life Safety : Massachusetts State Building Code - 1980. 5. Mechanical : BOCA Basic Mechanical Code - 1978. 6. Plumbing: Massachusetts State Plumbing and Gas Code. 7. Elevator : Massachusetts Elevator and Escalator Regulations , 105CIKR: 410-1978. 8. Barrier-Free Design : Rules and Regulations of the Architectural Barriers Board - 1982. 1 . 07 ABBREVIATIONS A. Reference to technical society, institution, associa- tion, or governmental agency made in these Specifica- tions is in form of standard acronym or abbreviation as published in "Encyclopedia of Associations", pub- lished by Gale Research Co. , available in most libra- ries . B. Use of abbreviations for technical terms in text of Specifications are restricted to most commonly used terms and comply with "U. S. Government Printing Office Style Manual " published by U. S. Government Printing Office (GPO) . PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. - END OF SECTION - 8632 01005-3 Summary of Work VA formed by subcontractors in accordance with Divi - sion 1 , General Requirements . B. Installation Sequencing: 1 . Examine materials and installations performed by others before starting next stage or adjacent Work. 2. Notify Architect immediately of unsatisfactory con- ditions which hinder or restrict correct installa- tion of next stage or adjacent Work. 3. Start of next stage or adjacent Work will be con- strued as acceptance of previous or adjacent Work whether or not conditions are satisfactory. 4. Any Work requiring; subsequent removal or replace- ment due to unsatisfactory or defective Work shall not be at expense of Owner . C. Contract Document Review: 1 . Before execution of Work, Contractor shall review all Drawings and Specifications and immediately report all errors , discrepancies , and/or omissions discovered to Architect, in writing, with one set of Contract Documents marked in red pencil , clearly indicating discrepancies . 2. Design Intent : a. Purpose of Drawings is to graphically depict characteristics and extent of Project . b. Specifications included as part of Project Manual , are provided to state material type, function, and source of materials . C. Reference standards are used in Specifications ` to describe, by inference, specific materials and may include recommended methods of install - ation or application based on industry stand- ards . 1 . 04 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Provide field engineering services ; establish grades , lines , and levels , by use of recognized engineering survey practices . B. Control datum for survey is that established by Owner- provided survey, shown on Drawings . C. Locate and protect control and reference points . 1 . 05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Compliance : Work for this Project shall conform to standards published by recognized professional and industry organizations when referenced in this Project Manual . B. Edition Date of Reference Standards : 1 . Code Listing: Any reference to standards of any society, institute, association, or governmental agency which is part of building code in effect for 8632 01005-2 Summary of Work VA SECTION 01005 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Documents : Work of Project is controlled by AIA Docu- ment A201 , General Conditions of the Contract , Project Manual , and Drawings detailed in List of Drawings dated June 18, 1987. 1 . 02 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work of various Sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installa- tion of construction elements , with provisions for accommodating items installed later . B. Verify characteristics of elements of interrelated operating equipment are compatible ; coordinate Work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment . C. Mechanical /Electrical : 1 . Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical Work indicated diagrama- tically on Drawings . 2. Follow routing shown for pipes , ducts , and condu- its , as closely as practicable. 3. Make runs parallel with lines of building. 4. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibil- ity for other installations , maintenance, and re- pairs . 5. In finished areas , except as otherwise shown, con- ceal pipes , ducts , and wiring in construction. 6. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements . D. Execute cutting and patching to integrate elements of Work, uncover ill -timed, defective, and non-conforming Work, provide openings for penetrations of existing surfaces , and provide samples for testing. E. Seal penetrations through floors , walls , and ceilings . 1 . 03 COORDINATION RESPONSIBILITIES A. Subcontractor Coordination: 1 . Insure subcontractors are knowledgeable of all Sections of Division 1 , General Requirements and are responsible for conforming to applicable re- ,,, quirements and instructions stated therein. 2. Assume responsibility for administering Work per- 8632 01005-1 Summary of Work VA DIVISION 1 13ENERAL REQUIREMENTS . 3 Products and Completed Operations . . 4 Personal Injury Liability with Employment Ex- clusion deleted. . 5 Contractual , including specified provision for Contractor ' s obligations under Paragraph 4. 18. . 6 Owner , non-owned, and hired motor vehicles . . 7 Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Operations . . 8 Umbrella Excess Liability. 11 . 1 . 2. 1 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11 . 1 . 1 shall be written for the amounts determined in bid negotiations with the Owner and executed prior to final execution of the Contract . Lim- its shall conform to applicable state require- ments as required and requirements of the Owner. 11 . 1 . 4. 1 The Contractor shall furnish one copy each of Certificates of Insurance herein required for each copy of the Agreement which shall specifi - cally set forth evidence of all coverage re- quired by Subparagraphs 11 . 1 . 1 , 11 . 1 . 2, and 11 . 1 . 3. The form of the Certification shall be AIA Document G705. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner copies of any endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits . B. 11 . 3 PROPERTY INSURANCE ( In Subparagraph 11 . 3. 6 make following change of wording) : 11 . 3. 6 In the first sentence after the words " . . . . (2) the Architect " , insert the words "the Archi - tect ' s consultants , ". After the words ". . . sep- arate contractors , if any, and", insert the words "any of". "The policies shall be endorsed to Include such waivers of subrogation". 1 . 14 ARTICLE 12 : CHANGES IN THE WORK A. There are no changes to this Article. 1 . 15 ARTICLE 13: UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK A. There are no changes to this Article. 1 . 16 ARTICLE 14 : TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT A. 14. 2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER ( In Subparagraph 14. 2. 1 make the following change of wording) : 14. 2. 1 In the first sentence, delete the words " is ad- judged a bankrupt , or if he makes a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors , or if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, or if he". - END OF DOCUMENT - 8632 00800-4 Supplementary Conditions VA the Contract Documents reading as referring to that Section of the Specifications ) . C. 4. 13 USE OF SITE (Delete this Paragraph and refer to Specification Section 01005, Summary of Work, for provisions on this subject , with all refer- ences to Paragraph 4. 13 elsewhere in the Con- tract Documents reading as referring to that Section of the Specifications . ) 1 . 07 ARTICLE 5 : SUBCONTRACTORS A. There are no changes to this Article. 1 . 08 ARTICLE 6 : WORK BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTOR A. There are no changes to this Article. 1 . 09 ARTICLE 7 : MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. 7. 1 GOVERNING LAW (Add Subparagraph 7. 1 . 2 to follow Subparagraph 7. 1 . 1 ) : 7. 1 . 2 For specific requirements on governing law, the Contract shall be constructed to codes and standards listed in Specification Section 01005, Summary of Work. 1 . 10 ARTICLE 8 : TIME A. There are no changes to this Article. 1 . 11 ARTICLE 9 : PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION A. There are no changes to this Article. 1 . 12 ARTICLE 10 : PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. There are no changes to this Article. 1 . 13 ARTICLE 11 : INSURANCE A. 11 . 1 CONTRACTOR' S LIABILITY INSURANCE ( In Subpara- graph 11 . 1 . 1 make following change of wording, add clause 11 . 1 . 1 . 7 to follow clause 11 . 1 . 1 . 6, add clause 11 . 1 . 2. 1 to Subparagraph 11 . 1 . 2, and add clause 11 . 1 . 4. 1 to Subparagraph 11 . 1 . 4) : 11 . 1 . 1 In the first line following the word "main- tain", insert the words " in a company or com- panies licensed to do business in the state in which the Project is located. 11 . 1 . 1 . 7 Liability Insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive basis including : . 1 Premises Operations ( including X-C/U as appli - cable) . . 2 Independent Contractors ' Protective. 8632 00800-3 Supplementary Conditions VA be supplied by inference in same manner as they are when a "note" occurs on the Drawings . . 2 The Contractor shall provide all items , arti - cles , materials , operations , or methods listed, mentioned, or scheduled either on the Drawings or specified herein, or both, including all labor , materials , equipment, and incidentals necessary and required for their completion. . 3 Whenever the words "approved", "satisfactory" , "directed" , "submitted", " inspected", or simi - lar words or phrases are used, it shall be assumed that the words "Architect or Archi - tect ' s Representative" follows the verb as the object of the claim, such as "approved by the Architect or Architect ' s Representative". . 4 All references to standard specifications or manufacturer' s installation directions shall mean the latest thereof . B. 1 . 2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION, AND INTENT (Add Subpar- agraph 1 . 2. 5 and 1 . 2. 6 to follow Subparagraph 1 . 2. 4 ) : 1 . 2. 5 In general , the Drawings indicate dimensions , and details of construction ; the Specifications describe qualities of materials and methods of installation. 1 . 2. 6 All Work described in the Specifications or shown on the Drawings and all Work dependent upon or necessary to the complete finish of the Work so described or shown shall be executed in the prescribed manner and shall be of the mat- erials best suited to the purpose where such work or materials are not specifically men- tioned. 1 . 04 ARTICLE 2: ARCHITECT A. There are no changes 'to this Article. 1 . 05 ARTICLE 3 : OWNER A. There are no changes to this Article. 1 . 06 ARTICLE 4 : CONTRACTOR A. 4. 4 LABOR AND MATERIALS (Delete this Paragraph and refer to Specification Section 01005, Summary of Work, for provisions on this subject , with all references to Paragraph 4. 4 elsewhere in the Contract Documents referring to that Sec- tion of the Specifications ) . B. 4. 12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES (De- lete this Paragraph and refer to Specification Section 01340, Shop Drawings , Product Data, and AO*, Samples , for provisions on this subject , with all references to Paragraph 4. 12 elsewhere in 6632 00800-2 Supplementary Conditions VA DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. Standard Form: The General Conditions of the Contract forming a part of the Contract Documents and of these Specifications , consists of AIA Document A201 , 1976 Edition, copy of which is bound herein. 1 . When any Article, Section, or Subsection in the General Conditions is supplemented as hereinafter provided, the provisions of such Article, Section, or Subsection shall remain in effect and the supplemental provisions shall be considered added hereto. 2. When any Article, Section, or Subsection in the General Conditions is amended, deleted, or super- seded as hereinafter provided, the provisions of such Article, Section, or Subsection not so amen- ded, deleted, or superseded shall remain in effect . B. Modifications and Additions : Where Contract Documents refer to General Conditions , such reference shall be interpreted to include Supplementary Conditions . 1 . 02 REFERENCE TO DIVISION 1 A. Where provisions of General Requirements relate to Project administrative or work-related requirements of the Contract , those paragraphs are deleted from General Conditions , and are specified in Division 1 , General Requirements of the Specifications . 1 . 03 ARTICLE 1 : CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. 1 . 1 DEFINITIONS (Add Subparagraphs 1 . 1 . 5 and 1 . 1 . 6 to follow Subparagraph 1 . 1 . 4 ) : 1 . 1 . 5 Miscellaneous Definitions : . 1 The term "product" as used in these Supplemen- tary Conditions includes materials, systems , and equipment . . 2 The term "Project Manual " as used in these Supplementary Conditions include Bidding Re- quirements , Agreements , General Conditions , Detail Drawings , and Specifications . 1 . 1 . 6 Specification Explanation: . 1 These Specifications are of the abbreviated, simplified, or streamlined type and include incomplete sentences . Omissions of words such as "The Contractor shall ", " in conformity with", "shall be" , "as noted on the Drawings ", "according to the plans ", "a", "an", and "all " are intentional . Omitted words or phrases shall 8632 00800-1 Supplementary Conditions VA 13.2.5 If the Contractor does not proceed with the cor- having jurisdiction, or as a result of an act of government, rection of such defective or non-conforming Work within such as a declaration of a national emergency making a reasonable time fixed by written notice from the Archi- materials unavailable, through no act or fault of the tect, the Owner may remove it and may store the mate- Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employ- rials or equipment at the expense of the Contractor. If ees or any other persons performing any of the Work the Contractor does not pay the cost of such removal under a contract with the Contractor, or if the Work and storage within ten days thereafter, the Owner may should be stopped for a period of thirty days by the upon ten additional days' written notice sell such Work Contractor because the Architect has not issued a Certifi- at auction or at private sale and shall account for the net cate for Payment as provided in Paragraph 9.7 or because proceeds thereof, after deducting all the costs that should the Owner has not made payment thereon as provided in have been borne by the Contractor, including compensa- Paragraph 9.7, then the Contractor may, upon seven addi- tion for the Architect's additional services made necessary tional days' written notice to the Owner and the Archi- thereby. If such proceeds of sale do not cover all costs tect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner which the L. ntrac.ar should have borne, the difference payment for all Work executed and for any proven loss shall be charged to the Contractor and an appropriate sustained upon any materials, equipment, tools, construc- Change Order shall be issued. If the payments then or tion equipment and machinery, including reasonable thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover profit and damages. such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER the Owner. 13.2.6 The Contractor shall bear the cost of making good 14.2.1 If the Contractor is adjudged a bankrupt, or if he all work of the Owner or separate contractors destroyed makes a general assignment for the benefit of his credi- or damaged by such correction or removal. tors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of his in- 13.2.7 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 13.2 shall be solvency, or if he persistently or repeatedly refuses or construed to establish a period of limitation with respect fails, except in cases for which extension of time is pro- to any other obligation which the Contractor might have vided, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or under the Contract Documents, including Paragraph 4.5 proper materials, or if he fails to make prompt payment hereof. The establishment of the time period of one year to Subcontractors or for materials or labor, or persistently after the Date of Substantial Completion or such longer disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the of any public authority having jurisdiction, or otherwise terms of any warranty required by the Contract Docu- is guilty of a substantial violation of a provision of the ments relates only to the specific obligation of the Con- Contract Documents, then the Owner, upon certification tractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such the time within which his obligation to comply with the action, may, without prejudice to any right or remedy and Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor after giving the Contractor and his surety, if any, seven to the time within which proceedings may be com- days' written notice, terminate the employment of the menced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect Contractor and take possession of the site and of all mate- to his obligations other than specifically to correct the rials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and Work. machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and may 13.3 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE OR NON-CONFORMING finish the Work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such case the Contractor shall not be en- WORK titled to receive any further payment until the Work is 13.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept defective or non- finished. conforming Work, he may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case a Change Order 14.2.2 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds will be issued to reflect a reduction in the Contract Sum the costs of finishing the Work, including compensation where appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall for the Architect's additional services made necessary be effected whether or not final payment has been made. thereby, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor ARTICLE 14 shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT' paid to the Contractor or to the Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, 14,1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR in the manner provided in Paragraph 9.4, and this obliga- 14.1.1 If the Work is stopped for a period of thirty days tion for payment shall survive the termination of the under an order of any court or other public authority Contract. `I AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - THIRTEENTH EDITION- AUGUST 1976 AIAS - © 1976 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1976 19 or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract The Contractor shall carry out such written orders Sum will be the amount of the actual net cost as con- promptly. firmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits ARTICLE 13 covering related Work or substitutions are involved in any one change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of the net increase, if any, UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK with respect to that change. 13,1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 12.1.5 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents 13.1.1 If any portion of the Work should be covered con- or subsequently agreed upon, and if the quantities orig- trary to the request of the Architect or to requirements inally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, Order that application of the agreed unit prices to the if required in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial in- his observation and shall be replaced at the Contractor's equity to the Owner or the Contractor, the applicable expense. unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. 12.2 CONCEALED CONDITIONS 13.1.2 If any other portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to ob- 12.2.1 Should concealed conditions encountered in the serve prior to being covered, the Architect may request performance of the Work below the surface of the ground to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Con- or should concealed or unknown conditions in an existing tractor. If such Work be found in accordance with the structure be at variance with the conditions indicated by Contract Documents, the cost of uncovering and replace- the Contract Documents, or should unknown physical ment shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to conditions below the surface of the ground or should the Owner. If such Work be found not in accordance with concealed or unknown conditions in an existing structure the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such of an unusual nature, differing materially from those ord'i- costs unless it be found that this condition was caused narily encountered and generally recognized as inherent by the Owner or a separate contractor as provided in in work of the character provided for in this Contract, be Article 6, in which event the Owner shall be responsible encountered, the Contract Sum shall be equitably ad- for the payment of such costs. justed by Change Order upon claim by either party made within twenty days after the first observance of the 13.2 CORRECTION OF WORK ate'" conditions. 13.2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct all Work 12.3 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST rejected by the Architect as defective or as failing to con- form to the Contract Documents whether observed be- 12.3.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a claim for an fore or after Substantial Completion and whether or not increase in the Contract Sum, he shall give the Architect fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall written notice thereof within twenty days after the occur- bear all costs of correcting such rejected Work, including rence of the event giving rise to such claim. This notice compensation for the Architect's additional services made shall be given by the Contractor before proceeding to necessary thereby. execute the Work, except in an emergency endangering life or property in which case the Contractor shall pro- 13.2.2 If, within one year after the Date of Substantial teed in accordance with Paragraph 10.3. No such claim Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or shall be valid unless so made. If the Owner and the Con- within one year after acceptance by the Owner of desig- tractor cannot agree on the amount of the adjustment in nated equipment or within such longer period of time as the Contract Sum, it shall be determined by the Architect. may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any appli- Any change in the Contract Sum resulting from such cable special warranty required by the Contract Docu- claim shall be authorized by Change Order. ments, any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor 12.3.2 If the Contractor claims that additional cost is in- shall correct it promptly after receipt of a written notice volved because of, but not limited to, (1) any written from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously interpretation pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.8, (2) any given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condi- order by the Owner to stop the Work pursuant to Para- tion. This obligation shall survive termination of the graph 3.3 where the Contractor was not at fault, (3) any Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly written order for a minor change in the Work issued pur- after discovery of the condition. suant to Paragraph 12.4, or (4) failure of payment by the Owner pursuant to Paragraph 9.7, the Contractor shall 13.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site all por- make such claim as provided in Subparagraph 12.3.1. tions of the Work which are defective or non-conforming and which have not been corrected under Subparagraphs 12,4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 4.5.1, 13.2.1 and 13.2.2, unless removal is waived by the 12.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor Owner. changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time and 13.2.4 If the Contractor fails to correct defective or non- * not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Docu- conforming Work as provided in Subparagraphs 4.5.1, ments. Such changes shall be effected by written order, 13.2.1 and 13.2.2, the Owner may correct it in accordance and shall be binding on the Owner and the Contractor. with Paragraph 3.4. AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - THIRTEENTH EDITION- AUGUST 1976 18 A201-1976 AIAO - C 1976 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 11.3.6 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against ARTICLE 12 (1) each other and the Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, agents and employees each of the other, and (2) the CHANGES IN THE WORK Architect and separate contractors, if any, and their sub- contractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, 12.1 CHANGE ORDERS for damages caused by fire or other perils to the! extent 12.1.1 A Change Order is a written order to the Contrac- covered by insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph for signed by the Owner and the Architect, issued after 11.3 or any other property insurance applicable to the W execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work, except such rights as they may have to the pro- ceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as trustee. Work or an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Con- The foregoing waiver afforded the Architect, his agents tract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by Change Order. A Change Order and employees shall not extend to the liability imposed signed by the Contractor indicates his agreement there- by Subparagraph 4.18.3. The Owner or the Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, separate con- with, including the adjustment in the Contract Sum or tractors, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors by ap- propriate agreements, written where legally required for 12.1.2 The Owner,without invalidating the Contract, may validity, similar waivers each in favor of all other parties order changes in the Work within the general scope of enumerated in this Subparagraph 11.3.6. the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and the Contract Time being 11.3.7 If required in writing by any party in interest, the adjusted accordingly. All such changes in the Work shall Owner as trustee shall, upon the occurrence of an insured be authorized by Change Order, and shall be performed loss, give bond for the proper performance of his duties. under the applicable conditions of the Contract Docu- He shall deposit in a separate account any money so re- ments. ceived, and he shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in ac- 12.1.3 The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from a cordance with an award by arbitration in which case the change in the Work shall be determined in one or more procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 7,9. If after of the following ways: such loss no other special agreement is made, replace- .1 by mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly ment of damaged work shall be covered by an appropri- itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating ate Change Order, data to permit evaluation; .2 by unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or 11.3.8 The Owner as trustee shall have power to adjust subsequently agreed upon; and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the ,3 by cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon parties in interest shall object in writing within five days by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or after the occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this percentage fee; or power, and if such objection be made, arbitrators :shall be ,4 by the method provided in Subparagraph 12.1.4. chosen as provided in Paragraph 7.9.The Owner as trustee shall, in that case, make settlement with the insurers in 12,1,4 If none of the methods set forth in Clauses accordance with the directions of such arbitrators. If dis- 12,1.3.1, 12.1.3.2 or 12.1.3.3 is agreed upon, the Contrac- tribution of the insurance proceeds by arbitration is re- tor, provided he receives a written order signed by the quired, the arbitrators will direct such distribution. Owner, shall promptly proceed with the Work involved. The cost of such Work shall then be determined by the 11.3.9 If the Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a Architect on the basis of the reasonable expenditures and portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Com- savings of those performing the Work attributable to the pletion thereof, such occupancy or use shall not com- change, including, in the case of an increase in the Con- mence prior to a time mutually agreed to by the Owner tract Sum,a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit. and Contractor and to which the insurance company or In such case, and also under Clauses 12.1.3.3 and 12.1.3.4 companies providing the property insurance have con- above, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such sented by endorsement to the policy or policies. 'This in- form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized account- surance shall not be cancelled or lapsed on account of ing together with appropriate supporting data for inclu- such partial occupancy or use.Consent of the Contractor sion in a Change Order. Unless otherwise provided in and of the insurance company or companies to such the Contract Documents, cost shall be limited to the fol- occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. lowing: cost of materials, including sales tax and cost of delivery; cost of labor, including social security, old age 11,4 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE and unemployment insurance, and fringe benefits re- 11.4.1 The Owner, at his option, may purchase and main- quired by agreement or custom; workers' or workmen's tain such insurance as will insure him against loss of use compensation insurance; bond premiums; rental value of of his property due to fire or other hazards, however equipment and machinery; and the additional costs of caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the supervision and field office personnel directly attributable Contractor for loss of use of his property, including con- to the change. Pending final determination of cost to the sequential losses due to fire or other hazards however Owner, payments on account shall be made on the Archi- caused, to the extent covered by insurance under this tect's Certificate for Payment. The amount of credit to be Paragraph 11.4. allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for any deletion AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION- THIRTEENTH EDITION- AUGUST 1976 AIAS - 0 1976 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1976 17 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible mere- coverages afforded under the policies will not be can- ber of his organization at the site whose duty shall be the celled until at least thirty days' prior written notice has prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contrac- been given to the Owner. tor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE Contractor in writing to the Owner and the Architect. 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for p purchasing 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part and maintaining his own liability insurance and, at his of the Work to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as 10.3 EMERGENCIES will protect him against claims which may arise from 10.3.1 In any emergency affecting the safety of persons operations under the Contract. or property, the Contractor shall act, at his discretion, to 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Any additional 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall pur- compensation or extension of time claimed by the Con- chase and maintain property insurance upon the entire tractor on account of emergency work shall be deter- Work at the site to the full insurable value thereof. This mined as provided in Article 12 for Changes in the Work. insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, the ARTICLE 11 Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work and shall insure against the perils of fire and ex- INSURANCE tended coverage and shall include "all risk" insurance for physical loss or damage including, without duplication of 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief. If the Owner does not intend to purchase such insurance for 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain such the full insurable value of the entire Work, he shall in- insurance as will protect him from claims set forth below form the Contractor in writing prior to commencement which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance operations under the Contract, whether such operations which will protect the interests of himself, his Subcontrac- be by himself or by any Subcontractor or by anyone di- tors and the Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by ap- rectly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by any- propriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged one for whose acts any of them may be liable: to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by failure of .1 claims under workers'or workmen's compensation, the Owner to purchase or maintain such insurance and to disability benefit and other similar employee bene- so notify the Contractor, then the Owner shall bear all i fit acts; reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. If not cov- .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, OC_ ered under the all risk insurance or otherwise provided cupational sickness or disease, or death of his in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall effect employees; and maintain similar property insurance on portions of .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sick- the Work stored off the site or in transit when such por- ness or disease, or death of any person other than lions of the Work are to be included in an Application for Payment under Subparagraph 9.3.2. his employees; .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal in- 11.3.2 The Owner shall purchase and maintain such boiler jury liability coverage which are sustained (1) by and machinery insurance as may be required by the Con- any person as a result of an offense directly or in- tract Documents or by law. This insurance shall include directly related to the employment of such person the interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontrac- by the Contractor, or (2) by any other person; tors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work. .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, 11.3.3 Any loss insured under Subparagraph 11.3.1 is to because of injury to or destruction of tangible be adjusted with the Owner and made payable to the property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; Owner as trustee for the insureds, as their interests may and appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury or mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph 11.3.8. The Con- death of any person or property damage arising tractor shall pay each Subcontractor a just share of any out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any insurance moneys received by the Contractor, and by ap- motor vehicle. propriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, shall require each Subcontractor to make pay- 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall ments to his Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. be written for not less than any limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents, or required by law, which- 11.3.4 The Owner shall file a copy of all policies with the ever is greater. Contractor before an exposure to loss may occur. 11.1.3 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 11.3.5 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance shall include contractual liability insurance applicable to for risks other than those described in Subparagraphs the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 4.18. 113.1 and 11.3.2 or other special hazards be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if pos- 11.1.4 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner sible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change the Work. These Certificates shall contain a provision that Order. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 16 A201-1976 AIA® • © 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 + 't promptly make such inspection and, when he finds the 9.9.5 The acceptance of final payment shall constitute a Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the waiver of all claims by the Contractor except those previ- Contract fully performed, he will promptly issue a final ously made in writing and identified by the Contractor Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of his as unsettled at the time of the final Application for Pay- knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of ment. his observations and inspections, the Work has been com- ARTICLE 10 pleted in accordance with the terms and conditions of the PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Contract Documents and that the entire balance Mound to be due the Contractor, and noted in said final Certificate, 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that the 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, conditions precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and final payment as set forth in Subparagraph 9.9.2 have been programs in connection with the Work. fulfilled. 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROr ERi Y 9.9.2 Neither the final payment nor the remaining re- 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take all reasonable precau- tained percentage shall become due until the Contractor tions for the safety of, and shall provide all reasonable submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that all payrolls, protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness ,1 all employees on the Work and all other persons connected with the Work for which the Owner or his who may be affected thereby; property might in any way be responsible, have been paid ,2 all the Work and all materials and equipment to or otherwise satisfied, (2) consent of surety, if any, to final be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or payment and (3), if required by the Owner, other data off the site, under the care, custody or control of establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obliga- the Contractor or any of hip Subcontractors or tions, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens aris- Sub-subcontractors; and ing out of the Contract, to the extent and in .such form .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, in- as may be designated by the Owner. If any Subcontractor cluding trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the roadways, structures and utilitic not designated for Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to removal, relocation or replacement in the course the Owner to indemnify him against any such lien. If of construction. any such lien remains unsatisfied after all payrnents are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all mon- 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give alp notices and comply eys that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' lawful orders of any public authirity bearing on the safety fees. of persons or property or their protection from damage, 9.9.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final injury or loss. completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault 10,2,3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as re- of the Contractor or by the issuance of Change Orders quired by existing conditions and progress of the Work, affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, in- the Owner shall, upon application by the Contactor and cluding posting danger signs and other warnings against certification by the Architect, and without terminating hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that owners and users of adjacent utilities. portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or cor- rected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Contract hazardous materials or equipment is necessary for the Documents,and if bonds have been furnished as provided execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise the in Paragraph 7.5, the written consent of the surety to the utmost care and shall carry on such activities under the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work supervision of properly qualified personnel. fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy all damage Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such or loss (other than damage or loss insured under Para- payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms graph 11.3) to any property referred to in Clauses 10.2.1.2 and conditions governing final payment, except that it and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, shall not constitute a waiver of claims. any Subcontractor, any Sub-subcontractor, or anyone di- 9.9.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a rectly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by any- waiver of all claims by the Owner except those arising one for whose acts any of them may be liable and for from: which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.1.2 ,1 unsettled liens, and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to the .2 faulty or defective Work appearing after Substantial acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone Completion, directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by .3 failure of the Work to comply with the require- anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and ments of the Contract Documents, or not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contrac- .4 terms of any special warranties required by the tor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in Contract Documents. addition to his obligations under Paragraph 4.18. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 AIA* • @ 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1976 15 fir► sequences or procedures, or that he has made any exam-• .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be com- ination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contrac'- pleted for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, for has used the moneys previously paid on account of .5 damage to the Owner oI another contractor, the Contract Sum. .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be com- pleted within the Contract Time, or 9,5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accord- 9.5.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Pay- ance with the Contract Documents. ment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and g 6.2 When the above grounds in Subparagraph 9.6.1 are within the time provided in the Contract Documents. removed, payment shall be made for amounts withheld 9.5.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcon- because of them. tractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's Work, the amount to which said Subcon- ay If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for P tractor is entitled, reflecting the percentage actually re- Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven tained, if any, from payments to the Contractor on ac- days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Pay- count of such Subcontractor's Work. The Contractor shall, ment,or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within by an appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, re- seven days after the date established in the Contract quire each Subcontractor to make payments to his Sub- Documents any amount certified by the Architect or subcontractors in similar manner. awarded by arbitration, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and 9.5.3 The Architect may, on request and at his discretion, the Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount furnish to any Subcontractor, if practicable, information owing has been received. The Contract Sum shall be in- regarding the percentages of completion or the amounts creased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable applied for by the Contractor and the action taken there- costs of shut-down, delay and start-up, which shall be ef- on by the Architect on account of Work done by such fected by appropriate Change Order in accordance with Subcontractor. Paragraph 12.3. 9.5.4 Neither the Owner nor the Architect shall have any 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION obligation to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys 9.8.1 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or to any Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required a designated portion thereof which is acceptable to the by law. Owner, is substantially complete as defined in Subpara- graph 8.1.3, the Contractor shall prepare for submission 9.5.5 No Certificate for a progress payment, nor any to the Architect a list of items to be completed or cor- progress payment, nor any partial or entire use or occu- rected. The failure to include any items on such list does pancy of the Project by the Owner, shall constitute an not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete acceptance of any Work not in accordance with the Con- all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. tract Documents. When the Architect on the basis of an inspection deter- mines that the Work or designated portion thereof is sub- 9,6 PAYMENTS WITHHELD stantially complete, he will then prepare a Certificate of 9.6.1 The Architect may decline to certify payment and Substantial Completion which shall establish the Date of may withhold his Certificate in whole or in part, to the Substantial Completion, shall state the responsibilities of extent necessary reasonably to protect the Owner, if in the Owner and the Contractor for security, maintenance, his opinion he is unable to make representations to the heat, utilities, damage to the Work, and insurance, and Owner as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.2. If the Architect shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall com- is unable to make representations to the Owner as pro- plete the items listed therein. Warranties required by the vided in Subparagraph 9.4.2 and to certify payment in the Contract Documents shall commence on the Date of Sub- amount of the Application, he will notify the Contractor stantial Completion of the Work or designated portion as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1. If the Contractor and thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of the Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Substantial Completion. The Certificate of Substantial Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and the for the amount for which he is able to make such rep- Contractor for their written acceptance of the responsi- resentations to the Owner.The Architect may also decline bilities assigned to them in such Certificate. to certify payment or, because of subsequently discov- ered evidence or subsequent observations, he may nullify 9.8.2 Upon thereof and upon f application b the Con- the whole or any part of any Certificate for Payment tractor and certification by the Architect, the Owner shall Con- previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in make payment, reflecting adjustment in retsina a if an his opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of: P Y g 1 g y, .1 defective work not remedied, for such Work or portion thereof, as provided in the Con- .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indi- tract Documents. cating probable filing of such claims, 9.9 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT '* .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments prop- 9.9.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is erly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon re- equipment, ceipt of a final Application for Payment,the Architect will AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION -THIRTEENTH EDITION- AUGUST 1976 14 A201-1976 AIAe - C 1976 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 8.2.2 The Contractor shall begin the Work on the date of by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to pay- commencement as defined in Subparagraph 8.1.2. He ment as t`ie Owner or the Architect may require, and re- shall carry the Work forward expeditiously with adequate flecting retainage, if any, as provided elsewhere in the forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within Contract Documents. the Contract Time. 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME ments, payments will be made on account of materials or 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the prog- equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered ress of the Work by any act or neglect of the Owner or and suitably stored at the site and, if approved in ad- the Architect, or by any employee of either, or by any vance by the Owner, payments may similarly be made separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by for materials or equipment suitably stored at some other changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, location agreed upon in writing. Payments for materials unusual delay in transportation, adverse weather condi- or equipment stored on or off the site shall be con- tions not reasonably anticipatable, unavoidable casualties, ditione�l upon submission by the Contractor of hills of or any causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by de- sale or such other procedures satisfactory to the Owner lay authorized by the Owner pending arbitration, or by to establish the Owner's title to such materials or equip- any other cause which the Architect determines may ment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, including justify the delay, then the Contract Time shall be ex- applicable insurance and transportation to the site for tended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the those materials and equipment stored off the site. Architect may determine. 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work, 8.3.2 Any claim for extension of time shall be made in materials and equipment covered by an Application for writing to the Architect not more than twenty days after Payment will pass to the Owner either by incorporation in the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be the cons!,uction or upon the receipt of payment by the waived. In the case of a continuing delay only one claim Contractor, whichever occurs first, free and clear of all is necessary. The Contractor shall provide an estimate of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances, herein- the probable effect of such delay on the progress of the after referred to in this Article 9 as "liens"; and that no Work. Work, materials or equipment covered by an Application 8.3.3 If no agreement is made stating the dates upon for Payment will have been acquired by the Contractor, or by any other person performing Work at the site or which interpretations n provided in Subparagraph a al- furnishin- materials and equipment for the Project, sub- .. shall be furnished, then no claim for delay shall Ile al- ject to an agreement under which an interest therein or (Owed on account Of failure to furnish such interprets- an encumbrance thereon is retained by the seller or other- tions until fifteen days after written request is made for wise imposed by the Contractor or such other person. them, and not then unless such claim is reasonable. 8.3.4 This Paragraph 8.3 does not exclude the recovery 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT of damages for delay by either party under other provi- 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after the re- sions of the Contract Documents. ceipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue a Certificate for Payment to the Owner, with a ARTICLE 9 copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor in PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION writing his reasons for withholding a Certificate as pro- vided in Subparagraph 9.6.1. 9,1 CONTRACT SUM 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will con- 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Owner-Contractor stitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, Agreement and, including authorized adjustments thereto, based on his observations at the site as provided in Sub- is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contrac- paragraph 2.2.3 and the data comprising the Application for for the performance of the Work under the Contract for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point Documents. indicated; that, to the best of his knowledge, information 9,2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Con- the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the tractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values Work for conformance with the Contract Documents allocated to the various portions of the Work, prepared in upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subse- such form and supported by such data to substantiate its quent tests required by or performed under the Contract accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, un- Documents, to minor deviations from the Contract Docu- less objected to by the Architect, shall be used only as a ments correctable prior to completion, and to any specific basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment. qualifications stated in his Certificate); and that the Con- tractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. 9,3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT However, by issuing a Certificate for Payment, the Archi- 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date for each progress tect shall not thereby be deemed to represent that he has rook payment established in the Owner-Contractor Agreement, made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized check the quality or quantity of the Work or that he has Application for Payment, notarized if required, supported reviewed the construction means, methods, techniques, AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 AIAS • © 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, NAV, WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1976 13 7.7 TESTS complete required if relief is to be accorded in the arbi- q P 7.7.1 If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, tration. No person other than the Owner or Contractor regulations or orders of any public authority having juris- shall be included as an original third party or additional diction require any portion of the Work to be inspected, third party to an arbitration whose interest or responsi- tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Architect bilty is insubstantial. Any consent to arbitration involving timely notice of its readiness so the Architect may observe an additional person or persons shall not constitute con- such inspection, testing or approval. The Contractor shall sent to arbitration of any dispute not described therein or bear all costs of such inspections, tests or approvals con- with any person not named or described therein. The ducted by public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, foregoing agreement to arbitrate and any other agreement the Owner shall bear all costs of other inspections, tests to arbitrate with an additional person or persons duly or approvals. consented to by the parties to the Owner-Contractor Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under the 7.7.2 If the Architect determines that any Work requires prevailing arbitration law. The award rendered by the special inspection, testing, or approval which Subpara- arbitrators shall be final, and judgment m-y be entered graph 7.7.1 does not include, he will, upon written au- upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court thorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to having jurisdiction thereof. order such special inspection, testing or approval, and the Contractor shall give notice as provided in Subparagraph 7.9.2 Notice of the demand for arbitration shall be filed 7.7.1. If such special inspection or testing reveals a failure in writing with the other party to the Owner-Contractor of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Con- Agreement and with the American Arbitration Associa- tract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs there- tion, and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. The of, including compensation for the Architect's additional demand for arbitration shall be made within the time services made necessary by such failure; otherwise the limits specified in Subparagraph 2.2.12 where applicable, Owner shall bear such costs, and an appropriate Change ar.J in all other cases within a reasonable time after the Order shall be issued. claim, dispute or other matter in question has arisen, and in ro event shall it be made after the date when institu- 7.7.3 Required certificates of inspection, testing or ap- tion of legal or equitable proceedings based on such proval shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly clai n, dispute or other matter in question would be delivered by him to the Architect. barred by the applicable statute of limitations. 7.7.4 If the Architect is to observe the inspections, tests 7,9,3 Unless otherwise agreed in writing, the Contractor or approvals required by the Contract Documents, he will shall carry on the Work and maintain its progress during do so promptly and, where practicable, at the source of any arbitration proceedings, and the Owner shall con- supply. tinue to make payments to the Contractor in accordance 7.8 INTEREST with the Contract Documents. 7.8.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract ARTICLE 8 Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing TIME or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing at 8.1 DEFINITIONS the place of the Project. 7.9 ARBITRATION 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Contract Time is the period of time allotted in the Contract Documents for 7.9.1 All claims, disputes and other matters in question Substantial Completion of the Work as defined in Sub- between the Contractor and the Owner arising out of, or paragraph 8.1.3, including authorized adjustments thereto. relating to, the Contract Documents or the breach there- of, except as provided in Subparagraph 2.2.11 with re- 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date spect to the Architect's decisions on matters relating to established in a notice to proceed. If there is no notice to artistic effect, and except for claims which have been proceed, it shall be the date of the Owner-Contractor waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as Agreement or such other date as may be established provided by Subparagraphs 9.9.4 and 9.9.5, shall be de- therein. cided by arbitration in accordance with the Construction 8,1.3 The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration designated portion thereof is the Date certified by the Association then obtaining unless the parties mutually Architect when construction is sufficiently complete, in agree otherwise. No arbitration arising out of or relating accordance with the Contract Documents, so the Owner to the Contract Documents shall include, by consolida- can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion tion, joinder or in any other manner, the Architect, his thereof for the use for which it is intended. employees or consultants except by written consent con- taining a specific reference to the Owner-Contractor 8.1.4 The term day as used in the Contract Documents Agreement and signed by the Architect, the Owner, the shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically Contractor and any other person sought to be joined. No designated. arbitration shall include by consolidation, joinder or in any other manner, parties other than the Owner, the 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION Contractor and any other persons substantially involved 8.2.1 All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are in a common question of fact or law, whose presence is of the essence of the Contract. AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS Or THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION -THIRTEENTH EDITION - AUGUST 1976 12 A201-1976 AIAR - C 1476 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 173S NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 separate contracts in connection with other portions of and charge the cost thereof to the contractors responsible the Project or other work on the site under these or similar therefor as the Architect shall determine to be just. Conditions of the Contract. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved becal-se of such ARTICLE 7 action by the Owner, he shall make such claim as pro- vided elsewhere in the Contract Document. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other work on the site, the term 7.1 GOVERNING LAW Contractor in the Contract Documents in each case shall 7.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner- place where the Project is located. Contractor Agreement. 6.1.3 The Owner will provide for the co.:di ration of the 7.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS work of his own forces and of each separate contractor 7.2.1 The Owner and the Contractor each binds himself, with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate his partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives therewith as provided in Paragraph 6.2. to the other party hereto and to the partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in re- 6,2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY spect to all covenants, agreements and obligations con- 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate tained in the Contract Documents. Neither party to the contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction Contract shall assign the Contract or sublet it as a whole and storage of their materials and equipment and the without the written consent of the other, nor shall the execution of their work, and shall connect and coordinate Contractor assign any moneys due or to become due to his Work with theirs as required by the Contract IDocu- him hereunder, without the previous written consent of ments. the Owner. 6.2.2 If any part of the Contractor's Work depends for 7.3 WRITTEN NOTICE proper execution or results upon the work of the Owner 7,3,1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly or any separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to served if delivered in person to the individual or member proceeding with the Work, promptly report to the Archi- of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for tect any apparent discrepancies or defeL,s in such other whom it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by regis- work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution tered or certified mail to the last business address known and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall to him who gives the notice. constitute an acceptance of the Owner's or separate con- tractors' work as fit and proper to receive his Work, ex- 7.4 CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES cept as to defects which may subsequently become appar- 7,4.1 Should either party to the Contract suffer injury or rent in such work by others. damage to person or property because of any act or omis- sion of the other party or of any of his employees, agents 6.2.3 Any costs caused by defective or ill-timed work or others for whose acts he is legally liable, claim shall be shall be borne by the party responsible therefor. made in writing to such other party within a reasonable 6.2.4 Should the Contractor wrongfully cause damage to time after the first observance of such injury or damage. the work or property of the Owner, or to other work on 7.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND the site, the Contractor shall promptly remedy such dam- MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND age as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. 7.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Con- 6.2.5 Should the Contractor wrongfully cause damage to tractor to furnish bonds covering the faithful performance the work or property of any separate contractor, the Con- of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising tractor shall upon due notice promptly attempt to settle thereunder if and as required in the Bidding Documents with such other contractor by agreement, or otherwise to or in the Contract Documents. resolve the dispute. If such separate contractor sues or RIGHTS AND REMEDIES initiates an arbitration proceeding against the Owner on 7.6 account of any damage alleged to have been caused by 7,6,1 The duties and obligations imposed by the Contract the Contractor, the Owner shall notify the Contractor Documents and the rights and remedies available there- who shall defend such proceedings at the Owner's ex- under shall be in addition to and not a limitation of any pense, and if any judgment or award against the Owner duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise im- arises therefrom the Contractor shall pay or satisfy it and posed or available by law. shall reimburse the Owner for all attorneys' fees and court or arbitration costs which the Owner has incurred. 7,6,2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of any right or duty 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP afforded any of them under the Contract, nor shall any 6.3.1 If a dispute arises between the Contractor and sepa- such action or failure to act constitute an approval of or rate contractors as to their responsibility for cleaning up acquiescence in any breach thereunder, except as may be as required by Paragraph 4.15, the Owner may clean up specifically agreed in writing. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION •THIRTEENTH EDITION• AUGUST 1976 AIA9 • © 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A2�1-1976 11 and (2) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or or omission of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone reasonable objection. for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with any such whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or the hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to ne- Architect has made reasonable objection under the provi- gate, abridge, or otherwise reduce any other right or obli- sions of Subparagraph 5.2.1. The Contractor shall not be gation of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to any required to contract with anyone to whom he has a rea- party or person described in this Paragraph 4.18, sonable objection. 4.18.2 In any and all claims against the Owner or the 5.2.3 If the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objec- Architect or any of their agents or employees by any tion to any such proposed person or entity, the Contrac- employee of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone for shall submit a substitute to whom the Owner or the directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone Architect has nc reasonable objection, and the Contract for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnifi- Sum shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cation obligation under this Paragraph 4.18 shall not, be cost occasioned by such substitution and an appropriate limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or Change Order shall be issued; however, no increase in type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or the Contract Sum shall be allowed for any such substitu- for the Contractor or any Subcontractor under workers' tion unless the Contractor has acted promptly and re- or workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or sponsively in submitting names as required by Subpara- other employee benefit acts. graph 5.2.1. 4.18.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this Para- 5.2.4 The Contractor shall make no substitution for any graph 4.18 shall not extend to the 'iability of the Archi- Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the tect, his agents or employees, arising out of (1) the prepa- Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such ration or approval of maps, drawints, opinions, reports, substitution. surveys, change orders, designs or specifications, or (2) 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS the giving of or the failure to give lirections or instruc- tions by the Architect, his agents or employees provided 5.3.1 By an appropriate agreement, written where legally such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the required for validity, the Contractor shall require each injury or damage. Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be per- ARTICLE 5 formed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Con- tractor by the terms of the Contract Documents,and to as- SUBCONTRACTORS sume toward the Contractor all the obligations and re- sponsibilities which the Contractor, by these Documents, 5.1 DEFINITION assumes toward the Owner and the Architect. Said agree- 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a di- ment shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner rect contract with the Contractor to perform any of the and the Architect under the Contract Documents with re- Work at the site. The term Subcontractor is referred to spect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in num- so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such ber and masculine in gender and means a Subcontractor rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifi- or his authorized representative. The term Subcontractor tally provided otherwise in the Contractor-Subcontractor does not include any separate contractor or his subcon- agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress tractors. against the Contractor that the Contractor, by these Docu- ments,ASub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor o Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into per- similar agreements with his Sub-subcontractors.The Con- form any of the Work at the site. The term Sub-subcon- tractor shall make available to each proposed Subcon- tractor is referred to throughout the Contract Documents tractor, prior to the execution of the Subcontract, copies as if singular in number and masculine in gender and of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representa- will be bound by this Paragraph 5.3, and identify to the tive thereof. Subcontractor any terms and conditions of the proposed 5,2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER Subcontract which may be at variance with the Contract CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK Documents. Each Subcontractor shall similarly make cop- 5.2.1 Unless otherwise required by the Contract Docu- ies of such Documents available to his Sub-subcontractors. ments or the Bidding Documents, the Contractor, as soon ARTICLE 6 as practicable after the award of the Contract, shall fur- nish to the Owner and the Architect in writing the names WORK BY OWNER OR BY of the persons or entities (including those who are to fur- SEPARATE CONTRACTORS nish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each of the principal portions of the Work. 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM WORK AND The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect, 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform work re- after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any lated to the Project with his own forces, and to award AIA DOCUMENT A201• GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• THIRTEENTH EDITION . AUGUST 1976 10 A201-1976 AIA® • © 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 ule for the Work. The progress schedule shall be related portions of the Work shall be in accordance with ap- to the entire Project to the extent required by the Con- proved submittals. tract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and 413 USE OF SITE practicable execution of the Work. 4.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site 4.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the 4.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encum- Owner one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, ber the site with any materials or equipment. Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in 414 CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK good order and marked currently to record all changes made during construction, and approved Shop Drawings, 4.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, Product Data and Samples. These shall be available to fitting or patching that may be required to complete the the Architect and shall be delivered to him for the Owner Work or to make its several parts fit together properly. upon compl..t on of the Work. 4, 4.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger any 4.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES portion of the Work or the work of the Owner or any 4.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise and other data specially prepared for the Work by the altering any work, or by excavation. The Contractor shall Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner or any or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. separate contractor except with the written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor. The Contractor 4.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or any performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and separate contractor his consent to cutting or otherwise other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate altering the Work. a material, product or system for some portion of the 415 CLEANING UP Work. 4.15.1 The Contractor at all times shall keep the premises 4.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish materials, equ,)ment or workmanship and establish caused by his operations. At the completion of the Work standards by which the Work will be judged. he shall remove all his waste materials and rubbish from 4.12.4 The Contractor shall review, approve and submit, and about the Project as well as all his tools, construc- with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to tion equipment, machinery and surplus materials. cause no delay in the Work or in the work of the Owner 4.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up at the comple- or any separate contractor, all Shop Drawings, Product tion of the Work, the Owner may do so as provided in Data and Samples required by the Contract Documents. Paragraph 3.4 and the cost thereof shall be charged to the 4.12.5 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Contractor. Product Data and Samples, the Contractor represents that 4,16 COMMUNICATIONS he has determined and verified all materials, field rneas- 4.16.1 The Contractor shall forward all communications urements, and field construction criteria related thereto, to the Owner through the Architect. or will do so, and that he has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with 4.17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Docu- 4.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license ments. fees. He shall defend all suits or claims for infringement 4.12.6 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsi- of any patent rights and shall save the Owner harmless bility for any deviation from the requirements of the from loss on account thereof, except that the Owner shall Contract Documents by the Architect's @pproval of Shop be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, o Drawings, Product Data or Samples under Subparagraph manufacturers orre the i prod f edf a particular manufacturer rear 2.2.14 unless the Contractor has specifically informed the son to believe that the design, process or product speci- Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of sub- fied is an infringement of a patent, he shall be responsible mission and the Architect has given written approval to for such loss unless he promptly gives such information to the specific deviation.The Contractor shall not be relieved the Architect. from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples by the Architect's 4.18 INDEMNIFICATION approval thereof. 4.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Con- 4.12.7 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in tractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data the Architect and their agents and employees from and or Samples, to revisions other than those requested by against limited t attorneys) fees, arising d and expenses, in ludi result- ing gthe Architect on previous submittals. from the performance of the Work, provided that 4.12.8 No portion of the Work requiring submission of a any such claim, damage, loss or expense (1) is attributable Shop Drawing, Product Data or Sample shall be com- to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury menced until the submittal has been approved by the to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Architect as provided in Subparagraph 2.2.14. All such Work itself) including the loss of use resulting therefrom, AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION• AUGUST 1976 AIA1 • C; 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1976 9 the Architect for any damage resulting from any such fees, licenses and inspections necessary for the proper errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Docu- execution and completion of the Work which are custom- ments. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the arily secured after execution of the Contract and which Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where are legally required at the time the bids are received. required approved Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples for such portion of the Work. 4.7.2 The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful or- 4.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES ders of any public authority bearing on the performance 4.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, of the Work. using his best skill and attention. He shall be solely re- 4.7.3 It is not the responsibility of the Contractor to sponsible for all construction means, methods, tech- make certain that the Contract Documents are in accord- niglIes, sequences and procedures and for coordinating ance with applicable laws, statutes, building codes and all portions of the Work under the Contract. regulations. If the Contractor observes that any of the 4.3.Y Th., Contractor shall be responsible to Owner Contract Documents are at variance therewith in any re- for the acts and omissions of his employees, Subcontrac- spect, he shall promptly notify the Architect in writing, tors and their agents and employees, and other persons and any necessary changes shall be accomplished by ap- performing any of the Work under a contract with the propriate Modification. Contractor. 4.7.4 If the Contractor performs any Work knowing it to 4.3.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved from his obli- be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regula- gations to perform the Work in accordance with the tions, and without such notice to the Architect, he shall Contract Documents either by the activities or duties of assume full responsibility therefor and shall bear all costs the Architect in his administration of the Contract, or by attributable thereto. inspec"Ons, tests or approvals required or performed un- 4.8 ALLOWANCES der Paragraph 7.7 by persons other than the Contractor. 4.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum 4.4 L.%dOR AND MATERIALS all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items 4.4.1 U-less otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- covered by these allowances shall be supplied for such ments, me Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, amounts and by such persons as the Owner may direct, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and but the Contractor will not be required to employ persons machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other against whom he makes a reasonable objection. facilities and services necessary for the proper execution 4.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- and completion of the Work, whether temporary or per- ments: manent and whether or not incorporated or to be incor- .1 these allowances shall cover the cost to the Con- porated in the Work. tractor, less any applicable trade discount, of the 4.4.2 The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict dis- materials and equipment required by the allowance cipline and good order among his employees and shall not delivered at the site, and all applicable taxes; employ on the Work any unfit person or anyone not .2 the Contractor's costs for unloading and handling skilled in the task assigned to him. on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, prof- it and other expenses contemplated for the original 4.5 WARRANTY allowance shall be included in the Contract Sum and 4.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and the not in the allowance; Architect that all materials and equipment furnished .3 whenever the cost is more than or less than the under this Contract will be new unless otherwise speci- allowance, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted ac- fied, and that all Work will be of good quality, free from cordingly by Change Order, the amount of which faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract will recognize changes, if any, in handling costs on Documents. All Work not conforming to these require- the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit ments, including substitutions not properly approved and and other expenses. authorized, may be considered defective. If required by 4.9 SUPERINTENDENT the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evi- dence as to the kind and quality of materials and equip- 4.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superin- ment. This warranty is not limited by the provisions of tendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attend- Paragraph 13.2. ance at the Project site during the progress of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor and all 4.6 TAXES communications given to the superintendent shall be as 4.6.1 The Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use binding as if given to the Contractor. Important commu- and other similar taxes for the Work or portions thereof nications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communi- provided by the Contractor which are legally enacted at cations shall be so confirmed on written request in each the time bids are received, whether or not yet effective. case. 4,7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 4.10 PROGRESS SCHEDULE 1 4.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- 4.10.1 The Contractor, immediately after being awarded ments, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the build- the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's ing permit and for all other permits and governmental and Architect's information an estimated progress sched- AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 8 A201-1976 AIAO • © 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 2.2.16 The Architect will conduct inspections' to deter- 3.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- mine the dates of Substantial Completion and final com- ments, the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, pletion, will receive and forward to the Owner for the all copies of Drawings and Specifications reasonably nec- Owner's review written warranties and related documents essary for the execution of the Work. required by the Contract and assembled by the Contrac- 3.2.6 The Owner shall forward all instructions to the tor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon Contractor through the Architect. compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 9.9. 2 3.2.7 The foregoing are in addition to other duties and .2.17 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect responsibilities of the Owner enumerated herein and will provide one or more Project Representatives to especially those in respect to Work by Owner or by assist the Architect in carrying out his responsibilities at Separate Contractors, Payments and Completion, and In- the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of any such Project Representative shall be as surance in Articles 6, 9 and 11 respectively. set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract 3.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK Documents. 3.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct defective Work as 2.2.18 The duties, responsibilities and limitations of au- required by Paragraph 13.2 or persistently fails to carry thority of the Architect as the Owner's representative dur- out the Work in accordance with the Contract Docu- ing construction as set forth in the Contract Documents ments, the Owner, by a written order signed personally will not be modified or extended without written con- or by an agent specifically so empowered by the Owner sent of the Owner, the Contractor and the Architect. in writing, may order the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has 2.2.19 In case of the termination of the employment of been eliminated; however, this right of the Owner to the Architect, the Owner shall appoint an architect stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part against whom the Contractor makes no reasonable objet- of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the tion whose status under the Contract Documents shall be Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the that of the former architect. Any dispute in connection extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3. with such appointment shall be subject to arbitration. 3.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK ARTICLE 3 3.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents OWNER and fails within seven days after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction 3.1 DEFINITION of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, after seven days following receipt by the 3.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such Contractor of an additional written notice and without in the Owner-Contractor Agreement and is referred to prejudice to any other remedy he may have, make good throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in num- such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change ber and masculine in gender. The term Owner means the Order shall be issued deducting from the payments then Owner or his authorized representative. or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting 3,2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED such deficiencies, including compensation for the Archi- OF THE OWNER tect's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and the 3.2.1 The Owner shall, at the request of the Contractor, amount charged to the Contractor are both subject to the at the time of execution of the Owner-Contractor Agree- prior approval of the Architect. If the payments then or ment, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover he has made financial arrangements to fulfill his obliga- such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to tions under the Contract. Unless such reasonable, evi- the Owner. dente is furnished, the Contractor is not required to execute the Owner-Contractor Agreement or to com- mence the Work. CONTRACTOR 3.2.2 The Owner shall furnish all surveys describing the physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility Iota- 4.1 DEFINITION tions for the site of the Project, and a legal description of 4.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as the site. such in the Owner-Contractor Agreement and is referred 3.2.3 Except as provided in Subparagraph 4.7.1, the to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, ease- number and masculine in gender. The term Contractor ments, assessments and charges required for the construc- means the Contractor or his authorized representative. tion, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for per- 4.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS manent changes in existing facilities. 4.2.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare 3.2.4 Information or services under the Owner's control the Contract Documents and shall at once report to the shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable prompt- Architect any error, inconsistency or omission he may dis- ness to avoid delay in the orderly progress of the Work. cover. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS Of THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• THIRTEENTH EDITION• AUGUST 1976 AIAe p 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1976 7 through the Architect. The Architect will have authority, show partiality to either, and will not be liable for the to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided result of any interpretation or decision rendered in good in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified faith in such capacity. by written instrument in accordance with Subparagraph 2 211 The Architect's decisions in matters relating to 2.2.18. artistic effect will be final if consistent with the intent of 2.2.3 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appro- the Contract Documents. priate to the stage of construction to familiarize himself 2.2,12 Any claim, dispute or other matter in question generally with the progress and quality of the Work and between the Contractor and the Owner referred to the to determine in general if the Work is proceeding in ac- Architect, except those relating to artistic effect as pro- cordance with the Contract Documents. However, the vided in Subparagraph 2.2.11 and except those which have Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or con- been waived by the making or acceptance of final pay- tinuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quan- ment as provided in Subparagraphs 9.9.4 and 9.9.5, shall tity of the Work. On the basis of his on-site observations be subject to arbitration upon the written demand of Bi- as an architect, he will keel, the Owner informed of the ther party. However,no demand for arbitration of any such progress of the Work, and will endeavor to guard the claim, dispute or other matter may be made until the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the earlier of (1) the date on which the Architect has rendered Contractor. a written decision, or (2) the tenth day after the parties 2.2.4 The Architect will not be responsible for and will have presented their evidence to the Architect or have not have control or charge of construction means, meth- been given a reasonable opportunity to do so, if the ods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety Architect has not rendered his written decision by that precautions and programs in connection with the Work, date. When such a written decision of the Architect states and he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure (1) that the decision is final but subject to appeal, and to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract (2) that any demand for arbitration of a claim, dispute or Documents, The Architect will not be responsible for or other matter covered by such decision must be made have control or charge over the acts or omissions of the within thirty days after the date on which the party mak- Contractor, Subcontractors, or any of their agents or em- ing the demand receives the written decision, failure to ployees, or any other persons performing any of the demand arbitration within said thirty days' period will re- Work. sult in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and the Contractor. If the Architect 2.2.5 The Architect shall at all times have access to the renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been Work wherever it is in preparation and progress. The initiated, such decision may be entered as evidence but Contractor shall provide facilities for such access so the will not supersede any arbitration proceedings unless the Architect may perform his functions under the Contract decision is acceptable to all parties concerned. Documents. 2,2.13 The Architect will have authority to reject Work 2.2.6 Based on the Architect's observations and an evalu- which does not conform to the Contract Documents. ation of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Whenever, in his opinion, he considers it necessary or Architect will determine the amounts owing to the Con- advisable for the implementation of the intent of the tractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such Contract Documents, he will have authority to require amounts,as provided in Paragraph 9.4. special inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Subparagraph 7.7.2 whether or not such Work be 2.2.7 The Architect will be the interpreter of the require- then fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither menu of the Contract Documents and the judge of the the Architect's authority to act under this Subparagraph performance thereunder by both the Owner and Con- 2.2.13, nor any decision made by him in good faith either tractor. to exercise or not to exercise such authority, shall give 2.2.8 The Architect will render interpretations necessary rise to any duty or responsibility of the Architect to the for the proper execution or progress of the Work, with Contractor, any Subcontractor, any of their agents or reasonable promptness and in accordance with any time employees, or any other person performing any of the limit agreed upon. Either party to the Contract may make Work. written request to the Architect for such interpretations. 2.2.14 The Architect will review and approve or take 2.2.9 Claims, disputes and other matters in question be- other appropriate action upon Contractor's submittals tween the Contractor and the Owner relating to the exe- such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but cution or progress of the Work or the interpretation of the only for conformance with the design concept of the Contract Documents shall be referred initially to the Work and with the information given in the Contract Architect for decision which he will render in writing Documents. Such action shall be taken with reasonable within a reasonable time. promptness so as to cause no delay. The Architect's ap- proval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of 2.2.10 All interpretations and decisions of the Architect an assembly of which the item is a component. shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably in ferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writ- 2.2.15 The Architect will prepare Change Orders in ac- ing or in the form of drawings. In his capacity as inter- cordance with Article 12, and will have authority to order preter and judge, he will endeavor to secure faithful per- minor changes in the Work as provided in Subparagraph formance by both the Owner and the Contractor, will not 12.4.1. AfA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 6 A201-1976 AIA® • C 19'6 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N V, , WASHINGTON, O.C. 20006 i GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ARTICLE 1 1.2.2 By executing the Contract, the Contractor represents that he has visited the site, familiarized himself with the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS local conditions under which the Work is to be per- formed, and correlated his observations with the require- 1.1 DEFINITIONS ments of the Contract Documents. 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.2.3 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include The Contract Documents consist of the Owner-Contrac- all items necessary for the proper execution and comple- tor Agreement, the Conditions of the Contract (General, tion of the Work. The Contract Documents are comple- Supplementary and other Conditions), the Drawings, the mentary, and what is required by any one shall be as Specifications, and all Addenda issued prior to and all binding as if required by all. Work not covered in the Con- Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A tract Documents will not be required unless it is consistent Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract therewith and is reasonably inferable therefrom as being signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a written necessary to produce the intended results. Words and ab- interpretation issued by the Architect pursuant to Sub- breviations which have well-known technical or trade paragraph 2.2.8, or (4) a written order for a minor change meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accord- in the Work issued by the Architect pursuant to Paragraph ante with such recognized meanings. 12.4. The Contract Documents do not include Bidding 1.2.4 The organization of the Specifications into divisions, Documents such as the Advertisement or Invitation to sections and articles, and the arrangement of Drawings Bid, the Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Con- tractor's Bid or portions of Addenda relating to any of these, or any other documents, unless specifically enu- among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of merated in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. Work to be performed by any trade. 1,1,2 THE CONTRACT 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construe- 1.3.1 All Drawings, Specifications and copies thereof tion. This Contract represents the entire and integrated furnished by the Architect are and shall remain his prop- agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes all erty. They are to be used only with respect to this Project prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either and are not to be used on any other project. With the written or oral.The Contract may be amended or modified exception of one contract set for each parry to the Con- only by a Modification as defined in Subparagraph 1.1.1. tract, such documents are to be returned or suitably The Contract Documents shall not be construed to Create accounted for to the Architect on request at the comple- any contractual relationship of any kind between the Ar- tion of the Work. Submission or distribution to meet offi- chitect and the Contractor, but the Architect shall be cial regulatory requirements or for other purposes in entitled to performance of obligations intended for his connection with the Project is not to be construed as benefit, and to enforcement thereof. Nothing contained publication in derogation of the Architect's common law in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual copyright or other reserved rights. relationship between the Owner or the Architect and any ARTICLE 2 Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor. 1,1,3 THE WORK ARCHITECT The Work comprises the completed construction required 2.1 DEFINITION by the Contract Documents and includes all labor neces- sary to produce such construction, and all materials and 2.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in such practice architecture, or an entity lawfully practicing construction. architecture identified as such in the Owner-Contractor 1,1,4 THE PROJECT Agreement, and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine in The Project is the total construction of which the Work gender. The term Architect means the Architect or his performed under the Contract Documents may be the authorized representative. whole or a part. 2,2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 1,2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT 2.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the 1.2.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed in not less Contract as hereinafter described. than triplicate by the Owner and Contractor. If either the Owner or the Contractor or both do not sign the C:ondi- 2.2.2 The Architect will be the Owner's representative tions of the Contract, Drawings, Specifications, or any of during construction and until final payment is due. The the other Contract Documents, the Architect shall iden- Architect will advise and consult with the Owner. The tify such Documents. Owner's instructions to the Contractor shall be forwarded AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - THIRTEENTH EDITION - AUGUST 1976 AIA1 - 1976 - THE AMCRICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, Nw., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A2U1-1976 5 Payment, Failure of ................9.5.2,9.6.1.3,9.7,9.9.2,14 ;SUBCONTRACTORS ............................... ...5 Payment, Final 2.2.12,2.2.16,9.9,13.3.1 Subcontractors, Definition of .............................5.1 .......... Payments, Progress ..........7.8,7.9.3,9.5.5,9.8.2,9.9.3,12.1.4 Subcontractors, Work by ...............1.2.4,2.2.4,43.1,4.3.2 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION ...........................9 Subcontractual Relations ................5.3 Payments to Subcontractors .................9.5.2,9.5.3,9.5.4, :submittals ....................1.3,4.10,4.12, 5.2.1, 5.2.3,9.2, 9.6.1.3, 11.3.3, 14.2.1 9.3.1,9.8.1,9.9.2,9.9.3 Payments Withheld .....9.6 Subrogation, Waiver of ..............................11.3.6 Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond ..7.5 :Substantial Completion ......2.2.16,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.2,9.8,13.2.2 Permits, Fees and Notices .....................3.2.3,4.7,4.13 Substantial Completion, Definition of ...................8.1.3 PERSONS AND PROPERTY PROTECTION OF 10 Substitution of Subcontractors ....................5.2.3,5.2.4 Product Data, Definition of ............ ..4.12.2 Substitution of the Architect ..........................2.2.19 Product Data, Shop Drawings, Samples and ...2.2.14,4.2.1,4.12 Substitutions of Materials .........................4.5,12.1.4 Progress and Completion ..2.2.3,7.9.3,8.2 Sub-subcontractors,Definition of .......................5.1.2 ................. Progress Payments ...........7.8,7.9.3,9.5.5,9.8.2,9.9.3,12.1.4 Subsurface Conditions ...............................12.2. Progress Schedule .. .................................4.10 Successors and Assigns ...................... 7.2 Project, Definition of .................................1.1.4 Supervision and Construction Procedures .1.2.4,2.2.4,4.3,4.4,10 Project Representative 2.2.17 Superintendent, Contractor's ......................4.9,10.2.6 Property Insurance ................11.3 Surety, Consent of ..............................9.9.2,9.9.3 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY ..............10 Surveys .......................................3.2.2,4.18.3 Regulations and Laws .....1.3,2.1.1,4.6,4.7,4.13,7.1,10.2.2,14 Taxes ................................................4.6 Rejection of Work ........................2.2.13,4.5.1,13.2 Termination by the Contractor .........................14.1 Releases of Waivers and Liens .. ...............9.9.2,9.9.4 Termination by the Owner ............................ Representations .......... ..1.2.2,4.5,4.12.5,9.4.2,9.6.1,9.9.1 Termination of the Architect .........................2. . Representatives ............................2.1,2.2.2,2.2.17, TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT ......................14 t 2.2.18,3.1,4.1,4.9,5.1,9.3.3 Tests .................................2.2.13,4.3.3,7.7,9.4.2 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work .....2.2.4,4.3.2, Time ..................................................8 6.1.3,6.2,9.8.1 Time, Definition of ....................................8.1 Retainage .......................9.3.1,9.5.2.9.8.2,9.9.2,9.9.3 Time,Delays and Extensions of ...........8.3,12.1,12.3,13.2.7 Review of Contract Documents Time Limits, Specific ..................2.2.8,2.2.12,3.2.1, 3.4, by the Contractor ........................1.2.2,4.2,4.7.3 4.10,5.3,6.2.2,7.9.2,8.2,8.3.2,8.3.3,9.2,9.3.1, Reviews of Contractor's Submittals by 9.4.1,9.5.1,9.7,11.1.4,11.3.1,11.3.8,11.3.9, Owner and Architect .....2.2.14,4.10,4.12,5.2.1,5.2.3,9.2 12.2,12.3,13.2.2,13.2.5,13.2.7,14.1,14.2.1 Rights and Remedies ......1.1.2,2.2.12,2.2.13,3.3,3.4,5.3,6.1, Title to Work ...................................9.3.2,9.3.3 6.3, 7.6,7.9,8.3.1,9.6.1,9.7,10.3,12.1.2,12.2,13.2.2,14 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK .............13 Royalties and Patents .................................4.17 Uncovering of Work ..................................13.1 Safety of Persons and Property .........................10.2 Unforseen Conditions .............................8.3,12.2 Safety Precautions and Programs ..................2.2.4,10.1 Unit Prices ...................................12.1.3,12.1.5 Samples, Definition of ...............................4.12.3 Use of Documents .......................1.1.1,1.3,3.2.5,5.3 Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and .....2.2.14,4.2,4.12 Use of Site .....................................4.13,6.2.1 Samples at the Site, Documents and ....................4.11 Values, Schedule of ....................................9.2 Schedule of Values ....................................9.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor ....7.6.2,8.3.2,9.9.5,11.3.6 Schedule, Progress ...................................4.10 Waiver of Claims by the Owner ......7.6.2,9.9.4,11.3.6,11.4.1 Separate Contracts and Contractors ...4.14.2,6,11.3.6,13.1.2 Waiver of Liens ......................................9.9.2 Shop Drawings, Definition of .........................4.12.1 Warranty and Warranties ....2.2.16,4.5,9.3.3,9.8.1,9.9.4,13.2.2 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples ... 2.2.14,4.2,4.12 Weather Delays ... ..................................8.3.1 Site, Use of .4.13,6.2.1 Work, Definition of ..................................1.13 Site Visits,Architect's ................2.2.3, 2.2.5,2.2.6,2.2.17, Work by Owner or by Separate Contractors ................6 7.7.1, 7.7.4,9.4.2,9.6.1,9.9.1 Written Consent ......2.2.18,4.14.2,7.2,7.6.2,9.8.1,9.9.3,9.9.4 Site Inspections ..1.2.2,2.2.3,2.2.16,7.7,9.8.1,9.9.1 Written Interpretations ...............1.1.1,1.2.4,2.2.8,12.3.2 Special Inspection and Testing ....................2.2.13,7.7 Written Notice .....2.2.8,2.2.12,3.4,4.2,4.7.3,4.7.4,4.9,4.12.6, Specifications ...............................1.1.1,1.2.4,1.3 4.12.7, 4.17, 5.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 7.7, 7.9.2, 8.1.2, 8.3.2, 8.3.3, Statutes of Limitations ....................7.9.2, 13.2.2, 13.2.7 9.4.1, 9.6.1, 9.7, 9.9.1, 9.9.5, 10.2.6, 11.1.4, 11.3.1, 11.3.4, Stopping the Work ......................3.3,9.7.1,10.3,14.1 11.3.5,11.3.7,11.3.8,12.2,12.3,13.2.2,13.2.5,14 Stored Materials ............6.2.1,9.3.2,10.2.1.2,11.3.1,13.2.5 Written Orders ...................3.3,4.9,12.1.4,12.4.1,13.1 i AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION• AUGUST 1976 4 A201-1976 AIAC" • © 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 Decisions of the Architect ......2.2.9 through 2.2.12, 6.3, 7.7.2, 4.12.6,4.17,4.18.3,6.2.2,7.6.2,9.4 2, 7.9.1,8.3.1,9.2,9.4,9.6.1,9.8.1, 12.1.4, 12.3.1, 14.2.1 9.9.4,9.9.5,10.2.5,11.1.2,11.3.6 Defective or Non-Conforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection Limitations of Time, General .....2.2.8, 2.2.14, 3.2.4, 4.2, 4.7.3, and Correction of ....2.2.3,2.2.13, 3.3, 3.4, 4.5, 6.2.2,6.2.3, 4.12.4,4.15,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.4,7.7,8.2,9.5.2,9.6, 9.6.1.1,9.9.4.2,13 9.8,9.9,11.3.4,12.1.4,12.4,13.2.1,13.2.2,13.2.5 Definitions ........1.1, 2.1, 3.1,4.1, 4.12.1 through 4.12.3, 5.1, Limitations of Time, Specific ...........2.2.8, 2.2.12, 3.2.1, 3.4, 6.1.2, 8.1,9.1.1, 12.1.1, 12:1.4 4.10,5.3,6.2.2,7.9.2,8.2,8.3.2,8.3.3,9.2,9.3.1,9.4.1,9.5.1, Delays and Extensions of Time ...................... ....13.3 9.7, 11.1.4,11.3.1,11.3.8,11.3.9,12.2,12.3,13.2.2, Disputes .................2.2.9, 2.2.12, 2.2.19, 6.2.5, 63, 7.9.1 13.2.5, 13.2.7, 14.1, 14.2.1 Documents and Samples at the Site .................. ...4.11 Limitations, Statutes of ...................7.9.2, 13.2.2, 13.2.7 Drawings and Specifications, Use and Loss of Use Insurance .................................11.4 Ownership of ......................1.1.1, 1.3, 3.2.5, 5.3 Materials, Labor, Equipment and ......1.1.3,4.4, 4.5, 4.12, 4.13, Emergencies .........................................10.3 4.15.1, 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 11.3.1, 13.2.2, 13.2.5, 14 Employees, Contractor's .....4.3.2, 4.4.2, 4.8.1, 4.9, 4.18, 10.2.1 Materials Suppliers .......................4.12.1, 5.2.1, 9.3.3 through 10.2.4, 10.2.6, 10.3, 111.1 Means, Methods,Techniques, Sequences and Equipment, Labor, Materials and ....1.1.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.12, 4.13, Procedures of Construction .............2.2.4, 4.3.1, 9.4.2 4.15.1, 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 11.3, 13.2.2, 13.2.5, 14 Minor Changes in the Work ................1.1.1, 2.2.15, 124 Execution and Progress of the Work ....1.1.3, 1.2.3, 2.23, 2.2:.4, MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS ...........................7 2.2.8, 4.2, 4.4.1, 4.5, 6.2.2, 7.9.3, 8.2 Modifications, Definition of ...........................1.1.1 8.3, 9.6.1, 10.2.3, 10.2.4, 14.2 Modifications to the Contract ........1.1.1, 1.1.2, 2.2.2, 2.2.18, Execution, Correlation and Intent of the 4.7.3, 7.9.3, 12 Contract Documents ...............1.2, 4.7.1 Mutual Responsibility ..................................6.2 Extensions of Time ................................8.3, 12.1 Non-Conforming Work, Acceptance of Defective or .....13.3.1 Failure of Payment by Owner ......................9.7,14.1 Notice,Written ....... 2.2.8,2.2.12, 3.4,4.2,4.7.3,4.7.4,4.9, Failure of Payment of Subcontractors ..9.5.2,9.6.1.3,9.9.2,14.2.1 4.12.6,4.12.7,4.17,5.2.1,7.3,7.4,7.7,7.9.2,8.1.2,8.3.2, Final Completion and Final Payment ..2.2.12, 2.2.16, 9.9, 13.3.1 8.3.3,9.4.1,9.6.1,9.7,9.9.1, 9.9.5,10.2.6,11.1.4,11.3.1, Financial Arrangements, Owner's .. ..3.2.1 11.3.4,11.3.5,11.3.7,11.3.8,12.2,12.3,13.2.2,'.3.2.5,14 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance .................11.3.1 Notices, Permits, Fees and ........................4.7,10.2.2 Governing Law .......................................7.1 Notice of Testing and Inspections .......................7.7 Guarantees (See Warranty Notice to Proceed ......................... .....8.1.2 and Warranties) ........2.2.16,4.5,9.3.3,9.8.1,9.9.4,13.2.2 Observations,Architect's On-Site ........2.2.3,7.7.1 7.7.4,9.4.2 Indemnification .......................4.17, 4.18, 6.2.5, 9.9.2 Observations, Contractor's ..................1.2.2,4.2.1,4.7.3 Identification of Contract Documents ..................1.2.1 Occupancy ..............................8.1.3,9.5.5,11.3.9 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers ...........5.2.1 On-Site Inspections by the Architect ........2.2.3,2.2.16,9.4.2, Information and 9'8'1'9'9'1 Services Required of the Owner ........3.2,6,9,11.2,11.3 On-Site Observations by the Architect .......2.2.3,2.2.6,2.2.17, Inspections ...............2.2.13, 2.2.16, 4.3.3, 7.7, 9.8.1,9.9.1 7.7.1,7.7.4,9.4.2,9.6.1,9.9.1 Instructions to Bidders ............................1.1.1,7.5 Orders, Written ...................3.3,4.9,12.1.4,12.4.1,13.1 Instructions to the OWNER ...............................................3 Contractor ..........2.2.2, 3.2.6, 4.8.1, 7.7.2, 12.1.2, 12.1.4 Owner, Definition of .............3.1 INSURANCE ............ ........9.8.1,11 Owner, Information and Services Required of the ....3.2,6.1.3, Insurance, Contractor's Liability ........................111.1 6.2,9,11.2,11.3 Insurance, Loss of Use .............................111.4 Owner's Authority .............2.2.16,4.8.1, 7.7.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, Insurance, Owner's liability ...........................1112 9.8.1,11.3.8,12.1.2, 12.1.4 Insurance, Property ..... .............................111.3 Owner's Financial Capability ...........................3.2.1 Insurance, Stored Materials .....................9.3.2,11.3.1 Owner's Liability Insurance ............................11.2 Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy ....11.3.9 Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors ..........1.1.2,9.5.4 Insurance Companies, Settlement With ................11.3.8 Owners Right to Carry Out the Work ..............3.4,13.2.4 Intent of Owners Right to Clean Up .......................4.15.2, 6.3 the Contract Documents ...1.2.3,2.2.10,2.2.13,2.2.14,12.4 Owners Right to Perform Work and to Award Interest ..............................................7.8 Separate Contracts .................................6.1 Interpretations, Written .........1.1.1, 2.2.7, 2.2.8, 2.2.10, '12.4 Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract ................14.2 Labor and Materials, Equipment ....1.1.3, 4.4, 4.5, 412, 4.13, Owners Right to Stop the Work .........................3.3 4.15.1,6.2.1,9.3.2,9.3.3,11.3,13.2.2,13.2.5,14 Ownership and Use of Documents ........1.1.1,1.3,3.2.5,5.2.3 Labor and Material Payment Bond ......................7.5 Patching of Work, Cutting and ....................4.14,6.2.2 Labor Disputes ......................................8.3.1 Patents, Royalties and ...............................4.17.1 Laws and Regulations ..............1.3, 2.1., 4.6,4.7,4.13, 7.1, Payment Bond, Labor and Material .......................7.5 7.7, 10.2.2, 14 Payment, Applications for ............2.2.6, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.3, Liens ...................................9.3.3, 9.9.2, 9'1.4.1 9.6.1,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.9.3,14.2.2 Limitations of Authority .....2.2.2, 2.2.17, 2.2.18, 11.3.8, 12.4.1 Payment,Certificates for ...............2.2.6,2.2.16,9.4,9.5.1, Limitations of Liability ......2.2.10, 2.2.13,2.2.14,3.3,4.2,4.7.3, 9.5.5,9.6.1,9.7.1,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.9.3,12.1.4,14.22 AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION- THIRTEENTH EDITION- AUGUST 1976 AIA'IR - © 1976 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1976 3 INDEX Acceptance of Defective or Non-Conforming Work ..6.2.2, 13.3 Cleaning Up ........................... ..4.15, 6.3 Acceptance of Work ............5.4.2, 9.5.5, 9.8.1, 9.9.1, 9.9.3 Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to..3.2.1,4.2, Access to Work 2.2.5, 6.2.1 4.7.1, 4.10,5.2.1,6.2.2, 7.5,9.2,11.1.4,11.3.4 ................................ Accident Prevention ..............................2.2.4,10 Commencement of the Work, Definition of .............8.1.2 Acts and Omissions ........2.2.4,4.18.3, 7.4, 7.6.2 8.3.1,10.2.5 Communications ....................2.2.2, 3.7 6, 4.9.1, 4.16 Additional Costs, Claims for .......... ..............12.3 Completion, Administration of the Contract ....................2.2, 4.3.3 Conditions Relating to ...2.2.16,4.11,4.15,9.4.2,9.9,13.2. All Risk Insurance .................................. 11.3.1 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND ..........................9 Allowances 4.8 Completion, Substantial ....2.2.16, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.2, 9.8, 13.1 ........................................... Applications for Payment 2.2.6, 9.2, 9.3,9.4, Compliance with Laws ................1.3,2.1.1,4.6,4..2 4.1 , .................. 7.1, 7.7, 10.2.2, 14 9.5.3,9.6.1,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.9.3,14.2.2 Concealed Conditions .'12'2 ............................... Approvals ...............2.2.14, 3.4, 4.3.3, 4.5, 4.12.4 through Consent, 4.12.6, 4.12.8, 4.18.3, 7.7, 9.3.2 Written Arbitration .2.2.7 through 2.2.13, 2.2.19, 6.2.5, 2.2 18, 4.14.2, 7.2, 7.6.2, 9.8.1,9.9.2, 9.9.3, 11.3.9 "' Contract, Definition of 1.1.2 7.9,8.3.1,11.3.7,11.3.8 """"������•�������� ARCHITECT ............................................2 Contract Administration ........................ .2.2, 4.3.3 Architect, Definition of Contract Award and Execution, Conditions •••••"""""""""""......2.1 Relating to .........4.7.1, 4.10, 5.2, 7.5, 9.2, 11.' 4, 11.3.4 Architect, Extent of Authority . ...2.2, 3.4, 4.12.8, 5.2, 6.3, 7.7.2, CONTRACT DOCUMENTS •••••••1 8.1.3,83.1,9.2,9.3.1,9.4,9.5.3,9.6,9.8,9.9.1,9.9.3, 12.1.1, Contract Documents, 12.1.4,12.3.1,12.4.1,13.1,13.2.1,13.2.5, 14.2 Copies Furnished and Use of ...............1.:: 3.2.5, 5.3 Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility .....2.2.2 Contract Documents, Definition of .....................1.1.1 through 2.2.4,2.2.10 through 2.2.14,2.2.17,2.2.18, Contract Sum, Definition of ...........................9.1.1 4.3.3,4.12.6,5.2.1,9.4.2,9.5.4,9.5.51 12.4 Contract Termination ...................................14 Architect's Additional Services ..3.4, 7.7.2, 13.2.1, 13.2.5, 14.2.2 Contract Time, Definition of ..........................8.1.1 Architect's Approvals ......2.2.14, 3.4, 4.5, 4.12.6, 4.12.8, 4.18.3 CONTRACTOR .........................................4 Architect's Authority to Reject Work ....2.2.13,4.5, 13.1.2, 13.2 Contractor, Definition of ..........................4.1, 6.1.2 Architect's Copyright ...................................'1.3 Contractor's Employees ......4.3.2, 4.4.2, 4.8.1, 4.9, 4.18, 10.2.1 Architect's Decisions ..........2.2.7 through 2.2.13, 6.3, 7.7.2, through 10.2.4, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.1.1 7.9.1,8.3.1,9.2,9.4,9.6.1,9.8.1,12.1.4,12.3.1 Contractor's Liability Insurance ........................11.1 Architect's Inspections ..............2.2.13, 2.2.16, 9.8.1, 9.9.1 Contractor's Relationship with Architect's Instructions ..........2.2.13,2.2.15, 7.7.2, 12.4, 13.1 Separate Contractors and Owner's Forces .........3.2.7, 6 Architect's Interpretations .........2.2.7 through 2.2.10, 12.3.2 Contractor's Relationship with Architect's On-Site Observations ......2.2.3, 2.2.5, 2.2.6, 2.2.17, Subcontractors .........1.2.4, 5.2, 5.3, 9.5.2, 11.3.3, 11.3.6 7.7.1, 7.7.4, 9.4.2,9.6.1,9.9.1 Contractor's Relationship with the Architect ........1.1.2,2.2.4, Architect's Project Representative ..............2.2.17, 2.2.18 2.2.5,2.2.10,2.2.13,4.3.3,4.5,4.7.3,4.12.6,4.18,11.3.6 Architect's Relationship with Contractor .....1.1.2, 2.2.4, 2.2.5, Contractor's Representations ............1.2.2,4.5,4.12.5,9.3.3 2.2.10,2.2.13, 4.3.3,4.5,4.7.3,4.12.6, 4.18, 113.6 Contractor's Responsibility for Architect's Relationship with Those Performing the Work ...............4.3.2, 4.18, 10 Subcontractors ..................1.1.2, 2.2.13, 9.5.3, 9.5.4 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents ....1.2.2, 4.2,4.7.3 Architect's Representations .................9.4.2, 9.6.1, 9.9.1 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work .....................9.7 Artistic Effect .......................1.2.3,2.2.11,2.2.12,7.9.1 Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract ............14.1 Attorneys' Fees ...........................4.18.1,6.2.5,9.9.2 Contractor's Submittals ...............2.2.14,4.10, 4.12, 5.2.1, Award of Separate Contracts ..........................6.1.1 5.2.3,9.2,9.3.1,9.8.1,9.9.2,9.9.3 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Contractor's Superintendent ......................4.9, 10.2.6 Portions of the Work ..............................5.2 Contractor's Supervision and Bonds, Lien .........................................9.9.2 Construction Procedures ..........1.2.4, 2.2.4, 4.3, .1 . Bonds, Performance, Labor and Material Payment ....7.5, 9.9.3 Contractual Liability Insurance ........................11 1.13 .3 Building Permit .......................................4.7 Coordination and Certificate of Substantial Completion ...................9.8.1 Correlation ....1.2.2, 1.2.4, 4.3.1, 4.10.1, 4.12.5, 6.1.3, 6.2.1 Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval ...........7.7.3 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications ..1.3,3.2.5,5.3 Certificates of Insurance ........................9.3.2, 11.1.4 Correction of Work .....................3.3, 3.4, 10.2.5, 13.2 Certificates for Payment ....2.2.6, 2.2.16, 9.4,9.5.1, 9.5.5, 9.6.1, Cost, Definition of ..................................12.1.4 9.7.1,9,8,2,9.9.1, 9.9.3, 12.1.4, 1 it.2.2 Costs ......3.4, 4.8.2, 4.15.2, 5.2.3, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 6.2.5, 6.3, 7.7.1, Change Orders ..........1.1.1, 2.2.15, 3.4, 4.8.2.3, 5.2.3, 7.7.2. 7.7.2,9.7,11.3.1,11.3.5,12.1.3,12.1.4,12.3,13.1.2,13.2,14 8.3.1, 9.7, 9.9.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.5, 11.3.71 Cutting and Patching of Work ......................4.14,6.2 12.1,13.1.2, 13.2.5, 13.3.1 Damage to the Work ................6.2.4,6.2.5,9.6.1.5,9.8.1, Change Orders, Definition of ........................12.1.1 10.2.1.2, 10.3, 11.3, 13.2.6 1 CHANGES IN THE WORK .................. 2.2.15, 4.1.1, 12 Damages, Claims for ............6.1.1, 6.2.5, 7.4, 8.3.4, 9.6.1. Claims for Additional Cost or Time ....8.3.2, 8.3.3, 12.2.1, 12.3 Damages for Delay ..........................6.1.1, 8.3.4, 9.7 Claims for Damages 6.1.1, 6.2.5, 7.4, 8.3, 9.6.1.1 Day, Definition of ...... .......... ....................8.1.4 AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - THIRTEENTH EDITION - AUGUST 1976 2 A201-1976 AIA,� - C, 19%6 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.1\', WASHINGTON, D.C. 200% THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS AIA Document A201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES; CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS MOD"ICATION 1976 EDITION TABLE OF ARTICLES 1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 8. TIME 2. ARCHITECT 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 3. OWNER 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 4. CONTRACTOR 11. INSURANCE 5. SUBCONTRACTORS 12. CHANGES IN THE WORK 6. WORK BY OWNER OR BY 13. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION SEPARATE CONTRACTORS OF WORK 7. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14. TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. Copyright 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1%3,1966,1967,1970,© 1976 by The American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.,Washington, D.C.20006. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its pro- visions without permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecution. AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - THIRTEENTH EDITION- AUGUST 1976 AIA® - C 1976 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D,C. 20006 A201-1976 1 DOCUMENT 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1 . 01 DESCRIPTION A. AIA Document A201 , General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Thirteenth Edition, August 1976, 19 pages . B. Document is bound as part of this Project Manual . PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. - END OF DOCUMENT - 8632 00700-1 General Conditions VA low BIDDING REQUIREMENTS CONTRACT FORMS and CONDITIONS of the CONTRACT DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07145 Cementitious Waterproofing 3 07145 07160 Bituminous Dampproofing 3 07160 07200 Insulation 3 07200 07250 Fireproofing 5 07250 07500 Membrane Roofing 6 07500 07700 Roof Specialties and Accessories 4 07700 07900 Joint Sealers 5 07900 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08100 Metal Doors and Frames 5 08100 08210 Wood Doors 4 08210 08610 Wood Windows 4 08610 08710 Finish Hardware 7 06710 08600 Glazing 5 08800 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09250 Gypsum Board 6 09250 09300 Tile 5 09300 09510 Acoustical Ceilings 3 09510 09550 Wood Flooring 2 09550 09650 Resilient Flooring 5 09650 09680 Carpet 4 09680 09900 Painting 4 09900 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10950 Miscellaneous Specialties 4 10950 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11175 Chutes and Collectors 3 11175 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS NOT USED DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13052 Saunas 3 13052 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14200 Elevators 5 14200 DIVISIO14 15 - MECHANICAL 15100 PLUMBING 20 15100 15200 HVAC 28 15200 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16000 Electrical 39 16000 8632 Table of Contents-2 VA TABLE OF CONTENTS IMF'" HAMPTON COURT PROJECT NO. 8632 06/87 Title Page Table of Contents BIDDING REQUIREMENTS CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENT TITLE # PAGES DOCUMENT 00700 General Conditions 1 00700 00800 Supplementary Conditions 4 00800 SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 1 THROUGH 16 SECTION TITLE # PAGES SECTION DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 Summary of Work 3 01005 01340 Shop Drawings , Product Data, and Samples , with Submittal Form appended 3 01340 01600 Material and Equipment 5 01600 DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK 02010 Subsurface Investigation 1 02010 02060 Building Demolition 3 02060 02080 Asbestos Removal , with Forms Attached 11 02080 02200 Earthwork 5 02200 02490 Planting 12 02490 02500 Paving and Surfacing 5 02500 02830 Fences and Gates 4 02830 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 Cast- In-Place Concrete 6 03300 313 Precast Concrete Plank 4 313 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04200 Unit Masonry 10 04200 DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 Structural Metal Framing 5 05120 05500 Metal Fabrications 10 05500 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTIC 06100 Rough Carpentry 4 06100 06400 Architectural Woodwork 6 06400 8632 Table of Contents-1 VA HAMPTON COURT NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS OWNER: EDWARD BRICE, JR. One Devonshire Place Boston, Massachusetts 02109 617/227-7960 ARCHITECT: VITOLS ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS/PLANNERS 1230 Statler Office Building Boston, Massachusetts 02116 617/482- 1990 CIVIL ENGINEER: ALMER HUNTLEY, JR. & ASSOCIATES 125 Pleasant Street Northampton, Massachusetts 01060 413/584-7444 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: WAYNE WEAVER & ASSOCIATES 17 Garrison Street Boston, Massachusetts 02116 617/262-5060 MECHANICAL ENGINEER: SAM LESBURG & ASSOCIATES 100 Boylston Street Boston, Massachusetts 02116 617/482-3855 ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: GOODALL-SHAPIOR & ASSOCIATES 100 Boylston Street Boston, Massachusetts 02116 617/482-9635 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT: CUMMIN ASSOCIATES 119 Mt . Auburn Street Cambridge, Massachusetts 02138 617/868-0422 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS CONSULTANT: SPEC-EDIT, INC. 29 Barton Street Somerville, Massachusetts 02144 617/623-7314 - 305/685-0432 8632 Title Page-1 06/87 VA 01/01SE2387 3 ('1 H A M P 'I' O N C 0 U R T NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS r� r VITOLS ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS/PLANNERS ARCHITECT PROJECT MANUAL JUNE, 1987